A Foodcentric Life

  • St. Patrick's Day
  • Meet Chef Sally
  • Recipe Index
  • Subscribe
menu icon
go to homepage
  • St. Patrick's Day
  • Meet Chef Sally
  • Recipe Index
  • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
  • search icon
    Homepage link
    • St. Patrick's Day
    • Meet Chef Sally
    • Recipe Index
    • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
  • ×
    Home » Recipes

    Homemade Lemon Custard Ice Cream

    09/22/2015 by Sally Cameron 6 Comments

    lemon ice cream

    Bright, creamy, and refreshingly tart, this homemade lemon custard ice cream is pure sunshine in a scoop. Made with a rich egg yolk custard base, it's ultra-smooth and velvety with the perfect balance of sweet and tangy. Whether you're cooling off on a warm day or craving a citrusy dessert, this luscious ice cream is guaranteed to bring a little joy to every bite for ice cream lovers.

    Lemon Gelato | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Custard ice creams are rich, creamy and smooth, because the base is thickened with egg yolks. They are sometimes referred to as frozen custards rather than ice cream, or French-style ice creams. Whatever you call them, custard ice creams are delicious, plus they scoop easier after being in the freezer versus getting icy. This lemon custard ice cream is of our favorites.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Great texture: lemon custard ice cream is rich and creamy.
    • With an ice cream maker, it's easy to make.
    • Lemon lovers will be very happy!

    Lemon Custard Ice Cream ingredients

    For your shopping list:

    • Dairy: Use real heavy cream and whole milk combined for balanced richness.
    • Lemons: Use both the zest and juice for big lemon flavor.
    • Sweetener: Natural granulated sugar.
    • Eggs: All you need is the yolks.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Love lemon? This lemon olive oil cake is another terrific lemon dessert.

    Chef's tip on lemons: I love cooking with Meyer lemons and am fortunate to grow them. With their smooth skin, Meyer lemons are a little sweeter and more floral than a standard lemon. It is a cross between a common lemon and a sweet orange or mandarin. If only regular lemons are available they work perfectly as well.

    Recipe Instructions

    Before you start, set up an ice bath. Fill a large bowl half full of ice and cold water.

    Step 1: Combine cream and milk into a medium saucepan (about 3 quarts) over medium heat. When hot and add lemon zest and turn heat down, allowing the zest to infuse while you work on the eggs and sugar.

    Step 2: While the lemon is infusing, whisk egg yolks and sugar together in a bowl until smooth.

    Step 3: Is called tempering. Add a ¼ cup of the hot dairy to the eggs yolks bowl and whisk until smooth. Do this again, and one more time. This is so your egg yolks don't scramble. Lastly pour the yolks into the pan on the stove and stir. Here's where you need to be patient, but it doesn't take long.

    Step 4: Cook the custard, stirring as it cooks. You will feel it tighten up and thicken as you stir. The custard is done when it coats the back of a spoon and leaves a line through it. Remove from the heat, add lemon juice and pinch of sea salt.

    Step 5: Chill the lemon custard base by nestling the bowl into the ice bath. Stir to release the heat. When cold, pour the base through a fine sieve to catch any bits of stray egg yolk, then refrigerate until very cold, about 1-2 hours.

    Finished lemon custard ice cream in a silver ice cream maker, ready to scoop.

    Step 6: Add the chilled lemon custard ice cream base to your ice cream maker and process according to the manufacturers directions for your machine.

    Chef's tip on pans: When making custard you need a heavy pan because the weight distributes heat gently and evenly. Even heat distribution cooks egg yolks without scrambling them. Almost any 3 quart heavy pot will do, but I use a pan called a saucier. A saucier has sloped sides versus straight sides, making whisking and stirring easier. They are a nice addition to your kitchen collection and for many more uses than making this lemon custard ice cream (like my beloved risotto).

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve lemon custard ice cream either soft serve style right out of the machine or freeze for a few hours so the is firmer and more scoop-able. And if you love ice cream, here is the absolute best ice cream scooper!

    Chef's tip on ice cream storage: I've tried lot of containers for freezing homemade ice cream from metal to plastic and paper. Here is the best ice cream tub and all that I now use. Ive tried the oval shaped containers that promote easier scooping, and while I have several of them, I still prefer a good old fashioned round tub.

    Recipe FAQs

    What are the best lemons for making lemon ice cream?

    I prefer making lemon ice cream with Meyer lemons. Meyers are a little sweeter and more floral that a standard lemon, but any lemon will do! Use what is in season and best at the market. Find them online as well. If you live in a temperate area, try growing your own tree. They are easy to grow both in the ground and in containers. Last tip, use organic, untreated lemons for the best lemon ice cream.

    How do you incorporate the lemon flavor into the ice cream?

    For big lemon flavor in lemon ice cream you need fresh lemons, not the bottled juice. Use both the lemon juice and the lemon zest. The lemon zest is really where the big flavor is. Don't use the white part called the pith, as it is bitter.

    If it's still not lemony enough for you, add a couple drops of lemon essential oil (to the ice cream base) to boost the lemon flavor. That's a great trick.

    How do you balance the sweetness and tartness of the lemon ice cream?

    Don't use too much sugar so that the natural tartness of the lemon shines through. Lemons will vary in their flavor by variety and season. Taste the ice cream base and make your own adjustments.

    How do you prevent the ice cream from becoming too icy or hard?

    To prevent ice cream from becoming too hard, I've found that using the right container for freezer storage makes a big difference. The winner in my house is
    freezer-safe containers keep out air and seal in flavor with a silicone lid that seals tight. Choose the right size container as well, the size that fills just to the top and seals out air.

    Another tip, here is when you need to use sugar. Substituting sugar substitutes is fine if you plan to serve it soon after it it finished, but they tend to get icy after longer freezing.

    More Lemon Recipes

    For another lovely lemony dessert, try this lemon mousse, and all time favorite lemon recipe.

    • Platter of grilled chicken breasts with herbs.
      Easy Blender Lemon Chicken Marinade
    • Gluten-free pasta salad with tomatoes, cucumber, pine nuts, herbs, and more.
      Lemony Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe
    • A golden slice of lemon olive oil cake, made wit whole almonds, served with berries and glaze.
      Super Moist Lemon Olive Oil Cake Recipe
    • A white bowl of lentil quinoa salad with basil leaves and a serving spoon.
      Lentil Quinoa Salad with Lemon Vinaigrette

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this lemon custard ice cream, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Lemon Gelato | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Lemon Custard Ice Cream

    Sally Cameron
    Lemon lovers rejoice with this creamy, dense, smooth and rich, custard based ice cream. Simple fresh ingredients. You'll need an ice cream maker. If you're making this in spring, try it with Meyer lemons if you can find them.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Freeze 6 hours hrs
    Total Time 6 hours hrs 25 minutes mins
    Course Dessert, ice cream
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 432 kcal

    Equipment

    • Ice Cream Maker

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 cups heavy cream
    • 1 cup whole milk
    • 2 tablespoons finely grated lemon zest use a microplane zester
    • ⅔ cup sugar or ¾ cup powdered allulose for sugar-free, see note below.
    • 5 large egg yolks
    • ⅔ cup lemon juice 3 large lemons
    • pinch salt

    Instructions
     

    Set up

    • Create an ice bath by filling a large bowl with ice and water ¾ full and set aside to cool ice cream base. Set a medium bowl into the ice and place a sieve on top.

    Prep lemons

    • Zest and juice lemons. You need ⅔ cup of strained juice and about 2 tablespoons of lemon zest.

    Cook the custard base

    • Pour cream and milk into a medium saucepan (about 3 quarts) and add lemon zest. Turn heat to low and allow the zest to infuse the dairy while you work on the eggs and sugar.
    • Whisk sugar and yolks together in a medium bowl until thick and smooth.
    • Bring the dairy to just under a simmer with little bubbles starting at the edges. Get the dairy hot but don't boil it. Slowly add a ¼ cup of the hot dairy to the yolks and whisk until smooth. Do this 3-4 times to "temper" the eggs so they do not scramble when you add them into the pan to cook the custard.
    • Add the egg-sugar-dairy mixture back into the pan over medium-low heat and whisk until smooth. Cook, stirring continually. until the custard thickens and coats the back of a spoon when you draw a line through it with your finger, about 5 minutes. Watch the heat and turn down if needed. You don't want scrambled eggs.
      Turn off heat. Stir in lemon juice and salt.

    Strain the custard base

    • Pour the liquid custard through the sieve into the medium bowl to catch any egg bits and lemon zest. Stir for 5 minutes until the temperature of the liquid custard drops to 70°F or under so it is safe to put in the refrigerator for full chilling.

    Chill the custard base fully

    • Cover the custard and place in the refrigerator for a few hours until it gets very cold, about 2 hours. When cold, churn in your ice cream maker. When done, scoop into an ice cream container, cover and freeze for several hours.

    Notes

    The colder the ice cream base is, the faster it will freeze in your ice cream maker.
    As we eat lower carb, I now make this delicious lemon ice cream with powdered allulose. It sweetens without sugar. Although it is a natural sugar, the body does not metabolize it, so no net carbs.
    If you use powdered allulose, each serving of lemon custard ice cream provides 6.5 grams of carbs, versus 29 grams of carb for sugar. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 432kcalCarbohydrates: 29gProtein: 6gFat: 34gSaturated Fat: 20gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gCholesterol: 248mgSodium: 44mgPotassium: 183mgFiber: 0.3gSugar: 27gVitamin A: 1439IUVitamin C: 14mgCalcium: 125mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Mustard Aioli (Mayo Mustard Sauce)

    03/05/2026 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Pale yellow Dijon mustard aioli sauce in a glass jar with a white spoon.

    This quick, modern-style mustard aioli is one of my two-minute go-to sauces - creamy, tangy, and flexible, made with good mayonnaise and your choice of mustard (Dijon is my favorite). Serve this mayo mustard sauce with chicken, pork, steak, or salmon, or with simple vegetables like asparagus and Brussels sprouts to make the whole plate feel finished.

    A jar of cream Dijon mustard aioli sauce with a white ceramic spoon.

    I've made this shortcut mustard aioli for years - meaning it starts with good store-bought mayonnaise instead of making mayonnaise from scratch (traditional aioli). To build flavor, I use two kinds of mustard, lemon, and garlic. The result is a fast mayo mustard sauce that comes together in minutes and instantly finishes the dish with its creamy, tangy flavor. And you probably have what you need in the fridge.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Mustard Aioli Recipe Highlights

    • Make-ahead friendly - Stir it together in minutes and refrigerate until ready to use.
    • Easy and fast - No blender required, just a bowl and a spoon for a quick sauce.
    • Versatile - Perfect with grilled meats, seafood, sandwiches, and vegetables, or as a quick dip or drizzle.

    For a garlic confit mustard aioli, replace the raw garlic with 2 teaspoons garlic confit cloves, mashed into a paste. It's delish and easy to make.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Prep bowls with ingredients to make mayo mustard sauce.
    • Mayonnaise - Use a good-quality thick mayo as the base, egg-free if needed.
    • Dijon mustard - Smooth, sharp, and classic; this is the main flavor driver and my go-to for a refined mustard aioli. See mustard options below.
    • Whole grain mustard - Adds texture and little pops of mustard seed for a more rustic, interesting bite.
    • Garlic - Fresh garlic gives the aioli backbone.
    • Lemon juice - A little brightens and balances the richness.
    • Dry mustard powder - A little optional insurance if your aioli gets too loose.

    Please see the recipe list for measurements, salt, and pepper.

    Chef's Tip: Choosing the Right Mustard. Mustard is your personality lever. One swap will completely change your mustard aioli into a fun new flavor, making it endlessly useful.

    • Dijon - Smooth, sharp, and balanced. My default choice for a refined, versatile sauce.
    • Whole Grain - Adds texture and little pops of flavor. Beautiful with steak or roasted vegetables.
    • Spicy Brown - Slightly coarser with more warmth and bite.
    • English Mustard - Very hot. A small amount goes a long way.
    • Honey Mustard - Sweeter and more casual, great for dipping.
    • Chinese Hot Mustard - A very sharp, fiery mustard from Chinese cuisine.
    • Yellow mustard - Mild, vinegary, classic. Fine in a pinch, but it tastes more "ballpark" than "bistro."
    • Flavored mustards - Such as tarragon, black currant, provencal, or green peppercorn.

    Here's another terrific aioli recipe - my spicy harissa aioli, great on tacos, bowls, and salmon.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Honey Mustard Aioli - Add 2 teaspoons honey then taste, add more as desired.
    • Herby - Add chopped dill, chives, chervil, tarragon, or parsley (soft herbs).
    • Prepared horseradish - For a sharper kick and steakhouse-style edge; a small amount goes a long way (and strain of juices).

    How to Make Mustard Aioli

    Ingredients for dijon mustard aioli sauce in a glass bowl for mixing.
    1. Add mayo, mustards, salt, lemon juice, to a bowl.
    A microplane zester with garlic paste over a glass bowl.
    1. Add the garlic, best to use a microplane zester for a fine paste that melts in.
    Finished Dijon aioli with a silver whisk in a glass bowl.
    1. Mix until it becomes a smooth mustard sauce. Refrigerate until serving.

    If It's Too Loose

    If the aioli feels too loose (thin), whisk in ¼ teaspoon dry mustard powder and let it sit for 5 minutes. The powder absorbs a bit of moisture and subtly tightens the texture while adding gentle bite. Add more in small increments (⅛ teaspoon at a time) so it doesn't turn sharp.

    Chef's Tip: From-Scratch Mayonnaise Option
    If you want to go full-scratch aioli, start with my blender homemade mayonnaise as the base. I begin the emulsion by hand, then finish in the blender while slowly drizzling in the oil for the best texture. Homemade mayo is incredible - it just doesn't keep as long in the fridge because it's made with raw egg.

    Serving Suggestions

    This is the kind of sauce that makes a simple plate feel finished - keep it in the fridge and you'll find excuses to use it. I often serve it with steamed salmon.

    • As a dip - Serve with grilled or roasted vegetables (asparagus, green beans, broccoli, cauliflower), sweet potato fries, regular fries, or roasted baby potatoes.
    • With grilled mains - Spoon alongside grilled chicken, pork chops or tenderloin, steak, salmon, bacon-wrapped scallops, shrimp skewers, or burgers.
    • As a spread - On burgers, chicken sandwiches, turkey sandwiches, BLTs, or wraps instead of plain mayo.
    • For boards and platters - Add to a charcuterie board with sausages, roast pork, ham, or grilled kielbasa; great with pickles and crunchy veggies.

    Storage

    Store Dijon mustard sauce in a covered container in the refrigerator for 3-4 days when made with store-bought mayonnaise. If using homemade mayonnaise with raw egg, use within 2-3 days and keep well chilled. USDA guidance recommends refrigerating and using preparations made with pasteurized egg products within 4 days.

    As always, discard if it develops an off smell, unusual separation, or flavor changes.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is mustard aioli?

    Mustard aioli is a creamy, garlic-forward sauce made by combining mayonnaise with mustard, lemon juice, and garlic. It has the tang and richness of classic aioli, with the added depth and bite of mustard.

    Can I make this without raw garlic?

    Yes. Substitute roasted garlic or garlic confit for a milder, sweeter flavor. Use about 1-2 teaspoons mashed into a paste.

    Why is my mustard aioli too thin?

    Too much lemon juice is usually the culprit, especially if your mayonnaise is on the lighter side. Start with a small amount of lemon and add more to taste. If it's already loose, whisk in a small pinch of dry mustard powder and let it sit a few minutes to thicken.

    Can I use a different type of mustard?

    Absolutely. Dijon is classic, but whole grain adds texture, spicy brown adds warmth, and English mustard adds heat. Choose based on how bold you want the flavor. Flavored mustards (like tarragon for herbs), or black currant, are also fun.

    More Homemade Condiment Recipes

    From flavorful sauces and aiolis, to homemade enchilada sauce, BBQ sauce, and blueberry compote, I love making homemade condiments! They are easy, gluten-free, and really versatile to have on hand.

    • Chunky harissa aioli sauce in a jar with a cream colored spoon.
      Easy Harissa Aioli With Garlic Recipe
    • A jar of deep red enchilada sauce with a spoon on the top.
      Red Enchilada Sauce (Gluten-Free Option)
    • A glass jar of deep red homemade bbq sauce.
      Gluten-Free BBQ Sauce Recipe
    • Deep purple blueberry compote in a glass jar with a silver spoon.
      Easy Blueberry Compote Recipe

    If You Make Mustard Aioli

    Please let me know by leaving a comment. I love to hear from you and your comments help other readers too. And please leave a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐. Thank you!

    📖 Recipe

    Pale yellow Dijon mustard aioli sauce in a glass jar with a white spoon.

    Mustard Aioli

    Sally Cameron
    This quick mustard aioli is my one-minute go-to: sauce creamy, tangy, and flexible, made with good mayonnaise and your choice of mustard (Dijon is my favorite).
    No ratings yet
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course condiment, Sauce
    Servings 8 Yield 1 cup
    Calories 196 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 cup mayonnaise
    • 2 tablespoons Dijon mustard or your favorite
    • 2 tablespoon whole grain Dijon mustard or use all creamy Dijon, no seeds
    • 1 garlic clove finely zested or microplaned
    • 1 teaspoon lemon juice
    • ¼ teaspoon fine sea salt

    Options & Variations

    • ¼ teaspoon dry mustard powder for a loose aioli
    • 2 teaspoons horseradish drained if juicy, more to taste
    • 2 teaspoons finely chopped soft herbs parsley, tarragon, dill, chives, chervil
    • 2-3 teaspoons mild honey

    Notes

    Aioli Tips:
    • Be careful adding to much lemon juice as it quickly thins the aioli. 
    • If adding horseradish, strain off any juices first.
    • Garlic is best using a microplane zester so the garlic melts in. 
    Mustard Tips:
    While Dijon mustard is classic and I think the best, you can use other types of mustards (there are many!) to use as variations for your mustard aioli. Experiment and find what you like. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2tablespoonsCalories: 196kcalCarbohydrates: 1gProtein: 1gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 13gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 12mgSodium: 333mgPotassium: 19mgFiber: 0.3gSugar: 0.3gVitamin A: 24IUVitamin C: 0.4mgCalcium: 8mgIron: 0.2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Homemade Mayonnaise in a Blender

    05/19/2015 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    Homemade Mayonnaise| A FoodCentricLife.com

    Homemade mayonnaise is a classic emulsion of egg yolk and oil, brightened with a little mustard and vinegar (or lemon). With a whisk to get it started and a blender to finish, you can make thick, creamy homemade mayonnaise with a clean, fresh flavor that's hard to beat. Use it as-is, or stir in chopped herbs for an herby mayonnaise that's perfect for sandwiches, grilled chicken, and roasted vegetables.

    A jar of homemade mayonnaise with herbs.

    If you've only had store-bought mayonnaise, homemade will surprise you. It's rich, silky, and fresh, and it instantly upgrades everything from sandwiches to simple grilled chicken. A jar is convenient - but homemade mayo is a whole different experience.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Homemade Mayonnaise Highlights

    • Better flavor - Fresh, clean, and silky, with a richer taste than most jarred mayo.
    • Control the oil - Choose the oil you prefer, which changes both flavor and nutrition.
    • Customizable - Keep it classic or add herbs, garlic, lemon, or spices.
    • Great foundation sauce - The base for quick aiolis, creamy dressings, and sandwich spreads.

    Chef's Tip: Why Make Mayonnaise at Home?
    Not all store-bought mayo is the same - some brands are very clean. Homemade mayonnaise is about control and flavor: you choose the oil, the acidity (lemon or vinegar), and the seasoning, and you can keep the ingredient list short and simple. It's naturally gluten-free when made at home, and it skips any added thickeners or stabilizers (like modified food starch or cellulose) that some commercial brands use to adjust texture and extend shelf life.

    Try homemade mayonnaise in this broccoli-cabbage slaw recipe.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Mayonnaise Ingredients on the counter.
    • Egg yolks - Yolks contain lecithin, the natural emulsifier that helps the oil and the water-based ingredients bind into a thick, creamy mayonnaise.
    • Acid - White wine vinegar or lemon juice adds brightness and balances the richness.
    • Mustard - Dry mustard powder adds flavor and supports the emulsion.
    • Cayenne pepper - Just a pinch for subtle warmth (optional, but I love it).
    • Oil - Use extra virgin olive oil, avocado oil, or a clean neutral oil. Skip standard vegetable oil if you want the cleanest flavor. Oil tips below.
    • Fresh herbs (optional) - Finely chopped herbs add color and fresh flavor (great for sandwiches and grilled meats).

    Chef's Tip: The Oil Matters Most
    Mayonnaise is basically oil, emulsified - so the oil you choose matters. Many common "vegetable oils" are produced to be neutral and shelf-stable, which usually means they're heavily refined through standard industrial processing steps (refining/neutralizing, bleaching, deodorizing, etc.). For homemade mayo, I stick with oils I consider a clean choice:

    • Avocado oil - Mild, clean, classic mayo flavor.
    • Extra virgin olive oil (EVOO) - Richer flavor; if it's peppery or stronger tasting, blend ½ EVOO + ½ avocado.
    • Zero Acre oil - Neutral cultured oil, clean option to vegetable oil.

    Choose what aligns with your preferences, because you'll taste the oil in every bite. Note - the lead photo of the mayo was made with all olive oil, which is why it is such a rich gold color. The color of your mayonnaise will depend on the color of the oil you use.

    How to Make Homemade Mayonnaise (blender Method)

    The key to making homemade mayonnaise is time and a little patience - two words that make us cringe. It takes about 15 minutes to make 1 cup. For simple mayo? Yes. And it is worth it. My technique is to start by hand and finish it in the blender for the richest, creamiest emulsion.

    Start by Hand

    Begin by whisking the yolks, dry mustard, vinegar, salt, pepper and cayenne together in a small bowl. Whisk in the oil a drop at a time. Seriously, drop by drop at the start. That sets up the emulsion. It starts to get creamy and smooth.

    Chef's tip - To stabilize the bowl so you can both pour and whisk at the same time, nestle the bowl in a twisted kitchen towel.

    A small bowl nestled in a dish towel to prevent slipping.

    Blender Finish

    After you have added a small amount of oil and the emulsion is working, you can transfer it to the blender to complete the process.

    So why not start in the blender? Because the small amount of yolks won't come above the spinning blades of the blender, so the emulsion doesn't start right. Maybe if you were making a double batch. I make small batches, just 1 cup at a time.

    Finishing in the blender, thick and creamy.

    How to Fix Broken Mayonnaise

    If you add the oil too quickly, the emulsion can "break" - meaning your thick, creamy mayo suddenly turns thin, oily, and separated. Don't worry. It's fixable.

    To fix it:
    In a medium bowl, whisk 1 fresh egg yolk until smooth. Then, very slowly drizzle the broken mayonnaise into the yolk while whisking constantly. As it re-emulsifies, you'll see it thicken back up. Once it's stable again, you can add the remaining broken mayo a little faster - but still in a steady stream.

    Chef's tip: A teaspoon of water can also help the emulsion catch if it's being stubborn.

    Ways to Use Homemade Mayonnaise

    • Spread it on burgers and sandwiches.
    • Use as a sauce for fish, chicken, or grilled meats, like this quick Harissa Aioli.
    • Dip with veggies for an easy snack, like this Buffalo Ranch dip.
    • Turn it into dressing - thin with a little lemon juice or vinegar.
    • Pair with artichokes - steamed or grilled, as a dipping sauce.
    • Make chicken salad or slaw - it's especially good in broccoli-cabbage slaw).
    • Flavor it fast - add garlic for aioli or Dijon for mustard mayo.
    • Eggs - Make the best deviled eggs.
    • Pair with potatoes - Make this French potato salad.
    The finished mayo, stirring in fresh chopped herbs.

    How Long Does Homemade Mayonnaise Last? Storage Tips

    Because it is made with raw egg yolks, homemade mayonnaise doesn't keep as long as commercial mayo. For best quality, store it covered in the refrigerator and use it within 2-3 days.

    If using raw yolks concerns you, buy pasteurized eggs. According to the USDA, homemade mayonnaise made with pasteurized eggs can be stored for up to 4 days when refrigerated.

    Recipe FAQs

    Why did my mayonnaise break?

    Mayonnaise usually breaks when the oil is added too quickly or the mixture doesn't emulsify properly at the start. Slow the drizzle, keep whisking/blending steadily, and use the "fix broken mayonnaise" method if needed.

    Why is my homemade mayonnaise yellow?

    Color depends on the oil and the yolks. Mayonnaise made with extra virgin olive oil and deep-yellow yolks will look more golden than mayo made with neutral oils.

    More Homemade Condiment Recipes

    A good condiment finishes the dish. Here are a few more favorites to keep in your fridge, to add instant punch to everyday meals.

    • A jar of bright pink pickled onions with a small bowl of them beside, and bay leaves.
      Quick Pickled Red Onions
    • A glass jar of deep red homemade bbq sauce.
      Gluten-Free BBQ Sauce Recipe
    • A jar of salsa chimichurri of parsley, oregano, olive oil, onion, and vinegar.
      Argentinian Chimichurri Sauce (salsa chimichurri)
    • A square jar filled with lemon curd dripping off a silver spoon.
      Easy Sugar Free Lemon Curd

    If You Make This Recipe

    Please let me a comment. I love to hear from you and your comments help other readers too! And please leave a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ if you can. They help! Thanks for supporting my site.

    📖 Recipe

    Homemade Mayonnaise| A FoodCentricLife.com

    Homemade Mayonnaise (with optional herbs)

    Sally Cameron
    Creamy homemade mayonnaise, the simple emulsion of egg yolks and oil, plus a little vinegar or  lemon juice and spices. Nothing form a store bought jar compares. It takes a little patience to make, but your tastebuds will be rewarded. If you have never used dry mustard, find it in the spice aisle. If you like it more lemony, add a little lemon juice at the end.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 20 minutes mins
    Course condiment, Dip, Dressing
    Cuisine American
    Servings 11
    Calories 184 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 large egg yolks
    • 2 teaspoons white wine vinegar or lemon juice
    • ½ teaspoon dry mustard
    • 1/16 teaspoon sea salt
    • 1/16 teaspoon ground white pepper
    • 1 pinch cayenne pepper
    • 1 cup olive oil or avocado oil
    • 2-3 teaspoons finely chopped fresh herbs of choice, optional parsley, dill, chives, cilantro or tarragon

    Instructions
     

    • In a small bowl, whisk together the egg yolks, vinegar (or lemon juice), dry mustard, salt, pepper and cayenne until smooth. Place the olive oil in a measuring cup or small pitcher than has a pour spout from which you can easily control pouring.
    • Twist a long kitchen towel into a circle and nest the bowl in it for stability. You can also place the towel and bowl inside a pan to hold it steady. With one hand whisk and the other hand drizzle in the oil. Start a drop at a time and whisk fast. Drop by drop, keep adding and whisking until the emulsion starts to get creamy and thick. When you have added about 2 tablespoons of oil, pour the emulsion into your blender. Scrape every bit out with a flexible spatula.
    • Start the blender on low with the lid on and the center cap off. This will reduce splattering. Start adding the oil a few drops at a time in a fine thin stream. Keep going until all of the oil is incorporated and you have thick, creamy mayonnaise. It will take about 20 minutes to incorporate all of the oil. Be patient and go slow. Finish by stirring in fresh chopped herbs if desired.

    Notes

    If you get impatient and try to add the oil quickly, your emulsion might "break" or turn to liquid. If that happen, it can be fixed. You will need an extra egg yolk. See notes in the post.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 184kcalCarbohydrates: 0.2gProtein: 1gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 15gCholesterol: 33mgSodium: 15mgPotassium: 5mgFiber: 0.02gSugar: 0.05gVitamin A: 50IUVitamin C: 0.4mgCalcium: 5mgIron: 0.2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Red Enchilada Sauce (Gluten-Free Option)

    02/17/2026 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    A jar of deep red enchilada sauce with a spoon on the top.

    This beautiful brick red enchilada sauce is made from scratch with real dried chiles, not just chili powder. It starts with a quick homemade chile paste, then becomes a rich, velvety sauce with deep flavor and a gorgeous earthy color. It takes a few minutes longer than the shortcut versions, but it has a richness and complexity you just can't get from chili powder alone. Let me show you how to make real red enchilada sauce.

    A glass jar of deep brick red enchilada sauce with a messy spoon, and dried chiles and tortillas.

    I first learned to make a sauce like this decades ago in El Paso, Texas, watching a friend cook with dried chiles in her kitchen. Recently, while working on my shredded beef recipe, I dusted it off my old recipe and fine-tuned it-and I was reminded just how good a real dried-chile enchilada sauce can be. The depth of flavor is remarkable, and it's why this is my go-to sauce for red enchiladas, tacos, bowls, and more. Skip canned enchilada sauce and make it from scratch.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Red Enchilada Sauce Recipe Highlights

    • Made from real dried chiles - Deep, rich flavor and color you can't get from chili powder alone.
    • From-scratch flavor - Smooth, velvety sauce with serious depth.
    • Gluten-free option - Make the roux with a GF flour blend or all purpose flour.
    • Beats store-bought - Fresher flavor, cleaner ingredients, that you control.
    • Versatile - Perfect for enchiladas, tacos, bowls, casseroles, and more.

    Love green enchiladas too? Try my easy green enchilada sauce made with tomatillos.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients in prep bowls to make red enchilada sauce with dried chilies, spices, oil, and broth.
    • Oil - Use a neutral oil for cooking such as (Zero Acre oil) or avocado oil, or olive oil.
    • Flour - For a quick roux to thicken the sauce. I use King Arthur gluten-free flour, or use regular all-purpose flour.
    • Dried chiles - The foundation of true from-scratch flavor. Use a mix of dried ancho and guajillo chilies (mild to low-medium in heat) chilies to make a quick chile paste.
    • Spices & herbs - Ancho chili powder, cumin, garlic powder, and dried oregano build classic enchilada sauce flavor.
    • Tomato paste - A flavor enhancer that provides depth and umami richness that rounds out the sauce.
    • Broth - Thins the sauce to the right consistency and adds savory depth. Beef broth is great; chicken broth works too, as does turkey broth.
    • Sweetener (optional) - A little to balance the earthiness of the chilies, use a little brown sugar, mild honey, or monk fruit, if desired after tasting.

    Chef's Tip: Buying Dried Chiles
    Dried chiles for making red enchilada sauce should be soft and pliable, not brittle. If they crack easily, feel dusty, or smell flat and papery, they'll make a dull sauce-grab a fresh package. Look for chiles with good color and a clean chile aroma (not musty). Store extras airtight in a cool pantry, or freeze them for longer keeping. They keep a long time.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Milder sauce - Use all ancho chiles, or 3 ancho + 1 guajillo for less heat and a softer, sweeter chile flavor.
    • Chilies options - Pasilla peppers, cascabel peppers, and Ñora peppers also work and are mild.
    • More heat - Add 1 chile de árbol with the dried chiles, or stir in a pinch of cayenne or chipotle powder (go easy).

    Here's a quick sauce that packs a punch of flavor-my harissa aioli, which I often use on tacos and with salmon.

    Chef's Tip: Why Toast Dried Chiles
    Toasting dried chiles briefly in a hot, dry skillet wakes up their flavor and aroma and gives your sauce deeper, richer chile taste. Keep it quick (at most 30 seconds), just until fragrant and pliable. If chiles darken too much or start to smoke, they can turn bitter.

    How to Make Red Enchilada Sauce

    Removing seeds from dried chili peppers before making enchilada sauce.
    1. Open the chilies with scissors and shake out the seeds, remove stems.
    Toasting dried chili peppers in a black skillet.
    1. Briefly toast dried chilies in a hot skillet, 15-30 seconds per side. Don't burn them.
    Soaked dried chili pepper in a glass bowl.
    1. Add toasted chilies to a bowl and cover with boiling water for 15 minutes, top with a small plate to submerge completely.
    Making chili paste in a blender with soaked dried chilies and soaking water.
    1. Add soaked peppers to the blender with ½ cup of the soaking liquid and blend into a thick paste, adding a bit more water if needed to get the blades to spin.
    Making a roux with oil and flour to create a sauce base, with a silver whisk.
    1. Make the roux, heat oil in a small pan over medium heat, add the flour and whisk until smooth, cook 2 minutes to remove raw flour taste.
    Adding spices to a small pot with a roux for making red enchilada sauce.
    1. Add the spices and tomato paste and cook 30-60 seconds, stirring.
    Adding broth to a pot of spices and roux to make sauce.

    7. Add the broth and whisk smooth.

    Deep brick colored red enchilada sauce with a silver whisk in a small pot.

    8. Add ½ cup of the chili paste and whisk sauce smooth, add salt and taste adjust for personal preference. Enchilada sauce is ready to use.

    Serving Suggestions

    This red enchilada sauce is more than just an enchilada sauce-use it anywhere you want rich chile flavor.

    • Enchiladas - Pour over rolled enchiladas and bake until bubbly (photo below).
    • Tacos and wraps - Spoon over shredded beef, chicken, or roasted vegetables.
    • Eggs - Drizzle over scrambled eggs, omelets, or breakfast tacos.
    • Bowls - Use as a sauce for burrito bowls with rice, beans, veggies, and protein.
    • Dipping sauce - Serve warm alongside quesadillas, taquitos, or roasted potatoes.
    A baking dish full of shredded beef enchiladas with a deep red enchilada sauce cilantro, and pickled onions.

    Storage and Freezing

    Cooled red enchilada sauce keeps 5 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container and freezes for up to 3 months. Use a jar (leave headspace), freezer container, or freeze in smaller portions for easy use later.

    Thaw and Reheat

    To thaw enchilada sauce overnight in the refrigerator, then reheat gently on the stovetop. If the sauce thickens after chilling or freezing, whisk in a splash of broth or water to loosen it.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is this red enchilada sauce spicy?

    It's mild to medium, depending on the dried chiles you use. For a milder sauce, use all ancho chiles (or 3 ancho + 1 guajillo).

    Can I make this enchilada sauce gluten-free?

    Yes. Use a gluten-free flour blend for the roux. I use King Arthur.

    Why is my sauce bitter?

    Bitterness usually comes from over-toasting dried chiles or chiles that are very old. Toast just until fragrant and pliable-don't let them darken too much or smoke.

    Why is my enchilada sauce too thick (or too thin)?

    Sauce thickens as it simmers and can thicken more as it cools. If it's too thick, whisk in a splash of broth. If it's too thin, simmer a few minutes longer.

    If it's too thin for some reason and you need the volume, add a slurry of 2 teaspoons of cornstarch or arrowroot start mixed with 2 teaspoons of water and whisk in, then cook 1-2 minutes to thicken.

    More Great Mexican-Inspired Recipes

    Here are more Mexican-inspired recipes-tacos, soups, a dip, and sauce-to keep the flavors going.

    • tomatillo salsa verde
      Green Enchilada Sauce with Tomatillos
    • chicken tomatillo soup
      Tomatillo Soup (with Chicken or Turkey)
    • Cast iron pan of cheesy queso dip with cilantro, tortilla chips, and jalapeno garnish.
      Smoked Queso Dip with Real Cheese
    • Close up of Mexican chicken soup in a white bowl.
      Mexican Chicken Tortilla Soup Recipe

    If You Make Enchilada Sauce

    Please let me know by leaving a comment. I love to hear from you and it helps other readers too.

    📖 Recipe

    A jar of deep red enchilada sauce with a spoon on the top.

    From-Scratch Red Enchilada Sauce (Gluten-free option)

    Sally Cameron
    Made with real dried chiles for rich, complex flavor-this is the red sauce you'll want on everything from enchiladas to omelets, to tacos, and in many ways because of the rich flavor.
    No ratings yet
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Course condiment, Sauce
    Cuisine Mexican
    Servings 8 Yield 2 cups
    Calories 93 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    Chili paste (makes 1 cup)

    • 2 dried guajillo chili peppers more notes below
    • 2 dried ancho chili peppers
    • ½ cup chili soaking water

    Red enchilada sauce

    • 2 tablespoons oil avocado, olive, or or zero acre oil
    • 2 tablespoons flour: gluten-free blend or all purpose
    • 2 tablespoons ancho chili powder
    • 1 teaspoon cumin
    • ½ teaspoon granulated garlic powder
    • ½ teaspoon dried oregano
    • ¼ cup tomato paste
    • 2 cups beef broth or chicken broth
    • ½ teaspoon salt

    Instructions
     

    Make the chili paste

    • Start by boiling water to soak chilies. Cut the tops of the chili peppers off, or for long chilies, slice them lengthwise with scissors. Shake out the seeds and discard. Tear chilies in half, place in a bowl, and cover with boiling water. Add a small plate or something to top the chilies and keep them submerged. Soak for 15 minutes.
    • Place soaked chilies in a blender along with ½ cup of the soaking water. Blend smooth. Paste will be thick. Add a bit more water if needed to get the blender blades to spin.

    Make enchilada sauce

    • Heat a small pan (2 quart) over medium heat and add the oil, then whisk in the flour until it is smooth and cook for 2-3 minutes over low heat to get rid of any raw flour taste.
    • Stir in the chili powder, cumin, garlic powder, and dried oregano. Cook 30 seconds to allow spice flavors to bloom. Add the tomato paste and stir, cooking 30 seconds. Add the broth and whisk to combine smoothly, simmer 5-7 minutes. Lastly, stir in ½ cup of the chili paste. Add salt to taste, starting with ½ teaspoon and adjusting for personal preference.
    • If the sauce is too thick, thin with a little more broth or water. If it is thin, simmer until thickened.

    Notes

    For red enchiladas sauce I use both dried ancho and dried guajillo chilies. They are mild to mild-medium in heat.
    Chili Options
    • Chilies options - Pasilla peppers, cascabel peppers, and Ñora peppers also work and are mild.
    • Milder sauce - Use all ancho chiles, or 3 ancho + 1 guajillo for less heat and a softer, sweeter chile flavor.
    • More heat - Add 1 chile de árbol with the dried chiles, or stir in a pinch of cayenne or chipotle powder (go easy) when blooming the spices.
    • For a deeper earthiness - Use a Pasilla chili, it's also a darker chili in the sauce.
    Heat note: Remember, it is easier to add heat than it is to get it too hot and try to cool it down. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 0.25cupCalories: 93kcalCarbohydrates: 12gProtein: 3gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gSodium: 270mgPotassium: 363mgFiber: 4gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 3273IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 21mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Shredded Beef Recipe (Slow Cooker)

    02/12/2026 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    A bowl of rich brown shredded beef ready to go for tacos, wrap, and more.

    This slow cooker shredded beef recipe is the kind of back-pocket dinner that makes the whole week easier. The beef cooks low and slow until it's fall-apart tender and deeply flavored, with only a few minutes of hands-on prep. In this batch I season it Mexican-style, but the base method is intentionally simple and flexible. Find easy variations for a more classic or Italian-style flavor profile. You'll end up with juicy shredded beef and leftovers that taste even better the next day, and freeze great.

    A bowl of juicy brown shredded beef made in a slow cooker with herbs and pink pickled onions.

    After making my oven braised Italian pot roast and loving how good the shredded beef leftovers were, it sparked this idea for a slow cooker shredded beef recipe. It's intentionally simple and adaptable, so you can season it based on what you're craving and use it across multiple meals all week. Best of all, you'll come home to a kitchen that smells amazing-and a dinner that's practically done.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Shredded Beef Recipe Highlights

    • Fall-apart tender - Slow cooking turns chuck roast into juicy, shreddable beef.
    • Bold flavor - Warm spices add depth without overpowering, works in many dishes.
    • Easy slow cooker recipe - Minimal prep, no babysitting.
    • Incredibly versatile - For Mexican shredded beef tacos, burrito bowls, wraps, tostadas, bowls, and more.
    • Great for meal prep - Leftovers reheat beautifully for quick lunches and dinners.

    Need something cool and refreshing alongside your shredded beef? Try Mexican watermelon water.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    This recipe is shown seasoned Mexican-style shredded beef, but the base method is flexible. See Substitutions & Variations for a simple or Italian-style option.

    Ingredients for slow cooker shredded beef in prep bowls, with meat, spices, onion, garlic.
    • Beef - Boneless chuck roast that fits your slow cooker. Best for shredded beef.
    • Broth - Beef broth adds moisture and builds flavor. Use a good broth, skip bullion pastes and cubes.
    • Onion - Adds sweetness, moisture, and a flavorful base as it cooks down.
    • Garlic - Gives the beef that savory backbone; fresh cloves are best here.
    • Oil - Avocado oil, or a healthy neutral oil for higher heat needs.
    • Tomato paste - Concentrates flavor and adds rich umami.
    • Spices - Cumin, coriander, ancho chili powder, smoked paprika for warm, smoky flavor and a Mexican flavor profile.
    • Herbs - Dried oregano for classic Mexican flavor and a bay leaf (optional)

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Need a quick taco filling for a meal in a hurry? Try this taco filling recipe with ground turkey or ground beef.

    Chef's Tip - Oval vs. Round Slow Cookers
    Slow cookers of the same quart size don't always fit the same foods. A round slow cooker is great for soups, chili, and stews, but longer cuts of meat can feel cramped. An oval slow cooker gives roasts more room to lie flatter, which helps them cook more evenly. In my 6-quart round cooker, a 3-pound roast fits comfortably but not a 4-pound. But the larger one might fit in an oval of the same size.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Italian variation: Skip the spices, and add 1-2 bay leaves and 2 rosemary sprigs (or 2 teaspoon dried Italian seasoning). Optional: stir in 1 small can diced tomatoes, well-drained for a more saucy braise. Finish with a small splash of balsamic at the end to brighten the flavor.
    • Chilies - For a bit more kick, add a chopped and seeded jalapeno pepper or two, or canned chilies.
    • A little heat - Add a little chipotle powder to the spices for a smoky heat but be careful as it packs a punch.
    • Classic variation: For a classic flavor profile, use only bay leaves and dried thyme. This works well for pasta, mashed potatoes, or sandwiches.

    Chef's Tip - Why Slow Cooker Times Vary
    Slow cookers aren't perfectly standardized. Cooking times can vary by brand and model because of differences in temperature regulation, wattage, and construction. Use the clock as a guide, but rely on the shred test-the beef is done when it shreds easily with a fork and not before, no matter the timing.

    How to Make Slow Cooker Shredded Beef

    Some process photos show sautéing the onion in the Instant Pot insert. The written method uses the Dutch oven so the directions work for any slow cooker-either approach is fine.

    Sauteing chopped onion and garlic until soft in a pan on the stovetop.
    1. Add 1 tablespoon oil to the slow cooker, on the saute function when hot, saute onion until soft, add garlic and cook another minute. Add the tomato paste and cook another minute.
    A long narrow piece of chuck roast on a cutting board with salt and pepper.
    1. While onion is sautéing, season chuck roast with salt and pepper.
    Searing a chuck roast until nicely brown in a dutch oven in oil.
    1. In a large heavy pot or dutch oven, heat until hot, add 1 tablespoon oil, and sear roast on all sides until browned, 2-3 minutes per side.
    Deglazing a pan with broth after searing a roast.
    1. Remove the meat and pour in ½ cup of the broth to deglaze the pan, scraping up the browned bits.
    A browned chuck roast for shredded beef in a slow cooker pot with juices.
    1. Change slow cooker setting to slow cook, add the deglazed broth, then the meat (you can cut the piece in half crosswise).
    A browned roast in a cooking pot sprinkled with herbs and spices for cooking.
    1. Add the spices and herbs, turn the beef over to coat in the broth, add the rest of the broth. Place the lid on the cooker and set to slow cook for 7 hours on high.
    Braising broth, refrigerated overnight, and now being defatted for further use and storing.

    7. Strain braising broth and refrigerate overnight to defat the next day. Save the broth!

    An oval dish of shredded beef with two forks.

    8. Shred the beef with forks and gloved hands (easier), cutting it in half to facilitate shredding if the center is more difficult to shred.

    Chef's Tip - Don't Toss the Braising Liquid!
    That leftover cooking liquid is gold-it's more than broth because it's infused with big flavor. After you remove the meat, strain the liquid for a clean, smooth sauce. Use a little to moisten the shredded beef, then freeze the rest in small portions (ice cube trays or ¼-cup containers). It's an easy flavor booster for rice, beans, soups, chili, sautéed vegetables, or your next batch of shredded beef.

    Three shredded beef tacos on golden corn tortillas with pink onions and jalapeno slices.

    Ways to Serve Shredded Beef

    • Tacos - Pile in warm tortillas with your favorite toppings and some cool fresh sliced cabbage.
    • Burrito bowls - Spoon shredded beef onto rice and finish with salsa, avocado, cilantro, and a good squeeze of lime.
    • Quesadillas & wraps - Melty cheese + warm beef = always a win (add pickled onions for punch).
    • Rice or cauliflower rice bowls - Simple, hearty, and great for meal prep.
    • Big salads - Turn it into a protein-packed salad with crunchy shredded cabbage and a zippy dressing.
    • Enchiladas - Use a red enchiladas sauce and top with cheese, then bake (so good!).
    • Mashed potatoes, polenta, or pasta - Comfort-food territory: spoon it over and let the sauce do its thing.
    • Stuff baked potatoes - Use either bakes sweet potatoes or russets,

    Storing & Freezing

    Store leftover slow cooker shredded beef in an airtight container with a little cooking liquid for 3-4 days refrigerated, or freeze for 2-3 months.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make slow cooker shredded beef ahead?

    Yes. It actually tastes even better the next day. Store the beef in its juices so it stays moist.

    What cut of beef is best for slow cooker shredded beef?

    Chuck roast is the best choice because it has enough marbling and connective tissue to turn tender and shreddable after a long cook.

    Can I make this without tomato paste?

    Yes. Tomato paste adds richness and color, but it's optional. The recipe will still work without it.

    Can I use a different cut besides chuck roast?

    Yes. Brisket or beef shoulder work well. Leaner cuts (like bottom round) can work but may turn out drier and less flavorful. Chuck is really the best if available.

    Why is my shredded beef tough?

    It simply needs more time. Chuck becomes tender only after the collagen breaks down-once it's there, it shreds easily.

    Why was part of my roast tender and part still tough?

    The thickest center needs more time. Cutting a large roast into two pieces before searing and slow cooking helps it cook more evenly.

    More Mexican-Inspired Recipes

    From vegetable rice to shrimp tacos, smoked salsa, and a terrific tortilla soup, check out these Mexican-inspired and flavored recipes.

    • A bowl of colorful rice with mixed vegetables and a parsley garnish ready to serve.
      Easy Mixed Vegetable Rice
    • spicy grilled shrimp tacos
      Baja Shrimp Tacos (Grill or Stovetop)
    • Smoked salsa in a tall jar and a small serving glass cup with corn chips
      Easy Smoked Salsa (pellet grill recipe)
    • Close up of Mexican chicken soup in a white bowl.
      Mexican Chicken Tortilla Soup Recipe

    Please Leave a Comment

    If you make this shredded beef recipe, please leave a comment and let me know how you served it! I love hearing from you and your comments help other readers. And please leave a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating. Thanks for supporting my site.

    📖 Recipe

    A bowl of rich brown shredded beef ready to go for tacos, wrap, and more.

    Shredded Beef Recipe (Slow Cooker)

    Sally Cameron
    This recipe was developed with a 6-quart round slow cooker (Instant Pot Duo).
    No ratings yet
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 7 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 7 hours hrs 50 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, lunch, main
    Servings 8 Yield 2 pounds
    Calories 325 kcal

    Equipment

    • 5 ½ - 6 quart dutch oven or cast iron to sear the roast
    • 6-7 quart slow cooker round or oval
    • Disposable kitchen gloves

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 tablespoons oil divided use
    • 3 pounds boneless chuck roast see note below
    • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
    • ½ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1 large onion chopped fine
    • 2 large garlic cloves chopped fine or microplaned
    • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
    • 1 ¾ cups beef broth
    • 2 teaspoons cumin
    • 2 teaspoons coriander
    • 1 ½ teaspoons ancho chili
    • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika
    • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
    • 1 bay leaf optional

    Instructions
     

    Sear the chuck roast to build flavor (stovetop)

    • Season the roast with salt and pepper. Heat 1 tablespoon oil in a large dutch oven (5 ½-6 quarts) over medium-high heat until hot. Add the roast and sear 2-3 minutes per side on all sides until deeply browned.
      While the meat is browning, start sautéing the onions in the slow cooker.

    Sauté the onion and garlic (slow cooker)

    • Set the slow cooker to Sauté. When hot, add 1 tablespoon oil and cook the chopped onion 3-5 minutes until softened. Add the garlic and cook 30 seconds. Stir in the tomato paste, bay leaf and spices and cook 1 minute to bloom.

    Deglaze the skillet, add meat

    • When roast is browned, transfer it to the slow cooker. Add a ½ cup of beef broth to the pot, scraping up the browned bits. Pour this flavorful liquid into slow cooker. Add the rest of the broth.

    Slow cook the roast

    • Select Slow Cook and set to HIGH for approximately 7 hours, or until the beef shreds easily with a fork. Use the glass lid if you have one, or the Instant Pot lid set to Venting/Open (do not pressure cook). Don't peek for at least 6 hours. The roast is done when it shreds easily-go by the shred test, not the clock.
      For LOW: Cook 9–10 hours, checking for shreddability near the end.

    Shred and finish

    • Transfer the beef to a cutting board, using forks and gloved hands, shred, then return meat to the pot to soak in the juices for 10 minutes before serving or storing.

    Save the broth

    • Strain the braising broth through a fine sieve, cover and chill overnight. The next day, scrape any accumulated surface fat. You can use this to moisten the meat if desired. The rest, freeze in ice cube trays or small portions to add to soups, stews, beans, and chilis as a flavor booster.

    Notes

    This recipe was developed with a 3-pound chuck roast in a 6-quart Instant Pot Duo. A 4 pound roast might fit in a 6-qt oval slow cooker, or you might need a 7 quart. Be sure what you buy fits without crowding. A larger roast will also take longer so start checking at 6 ½ hours. The beef is done when it shreds easily with a fork. If it resists, it simply needs more time-check again in 30-60 minutes. Timing also depends on the brand of cooker you have, as brands vary.
    Chilies - For a bit more kick, add a chopped and seeded jalapeno pepper or two, or canned chilies.
    A little heat - Add a little chipotle powder to the spices for a smoky heat but be careful as it packs a punch.
    Classic variation: For a classic flavor profile, use only bay leaves and dried thyme. This works well for pasta, mashed potatoes, or sandwiches.
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 325kcalCarbohydrates: 4gProtein: 38gFat: 18gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 112mgSodium: 785mgPotassium: 768mgFiber: 1gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 453IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 47mgIron: 5mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Beef Barley Soup Recipe (Gluten-Free Option)

    03/08/2024 by Sally Cameron 19 Comments

    The deep colors of beef barley soup in a white bowl with herbs.

    Beef barley soup is a classic comfort-food recipe, perfect for chilly days. This hearty soup is loaded with tender chunks of chuck roast, carrots, onions, celery, tomatoes, plump barley, red potatoes, herbs, broth, and a splash of red wine for deep flavor. You can make it on the stovetop or in the Instant Pot, and the leftovers freeze beautifully. A simple gluten-free option is included.

    A bowl of beef barley vegetable soup with rosemary.

    This hearty beef barley soup was a favorite with my personal chef families for good reason. A few simple techniques build rich, savory flavor, and while it takes a bit of prep, the payoff is big. A slow simmer transforms chuck roast into a tender, melt-in-your-mouth beef and barley soup.

    Beef Barley Soup Highlights

    • A hearty meal-in-a-bowl - Beef barley soup loaded with tender beef and vegetables.
    • Great leftovers - Reheats well and freezes beautifully.
    • Two easy methods - Make it on the stovetop or in the Instant Pot/pressure cooker.
    • Gluten-free option - Skip the barley and use the substitution notes for a gluten-free version.

    For another terrific soup, try this chicken vegetable soup recipe.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Don't let the list of ingredients deter you from making this marvelous soup. It's worth it!

    Ingredients to make beef barley vegetable soup in bowls.
    • Cooking oil - Use extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil.
    • Boneless beef chuck roast - The best cut for beef barley soup.
    • Tomato paste - A trick for richer soup, savory depth.
    • Onion - Yellow, brown, or sweet onion all work.
    • Garlic - Fresh garlic cloves give the best flavor; garlic paste works in a pinch.
    • Wine - Dry red or white wine to deglaze the pan and captures all the browned bits.
    • Broth - Good quality low-sodium beef broth so you can control the salt.
    • Herbs - Fresh thyme and rosemary; dried herbs work too. Don't skip the bay leaf.
    • Tomatoes - Canned diced tomatoes with their juices add sweetness and body.
    • Carrots - For natural sweetness, color, and hearty vegetable texture.
    • Celery - Part of the classic mirepoix base with onion and carrots.
    • Potatoes - Red potatoes hold their shape well; leave the skins on for texture.
    • Pearl barley - The classic choice for this soup. Avoid quick-cooking barley, which can get overly soft. GF options below.
    • Worcestershire sauce - Just a little boosts savory flavor. If you need gluten-free, check the label or company website.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Chef's Tip: Why chuck roast is best for beef barley soup
    Chuck roast is the best cut for this soup because it has the right amount of marbling and connective tissue. As the soup simmers, that connective tissue breaks down and the beef turns tender and flavorful. Plan on some trim loss-buy about 1½ pounds chuck roast to end up with roughly 1 pound of usable beef after trimming. Skip stew meat, as it can be a mix of random, often lean cuts, so results vary.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Stretch the soup - To feed a few more hungry mouths, add 1-2 cups more broth and an 8-ounce bag of frozen mixed vegetables (corn, carrots, green beans, peas).
    • Herb swap - Use dried herbs, or try Herbes de Provence for a classic French-style flavor.
    • Gluten-free option - Skip the barley for gluten-free and stir in cooked quinoa, brown rice, buckwheat, or millet.
    • No wine? No problem - Skip the wine and deglaze with a splash of broth (or water).

    Try my recipe for this hearty beef stew, made fast in the Instant Pot.

    Chef's Tip: Skip the beef base
    Some beef barley soup recipes boost flavor with a beef base (bouillon cubes or beef paste). Those products are very high in sodium and often include additives, so I skip them. This soup builds deep, savory flavor the old-fashioned way-by browning the beef and vegetables, deglazing the pot, and simmering everything slowly.

    How to Make Beef Barley Soup

    These are the stovetop directions. For Instant Pot instructions, see the Notes section in the recipe card. You'll need a large, heavy pot, like a 5½-quart Dutch oven.

    Slicing beef chuck roast into cuber on a white cutting board.
    Step 1: Trim excess fat and slice meat into 1-inch cubes.
    Browning cubes of beef in a dutch oven.
    Step 2: Heat oil and cook meat until browned on both sides.
    Adding tomato paste to browned meat for caramelization.
    Step 3: Add tomato paste and stir to coat meat. Cook for 1-2 minutes. Remove to a bowl.
    Sautéing onions until golden in a dutch oven for soup.
    Step 4: Add onions and saute until golden getting the browned bits off the bottom of the pot.
    Deglazing the onions in a pot with red wine for flavor.
    Step 5: Add wine (water or broth) and deglaze the pot.
    Ingredients in a pot for soup ready to be mixed together.
    Step 6: Add the rest of the ingredients to the pot and stir together.
    Browned meat on top of mixed vegetables in a pot before making soup.
    Step 7: Stir the beef into the pot.
    All ingredients for beef barley soup ready for simmering in a big pot.
    Step 8: Add the broth and stir together.

    Bring the soup just to a boil, place a lid on the pot and turn heat to low. Simmer until beef is tender to the bite and vegetables are soft. Cook time is about 45 minutes. Soup is ready! Taste and add any additional salt or pepper.

    The deep colors of beef barley soup in a white bowl with herbs.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve this beef barley soup hot in big bowls. If you like, finish each bowl with chopped fresh parsley and a little freshly grated Parmesan. A crusty roll is perfect on the side, and garlic toast is especially good for soaking up the broth.

    Storage and Freezing

    Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. This soup also freezes beautifully-portion into 2-cup containers, label and date, and freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator and reheat gently; add a splash of broth if it thickens.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make beef barley soup gluten-free?

    Yes. Barley contains gluten, so for a gluten-free version, skip the barley and add a cooked gluten-free grain such as quinoa, brown rice, buckwheat, or millet near the end of cooking.

    Can I make this in the Instant Pot?

    Yes. The Instant Pot method is included in the Notes section of the recipe card. It shortens the cooking time while still producing tender beef and great flavor.

    Why is my barley soaking up all the broth?

    Barley continues to absorb liquid as it sits. When reheating, simply add a little extra broth or water to loosen the soup to your desired consistency.

    Do I have to use wine in the soup?

    No. The wine helps deglaze the pan and adds depth, but you can simply use a splash of broth or water instead and continue with the recipe.

    More Great Soup Recipes

    There's a soup recipe for every season, winter, spring, summer or fall. Check out this page for more soup recipes. Soup in the summer? Yes, try this cool and refreshing tomato gazpacho.

    • black bean pumpkin soup
      Creamy Black Bean Pumpkin Soup
    • Pot of cream of asparagus soup ready to serve.
      Easy Cream of Asparagus Soup
    • A finished pot of chicken vegetable soup ready to eat on a table.
      Chicken Vegetable Soup Recipe
    • Close up of Mexican chicken soup in a white bowl.
      Mexican Chicken Tortilla Soup Recipe

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this beef barley soup recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it ⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️. They really help other readers.

    This recipe originally published 1/27/2010 as French Market Vegetable Beef Soup.

    📖 Recipe

    The deep colors of beef barley soup in a white bowl with herbs.

    Beef Barley Soup

    Sally Cameron
    A hearty meal in a bowl with tender beef, lots of vegetables, potatoes, barley, herbs and rich broth. Make it on the stove top or in a Instant Pot/pressure cooker. If you follow a gluten-free diet, skip the barley. The yield is 2 ½ quarts of soup (10 cups).
    5 from 4 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 35 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 50 minutes mins
    Course Soup
    Cuisine French
    Servings 4 generous servings
    Calories 533 kcal

    Equipment

    • 5 quart dutch oven

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 pound trimmed boneless beef chuck roast buy at least 1 ½ pounds for trimming
    • 1 medium onion 1 ½ cups, chopped small
    • 3 medium carrots
    • 3 large celery stalks
    • 2 medium red potatoes skin on, chopped small
    • 3 large garlic cloves chopped fine
    • 2 teaspoons fresh chopped rosemary leaves or 1 teaspoon dried
    • 2 teaspoons fresh chopped thyme leaves or 1 teaspoon dried
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil divided use
    • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
    • ½ cup dry red wine or white wine optional
    • 1 15-ounce can diced tomatoes do not drain
    • ½ cup pearled barley skip for gluten-free diet
    • 4 cups low sodium beef broth or turkey broth
    • 1 large bay leaf
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Optional Garnish

    • ¼ cup Parmesan cheese or more, optional
    • ¼ cup fresh chopped parsley

    Instructions
     

    Trim beef

    • Slice off extra fat and tendons with a chef's knife. There is a lot of trimming on most beef chuck roasts and you will lose about 30% of the total weight. Trim into approximately 1-inch cubes.

    Prep vegetables

      Notes

      Gluten-free substitutions for barley:
      You can just omit the barley and it's still terrific soup. For a heartier soup add cooked quinoa, brown rice, buckwheat, or millet.
      Pressure/Instant Pot Method:
      • Set pressure cooker to saute. When hot, add the olive oil and brown meat. Don't crowd the meat, do in two batches. With all of the browned meat in the pot, add the tomato paste and stir with the meat to coat and caramelize. Pour meat into a medium bowl and save.
      • Add the second tablespoon of olive oil to the pot and sauté onions until soft and translucent. Add garlic and cook 1 minute more. Add wine to deglaze pan and reduce wine by half. Add all remaining ingredients, broth through pepper, and add the meat back in. Stir together. 
      • Lock lid in place and bring up to high pressure; begin timing for 1o minutes. When done, bring pressure down with the quick release method, moving the pot to a sink and running cool water over it. You will hear the pressure release in about 20 seconds. Test a chunk of meat for tenderness. If it's not tender, lock up the pot, bring back to high pressure and cook for a few more minutes. 
      • Remove bay leaf before serving. 
       

      Nutrition

      Calories: 533kcalCarbohydrates: 47gProtein: 34gFat: 22gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 12gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 82mgSodium: 1014mgPotassium: 1692mgFiber: 8gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 8161IUVitamin C: 22mgCalcium: 150mgIron: 5mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Sugar Snap Pea Salad With Lemon and Mint

      03/03/2026 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      Emerald green snap pea salad with shallot, lemon and mint in a white bowl.

      Sugar snap pea salad with lemon and mint is everything I love about spring in one bowl-fresh, crunchy, bright, and fast. Blanched sugar snap peas stay crisp-tender, then get tossed with a lemony Dijon vinaigrette, fresh herbs, shallot, and crunchy nuts. It's a light but satisfying side dish that pairs beautifully with roast chicken, salmon, steak, or anything off the grill.

      A white bowl of bright green sugar snap pea salad with almonds, lemon, feta, and mint.

      A few years ago I volunteered at a local farm that grew produce for families in need. When the snap peas were ready, harvesting them felt like reaching into a jungle-vines everywhere, with crisp, sweet peas tucked among the leaves. Ever since, I've loved sugar snap peas for their flavor and crunch, and when they're dressed with this apple cider vinaigrette they're so fresh and bright, truly the flavors of spring. I think you'll love this snap pea salad recipe.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Sugar Snap Pea Salad Recipe Highlights

      • Fast, fresh, and easy - Comes together in minutes, simple prep.
      • Healthy and crunchy - Light, vibrant, and naturally nutritious.
      • Great texture - Crisp snap peas, tender shallot, and nutty almonds in every bite.
      • The best of spring - Bright flavors from fresh mint and lemon.
      • Make-ahead friendly - Prep ahead, then toss just before serving.

      Looking for a good main dish to serve this with? Try my grilled lemon chicken with herbs. One of my go-to dinner recipes for grilling.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Ingredients for a fresh sugar snap pea salad with shallot, lemon, and mint.
      Ingredients for an apple cider vinegar vinaigrette in prep bowls.

      Snap pea salad

      • Peas - Fresh, raw sugar snap peas for sweet flavor and crisp crunch.
      • Almonds - Use sliced or slivered almonds for nutty flavor and great texture.
      • Shallot - Adds a little punch and crunch without overpowering the salad.
      • Herbs - I love mint here, but other soft herbs work too (see options below).
      • Lemon - Use the zest for bright, fresh citrus flavor. You can give the salad a squeeze of fresh juice at the end if desired or use lemon juice instead of ACV in the dressing.

      Apple cider vinaigrette

      • Olive oil - Use a good extra virgin olive oil for the best flavor.
      • Apple cider vinegar - Adds a clean bite and balances the sweetness of the peas.
      • Dijon mustard - Helps emulsify the dressing and adds subtle tang.
      • Garlic - Just a little gives the vinaigrette depth.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Herbs - Not a mint fan? Swap in another soft herb such as Italian parsley, chervil, cilantro, or basil.
      • Oil - Use lemon olive oil for even more bright lemon flavor.
      • Snow peas - Snap peas give the best texture but if you can't get them, snow peas are flatter and slightly more tender but work well as a substitute. Slice them thinly for the best texture in the salad.
      • Add cheese - Crumbled Greek feta (in the main photo) adds flavor contrast, or shaves of Parmesan cheese add a nice salty counterpart.
      • Make it a meal - By adding protein, see serving suggestions below.

      For another light and tasty salad, try this quinoa corn salad with lemon vinaigrette.

      Chef's tip: Why blanch (and shock) sugar snap peas
      Blanching is optional, but it's a smart move when you want snap peas at their best. A quick dip in boiling salted water cooks them just enough to take off the raw edge and lightly tenderize the pods-without losing their crunch. It also seasons them from the inside out. Blanching works hand-in-hand with an ice bath (blanch & shock): shocking stops the cooking instantly and helps lock in that bright green color, so your peas stay crisp, vibrant, and fresh-looking in the salad. And don't worry about the amount of salt in the blanching water, most all of it is tossed.

      How to Make Sugar Snap Pea Salad

      Get started by setting up and ice batch: fill a large bowl wi half ice and cold water. Bring a large pot (5 quarts) to boil and add 1 tablespoon of kosher salt per quart of water.

      Blanching sugar snap peas in boiling water with salt.
      1. Add the snap peas to the boiling salted water and cook for 90 seconds.
      Blanched snap peas in a bowl of ice and water for shocking.
      1. Drain snap peas from boiling water and plunge into ice water right away to stop the cooking process and set color.
      Draining snap peas in a silver colander in a sink.
      1. After 1 minute in the ice bath, drain snap peas and remove any ice.
      Drying blanched sugar snap peas on a kitchen towl.
      1. Dry peas very well on a clean kitchen towel (so no watery salad).
      Chopped sugar snap peas on a white cutting board.
      1. Chop snap peas into small pieces on the diagonal.
      Dressing a fresh snap pea salad with a golden vinaigrette.
      1. Add to a bowl and dress lightly (2 Tbls.) with the vinaigrette, add almonds, mint, shallots, cheese if using. Taste and adjust with any salt or pepper. Serve extra dressing on side.
      Emerald green snap pea salad with shallot, lemon and mint in a white bowl.

      Serving Suggestions

      This salad works perfectly as a side dish. To turn sugar snap pea salad into a satisfying meal, add a protein such as cooked edamame, grilled chicken, shrimp, salmon, steak strips, or chickpeas. Serve the salad chilled or at room temperature.

      Serving option - For parties or meal prep, serve dressing on the side so everyone can dress their portion right before eating (you might need to make extra dressing).

      Make-ahead

      Sugar snap pea salad is best enjoyed soon after making, when the peas are crisp and bright. If you want to prep ahead, do it-but don't dress it. The vinaigrette's acidity will gradually dulls the peas' color and softens their crunch.

      Leftovers and Storage

      Plan to enjoy dressed leftovers within 24 hours for best flavor and texture.

      Recipe FAQs

      Do you need to blanch snap peas for salad?

      No. Snap peas are naturally sweet and crisp, so they are delicious sliced raw. Blanching is optional if you prefer a slightly more tender texture or want a brighter green color. If you blanch them, be sure to shock them in ice water to stop the cooking and preserve their crispness.

      How long does snap pea salad last in the refrigerator?

      Snap pea salad is best eaten the day it is made but will keep in the refrigerator for up to 2 days. The peas may soften slightly a bit and the color will not be as bright but will still taste good.

      Do you need to remove the strings from snap peas?

      Most modern snap peas are stringless, but if your peas have tough strings along the seam, simply pull them off before slicing for the best texture.

      Why slice snap peas instead of leaving them whole?

      Slicing snap peas creates thinner pieces that are easier to eat, improves texture, and helps the dressing coat each bite evenly.

      More Vegetable Salad Recipes

      Try one of these fresh vegetable-based recipes when you're looking for more salad options beyond lettuce greens.

      • Cold green bean salad with cherry tomatoes, corn, feta and red onion in a white bowl.
        Cold Green Bean Salad With Tomatoes and Corn
      • Broccoli bacon salad
        Crunchy Broccoli Salad with Bacon
      • White shallow bowl stilled with green cabbage coleslaw, carrots, and parsley with a light dressing.
        Simple Easy Coleslaw Recipe
      • Chopped cucumber salad in a gray bowl with feta cheese crumbles and green herbs.
        Cucumber and Dill Salad with Feta

      If You Make This Recipe

      If you enjoy this sugar snap pea salad, please leave a comment and let me know. I love to hear from you and your comments help other readers too! Thanks for supporting my site.

      📖 Recipe

      Emerald green snap pea salad with shallot, lemon and mint in a white bowl.

      Sugar Snap Pea Salad

      Sally Cameron
      Fresh, crunchy, and so easy to make, the snap pea salad is a light and refreshing salad for spring, with a tangy vinaigrette, lemon, mint, almonds, and fresh mint leaves. Cheese optional.
      No ratings yet
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 15 minutes mins
      Cook Time 2 minutes mins
      Total Time 17 minutes mins
      Course Salad, Side Dish, vegetables
      Servings 6
      Calories 102 kcal

      Equipment

      • Large pot to blanch the snap peas about 5 quarts

      Ingredients
        

      Pea salad

      • 1 pound fresh raw sugar snap peas
      • 1 medium shallot thinly sliced
      • 2-3 tablespoons slivered almonds or sliced almonds
      • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh mint
      • 4 tablespoons kosher salt for blanching water
      • 1 small lemon zested
      • 2 ounces Greek feta cheese, finely crumbled optional

      Vinaigrette dressing (makes extra)

      • 4 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
      • 1 ½ tablespoons apple cider vinegar
      • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
      • 1 garlic cloved microplaned or finely chopped and smeared into a paste.
      • ⅛ teaspoon sea salt or more to taste
      • 2 pinches black pepper or more to taste
      • 1-2 pinches red pepper flakes optional

      Instructions
       

      Set up

      • Bring a large pot (5 quart) of water to a boil adding 1 tablespoon of salt per quart of water. Set up an ice bath. Fill a large bowl halfway with ice and cold water and set near stove.

      Blanch and shock peas

      • When the water is boiling, add the peas and cook (blanch) for 90 seconds, then immediately remove them to the ice water to stop the cooking process (shocking). After 1 minute, drain and dry the snap peas well on a clean kitchen towel.

      Make the vinaigrette

      • Add the olive oil, vinegar, mustard, salt, pepper, and red chili, then whisk smooth or shake in a small jar.

      Make the salad

      • Slice the snap peas on the diagonal into small pieces and add to a medium bowl. Add the shallot, almonds, chopped mint, lemon zest, and any cheese (if using). Toss together.
      • For best color and crunch, store the salad undressed and toss with 2-3 tablespoons of vinaigrette right before serving. Sere extra dressing on the side if preferred. Serve at room temperature or chilled.

      Notes

      To turn sugar snap pea salad into a satisfying meal, add protein such as cooked edamame, grilled chicken, shrimp, salmon, steak strips, or chickpeas.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 102kcalCarbohydrates: 9gProtein: 3gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gSodium: 4708mgPotassium: 223mgFiber: 3gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 862IUVitamin C: 56mgCalcium: 53mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Garlic Confit (Stovetop or Oven Method)

      02/26/2026 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      A glass jar full of garlic confit cloves in gold olive oil with baguette slices.

      Ever make garlic confit? It's one of the simplest, most useful culinary techniques you can learn. Let me show you how to make garlic confit on the stovetop or in the oven, plus a dozen ways to use it. Garlic confit is whole garlic cloves gently cooked in olive oil until soft, sweet, and spreadable-and you also get a jar of fragrant garlic-infused oil that instantly upgrades everyday dishes.

      A ramekin full of garlic confit cloves in golden olive oil with a sprig of thyme.

      Before culinary school, I worked in a catering kitchen where I learned to make garlic confit. It felt like magic-taming the dragon of raw, pungent garlic into something creamy and almost sweet. Garlic confit is whole garlic cloves gently cooked in olive oil until soft, sweet, and spreadable. It's a classic French technique-confit means "preserved"-made by gently cooking an ingredient in fat. Simple, unfussy, and endlessly useful.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love Garlic Confit

      • Easy, foundational technique - A simple, classic method.
      • Two-for-one payoff - Tender, sweet garlic cloves and garlic-infused oil.
      • Big flavor, mellow garlic - Turns sharp garlic into something buttery and delicious.
      • Stovetop or oven - Make it hands-on or hands-off-both methods work beautifully.
      • Endlessly useful - Stir into sauces, mash into potatoes, add to vegetables, or use the garlic oil for many dishes.

      Use garlic confit cloves and the garlic oil when making pumpkin risotto, it's fantastic.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Two simple ingredients to make garlic confit: extra virgin olive oil and fresh garlic, on a counter.
      • Garlic cloves - Use whole, peeled cloves. Fresh heads give the best flavor, but refrigerated pre-peeled cloves are a great time-saver and work well for confit-just choose cloves that are firm and smell fresh (avoid jarred garlic in water/brine).
      • Extra-virgin olive oil - Use enough to fully submerge the cloves. It becomes fragrant garlic oil you can cook with or drizzle as a finishing touch. (If you need an alternative, use avocado oil or a mild neutral oil, but the flavor will be different).
      • Herbs (optional) - Garlic confit is traditionally just garlic + oil, but you can add a small sprig of thyme or rosemary, or a bay leaf for a subtle herbal note. Keep it minimal so the garlic stays the star.

      Chef's Tip: Getting Garlic Smell Off Your Hands
      After peeling lots of garlic, your fingers can feel sticky and the smell lingers. Rub your hands with lemon juice and a pinch of salt, then rinse well and wash with soap. The salt acts like a gentle scrub while the acid helps cut the odor. You can also rub your hands on stainless steel under running water (spoon, sink) to help neutralize the smell.

      Mash a few cloves of garlic confit into the sauce for this roast pork tenderloin with Dijon sauce.

      How to Make Garlic Confit Stovetop Method

      Chef's tool tip: For a cool little tool to monitor the oil temperature, I'm using this digital thermometer that clips on the pan side. Pretty handy and inexpensive. If using one, do not allow it to touch the bottom of the pan as you will not get an accurate reading. Let it hold suspended in the oil.

      A glass bowl of whole peeled garlic cloves and a bowls of papery peels.
      1. Peel 3-4 heads of garlic, saving about 45 garlic cloves. Start by trimming a tiny bit off the root end. Keep the garlic cloves whole and pretty.
      Pouring golden olive oil into a small pan over whole garlic cloves.
      1. Add the garlic to a small, 2 quart pot, and pour olive oil over the top to submerge by ½".
      A small pot of garlic cloves cooking for garlic confit with an inserted digital thermometer to watch temperature.
      1. Bring the oil temperature up to between 180°F - 200°F and keep it there for 60-75 minutes, until the garlic cloves are easily squishable between your fingers. Allow them to cool in the oil off the heat. Cool to 70°. Transfer to a clean jar with a lid and refrigerate promptly. See below.

      Garlic Confit Oven Method

      The oven method is the easiest, hands-off way to make garlic confit. Add peeled garlic cloves to a small baking dish or oven-safe ramekin and cover completely with olive oil (the cloves should be fully submerged). Bake at 250°F until the cloves are soft, lightly golden, and spreadable, about 60-90 minutes depending on clove size. Cool completely, then transfer cloves and oil to a clean jar and refrigerate promptly.

      Chef's Tip - Garlic Confit Safety (Botulism) & Storage
      Food safety matters because garlic confit botulism risk exists when garlic is improperly stored in oil. Garlic stored in oil creates a low-oxygen environment where Clostridium botulinum can produce toxin without obvious smell or taste-so storage matters.

      • Never store garlic confit (or garlic-in-oil) at room temperature. Refrigerate promptly.
      • Use within 1-2 weeks (label the jar with the date), or freeze up to 3 months for longer storage.
      • Store in a clean container with the cloves fully submerged in oil. If anything seems off (bubbling, odd odor, or mold), discard it.
      A glass jar full of garlic confit cloves in gold olive oil with baguette slices.

      Ways to Use Garlic Confit

      Use the oil for cooking or finishing, and use the cloves mainly for finishing (or gentle warming) so they don't burn.

      • Crostini upgrade: Toast baguette slices, smear with whipped ricotta or soft goat cheese, then top with a few cloves of garlic confit and a pinch of flaky salt (or thyme). Simple, fast, and very irresistible.
      • Build flavor: Start soups, sauces, and sautéed dishes by warming a spoonful of garlic oil with onions or shallots, then stir in a mashed clove or two at the end for mellow depth.
      • Finish meats & fish: Drizzle garlic oil over grilled or roasted steak, chicken, or fish while it rests; add a few sliced cloves for an instant "sauce."
      • Vegetables: Roast vegetables with the oil, then toss in sliced cloves after roasting (confit garlic can burn if cooked at high heat).
      • Eggs & breakfast: Cook eggs over low to medium heat with a little garlic oil, or finish scrambled eggs and avocado toast with a drizzle of the oil and a mashed clove.
      • Pasta & grains: Toss hot pasta with mashed confit, a splash of pasta water, chili flakes, and Parmesan; stir a spoonful into rice, creamy polenta, or risotto.
      • Bread & sandwiches: Blend cloves into butter for garlic bread, or spread a thin layer inside grilled cheese/panini and cook in the garlic oil.
      • Dressings & dips: Blend cloves and oil into a vinaigrette, creamy dressings, aioli, or yogurt sauces.
      • Lentils & beans: Finish warm lentils or beans with a drizzle of garlic confit oil and a few sliced cloves for an easy, flavorful upgrade.

      Chef's Tip: Add the cloves at the end of cooking-because they're already soft and cooked, they can burn over high heat.

      Recipe FAQs

      Can you freeze garlic confit?

      Yes. Freezing is a great option for longer storage-portion cloves (and a little oil) so you can thaw only what you need. Try it in silicone ice cube trays.

      How do I store garlic confit safely?

      Refrigerate promptly in a clean container with the cloves submerged in the oil. Do not store at room temperature. For safety, use refrigerated garlic and oil within 1-2 weeks or freeze for longer storage.

      Can I use pre-peeled garlic cloves?

      While fresh cloves you peel yourself are best, you can use refrigerated pre-peeled cloves. They are a good time-saver and work well. Just choose cloves that are firm and smell fresh (avoid jarred garlic in water/brine).

      More Homemade Condiments to Keep in Your Fridge

      Keeping a few homemade condiments in the fridge makes everyday cooking easier and more flavorful. Here are some of my favorite sauces and condiments to have on hand. And for more inspiration check out the sauces, seasonings, and condiments page.

      • A bowl of bright green Genovese pesto, classic Italian basil pesto.
        Pesto Genovese (Classic Italian Basil Pesto)
      • A glass jar of deep red homemade bbq sauce.
        Gluten-Free BBQ Sauce Recipe
      • A jar of salsa chimichurri of parsley, oregano, olive oil, onion, and vinegar.
        Argentinian Chimichurri Sauce (salsa chimichurri)
      • A glass jar with rich brown hoisin sauce and a whisk for mixing.
        Gluten-Free Hoisin Sauce

      If you Make This Recipe

      If you make garlic confit, please tell me about it with a comment. I love hearing from you and your comments also help other readers. Thanks for supporting my site.

      📖 Recipe

      A glass jar full of garlic confit cloves in gold olive oil with baguette slices.

      Garlic Confit

      Sally Cameron
      Whole garlic cloves gently cooked in olive oil until soft, sweet, and spreadable-and you also get a jar of fragrant garlic-infused oil that instantly upgrades everyday dishes.
      No ratings yet
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 15 minutes mins
      Cook Time 1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
      Course condiment
      Cuisine French
      Servings 24 Yield: about 1 ½ cups garlic and oil

      Equipment

      • 2 quart pot

      Ingredients
        

      • 45 cloves fresh raw garlic 3-4 large heads, or one medium bag pre-peeled
      • 1 ½ cups extra virgin olive oil enough to fully submerge cloves by about ½ inch

      Instructions
       

      Prep garlic

      • Gently break the heads apart keeping the whole cloves in tact. With a sharp knife, trim a tiny bit of the root end off, then peel the cloves. You need 45.

      Confit the garlic

      • Add peeled garlic cloves to a small saucepan. Pour in olive oil to fully submerge the cloves. Set over low heat and warm the oil to 180-200°F (gentle, barely shimmering-no sizzling). Cook 60-75 minutes, adjusting heat as needed to keep it very gentle. Stir occasionally.
        The confit is done when cloves are buttery soft and mash easily, and are pale golden at most (not browned).

      Cooling and storing

      • Cool garlic confit completely in the pan, then transfer cloves and oil to a clean jar. Keep cloves submerged and refrigerated.
        DO NOT STORE AT ROOM TEMPERATURE.

      Notes

      Garlic Confit Oven Method
      1. Heat oven to 225°F (or 250°F if you want it slightly faster).
      2. Place garlic cloves in a small baking dish or oven safe ramekin. Add olive oil to fully submerge. Cover with a lid or foil.
      3. Bake 60-90 minutes, until cloves are very soft and lightly golden. Check earlier if cloves are small.
      4. Cool completely, then transfer to a clean jar with cloves submerged.
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Shredded Beef Enchiladas

      02/19/2026 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      A baking dish full of shredded beef enchiladas with a deep red enchilada sauce cilantro, and pickled onions.

      If you have leftover shredded beef, these shredded beef enchiladas are an easy, satisfying dinner you can pull off on a weeknight. My leftover slow cooker shredded beef is what inspired them-and with sauce and shredded cheese, assembly is quick: soften the tortillas, fill, roll, sauce, cheese, and bake. And that dark red enchilada sauce? It's my homemade enchilada sauce made with from dried chiles, so it's a deeper brick-red than the brighter red canned sauces you might be used to.

      A casserole dish of shredded beef enchiladas with a deep dark red chili sauce, pink pickled onions, and cilantro.

      Beef enchiladas don't need to be complicated to be good. Here, there's no frying, no fuss, and no need to drown everything in sauce. Warm the tortillas just enough to make them pliable (microwave), then roll them with shredded beef and a little cheese. By lightly saucing the pan and topping the enchiladas instead of dousing them, you get tender, filled, flavorful tortillas ready to bake. They are best served right away while they still hold their shape. Garnish and enjoy.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Shredded Beef Enchiladas Highlights

      • Use leftover shredded meat - An easy, satisfying way to turn leftovers into dinner.
      • Fast to assemble - Soften the tortillas, fill, roll, sauce, cheese, and bake.
      • Short ingredient list - Tortillas, beef, sauce, and cheese (garnishes optional).
      • Sauce options - Make my homemade enchilada sauce with dried chiles ahead of time, or use a canned sauce.
      • Naturally gluten-free - With corn tortillas.

      What to serve with these enchiladas? Try this mixed vegetable rice recipe with Mexican flavors. It's a great pairing.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Corn tortillas, red enchilada sauce, grated cheddar cheese, and shredded beef to make enchiladas.

      Beef Enchiladas

      • Meat - Leftover slow cooker shredded beef works great and makes assembly fast.
      • Tortillas - Corn tortillas (6" size) are traditional and naturally gluten-free.
      • Enchilada sauce - Use a good canned or bottled sauce, or make my homemade enchilada sauce ahead of time for deeper, richer flavor.
      • Cheese - Shredded cheddar or a Mexican cheese blend melts well and adds that classic cheesy finish.

      Optional for serving

      • Onions - Pickled red onions (so easy to make!) add tang and brightness; sliced green onions add fresh color and mild onion flavor.
      • Sour cream - Adds cool, creamy balance against the rich sauce and cheese.
      • Cilantro - Fresh chopped cilantro adds classic flavor and a pop of green.
      • Jalapeño peppers - Thinly sliced for color and a little extra heat for those who like it spicy.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Meat options - Leftover shredded rib meat (pork ribs or beef short ribs) and shredded pot roast are also good.
      • Shredded chicken enchiladas - Swap in cooked shredded chicken (rotisserie chicken works great).
      • Cheese swap - Use Monterey Jack or pepper jack, or a cheddar and jack combo.
      • Tortilla options - Corn tortillas are traditional; if you prefer flour tortillas, warm them briefly so they roll easily. There are also wheat-corn blend tortillas that work well, but I've not tried them (as I am GF).
      • Add-ins - A handful of sautéed onions mixed into the beef adds extra flavor (optional), just don't over-stuff them.

      For a fast and easy taco dinner, make my taco filling recipe with ground beef or ground turkey in minutes!

      Chef's tip - Why make red enchilada sauce from scratch
      Many popular canned enchilada sauces contain wheat (so not gluten-free), modified corn starch, hydrolyzed corn, soybean oil, and "flavor enhancers." Making it at home means a clean, naturally gluten-free sauce made with good oil, real chiles, broth, and simple pantry spices. You also skip the soy and corn additives that may be GMO unless organic.

      How to Make Shredded Beef Enchiladas

      Once your ingredients are ready, this goes really fast, fill, roll, and bake. Pre-heat the oven to 350°F.

      A white rectangular casserole dish with deep red enchilada sauce on the bottom.
      1. Place about ½ cup of enchilada sauce on the bottom of a casserole dish (this dish is approx. 9"x13").
      Two corn tortillas being made into tacos with meat and cheese.
      1. Wrap tortillas in a clean kitchen towel and microwave 1 minute till warm and soft. Heat the meat briefly. Fill each tortilla with 1 tsp. sauce down center, then 2 ounces meat (a small loose handful of shredded meat), roughly ⅓ cup when piled loosely, and a sprinkle of cheese, then roll.
      A baking dish fill of shredded beef enchiladas covered with brick red enchilada sauce.
      1. Add rolled enchiladas to the dish, add sauce, enough to cover to the edges.
      Grated cheddar cheese covering the top of beef enchiladas in a casserole, ready to bake.
      1. Add cheese, cover with foil tightly and bake until hot, about 30 minutes (to 165°).

      Serving Homemade Beef Enchiladas

      Corn tortillas soften quickly once they're sauced and baked so they don't hold well for long. For the cleanest servings, rest the pan 5-10 minutes out of the oven, then lift with a wide spatula from underneath to warm plates. Serve with a simple green salad, rice, or beans.

      Leftovers and Storage

      From a food-safety standpoint, leftover enchiladas will keep for up to 4 days in the refrigerator. But honestly, they won't hold together well-it's the nature of corn tortillas. As they sit (and especially after reheating), the tortillas keep absorbing sauce, so you won't get neat rolled shapes. They fall apart, but they'll still be delicious…just a little messy.

      Recipe FAQs

      Why are my enchiladas falling apart?

      Corn tortillas soften quickly once they're sauced and baked. They're best served soon after baking; after sitting (or reheating) they'll be delicious but won't hold neat rolled shapes.

      How do I keep corn tortillas from cracking when rolling?

      Warm them first so they're pliable. I steam/microwave them wrapped in a damp towel until flexible.

      Can I use flour tortillas instead of corn?

      Yes, but the texture and flavor will be different. Warm flour tortillas briefly so they roll easily. Another option, try the corn-wheat blend tortillas.

      More Mexican-Inspired Recipes

      If you loved these shredded beef enchiladas, here are more Mexican-inspired recipes to add to your dinner rotation.

      • A bowl of colorful rice with mixed vegetables and a parsley garnish ready to serve.
        Easy Mixed Vegetable Rice
      • A glass of bright red watermelon agua fresca with mint and ice.
        How to Make Mexican Watermelon Water
      • Bright colored avocado , black bean, and corn salad with tomatoes and jalapenos in a white bowl.
        Avocado Corn and Black Bean Salad
      • Close up of Mexican chicken soup in a white bowl.
        Mexican Chicken Tortilla Soup Recipe

      If You Make These Enchiladas

      Please leave a comment, I love to hear from you. Your comments also help other readers. And leave a star rating please, thanks!

      📖 Recipe

      A baking dish full of shredded beef enchiladas with a deep red enchilada sauce cilantro, and pickled onions.

      Easy Shredded Beef Enchiladas

      Sally Cameron
      Turn leftover shredded beef into easy, cheesy shredded beef enchiladas with corn tortillas and red enchilada sauce-homemade or canned-for a warm and satisfying dinner that's naturally gluten-free.
      No ratings yet
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 15 minutes mins
      Cook Time 30 minutes mins
      Total Time 45 minutes mins
      Course Dinner, Entree, main
      Cuisine Mexican
      Servings 4
      Calories 499 kcal

      Equipment

      • Casserole dish for baking approximately 9"x13"

      Ingredients
        

      • 8 6" corn tortillas
      • 1 pound leftover shredded beef
      • 6-8 ounces grated cheddar cheese medium cheddar or Mexican blend
      • 1 ½ cups red enchilada sauce

      Garnishes

      • 1 sliced jalapeno pepper
      • 4 tablespoons pickled onions
      • 1 tablespoon chopped cilantro
      • 4 tablespoons sour cream
      • 1 tablespoon chopped green onions instead of the pickled onions

      Instructions
       

      • Pre-heat the oven to 350°F

      Prepare the dish

      • Add about ½ cup of enchilada sauce to the bottom of the baking dish and tilt to coat it in a thin, even layer.

      Warm tortillas and meat

      • Wrap the tortillas in a clean kitchen towel and microwave for about 1 minute, or until soft, pliable, and hot. Warm the shredded beef (stovetop or microwave) until just heated through, then drain off any excess juices so the enchiladas don't get soggy. Keep the meat warm while you roll the enchiladas.

      Roll enchiladas

      • For each enchilada, spread with a teaspoon of sauce, add 2 ounces (a small handful, abut ⅓ cup) of shredded beef and a sprinkle of cheese. Roll up and place seam side down in the baking dish. Repeat with the remaining tortillas to make 8 enchiladas, nestling them close together in the dish.

      Sauce and bake

      • Pour about 1 cup of enchilada sauce over the enchiladas to cover, then sprinkle on the remaining cheese. Cover the dish tightly with foil and bake until hot and bubbling, about 30 minutes. The internal temperature should reach 160-165°F.
      • Let the enchiladas cool for about 10 minutes before serving. Lift them out gently with a wide spatula and add your favorite toppings.

      Notes

      Here's the recipe for my quick pickled red onions I use in the lead photo. They are delicious and easy! Ready in 30-60 minutes. 

      Nutrition

      Calories: 499kcalCarbohydrates: 32gProtein: 38gFat: 24gSaturated Fat: 11gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gCholesterol: 113mgSodium: 1171mgPotassium: 504mgFiber: 5gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 1027IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 348mgIron: 3mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Chocolate Banana Smoothie

      02/16/2024 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

      two chocolate smoothies in glasses on an antique tray.

      This healthy chocolate banana smoothie is like a chocolate milkshake that powers up your morning. It increases energy, balances mood, boosts your brain, and helps you sail through daily stress. Ready for a dose of chocolate goodness? Grab your blender and let's fix those chocolate cravings in a healthy way.

      Creamy chocolate smoothies in glasses topped with banana slices and cacao nibs.

      I've been drinking smoothies for more than twenty five years and continually come up with new recipes to keep breakfast interesting. This chocolate smoothie not only tastes like it's too good for breakfast but provides more than just tasty protein.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Like This Recipe

      • Easy to make, healthy smoothie that tastes amazing.
      • Powers up your morning or post-workout routine.
      • Healthy ingredients.

      Want to make more healthy smoothies? Here's a guide to making healthy smoothies that really breaks down how to make smart choices.

      Recipe Ingredients

      Here's what you need to make a healthy chocolate banana smoothie.

      Ingredients for a chocolate smoothie on a gray counter.
      • Chocolate: Unsweetened raw cacao powder or unsweetened cocoa powder provide great chocolatey flavor and health benefits.
      • Milk: Use what works best for you, either a plant milk like hemp milk, oat milk, almond milk, coconut milk, or regular milk.
      • Healthy fats: A tablespoon of coconut MCT oil is terrific, or a little canned coconut milk for rich smoothness.
      • Flaxseed: An excellent way to add protein and fiber but you can't use it whole. It must be ground, and fresh ground is best. If you don't want to go through that, use a quality brand like this that is cold-milled to preserve nutrients. I grind mine right before using with this little grinder.
      • Ground maca powder: Optional, but for energy and balanced stress levels. It's an adaptogenic herb from Peru. This is my secret ingredient. Add it to easy overnight oats with chia seeds too.
      • Cinnamon: a little ground cinnamon is a nice flavor blend with the chocolate (optional).
      • Sweetener: Try a little maple syrup, sugar-free maple syrup, plain sugar-free simple syrup, or chocolate stevia drops depending on your taste buds.
      • Banana: Helps make a creamy drink, adds sweetness, and a rich source of potassium and B6.
      • Protein powder: Choose what type of protein powder works best for you in terms of grams of protein you need. Read labels carefully for potential unwanted ingredients. A good rule is the shorter the ingredient list, the better. Buy unflavored and unsweetened and add yourself for better control.

      See recipe card for measurements.

      Chef's tip: About bananas. Choose greenish bananas for lower sugar levels and resistant starch, a type of starch than functions more like fiber. Ripe bananas have more sugar. For frozen banana, peel and chop the banana into chunks and freeze on a small sheet pan in a single layer. When frozen, store in a zip bag for using in smoothies. They are like banana ice cubes!

      Substitutions and Smoothie Variations

      • Want a little crunchy garnish? Sprinkle the top with raw cacao nibs.
      • Want a chocolate peanut butter smoothie? Swap the coconut oil for a tablespoon or two of creamy peanut butter. Cashew butter, almond butter, and sunflower seed butter all work too!
      • Swap the flaxseeds for chia seeds. Try a tablespoon or two to start as chia thickens upon standing.
      • Skip the banana and add a little avocado.
      • Add a little vanilla extract.
      • For a simple chocolate smoothie use just milk, cacao, banana, protein powder, and a little sweetener.

      Chef's note: What is maca? Maca is an adaptogenic herb that help the body manage environmental stress. Research on maca is in early stages, but reports show maca may help increase energy and stamina, balance hormones, plus reduce stress and anxiety. With a caramel-y flavor, its a terrific add for smoothies, overnight oats with chia, and Greek yogurt.

      Maca powder in a bowl and spoon on a marble .

      Recipe Instructions

      Simply add all ingredients for this chocolate banana smoothie to a high-speed blender and blend until smooth. If you want an icy cold smoothie, add a couple of ice cubes.

      Another option is a personal size blender like this model complete with a smoothie container. I use mine to make salad dressings too like this creamy lemon tahini dressing.

      Is it Cacao or Cocoa?

      Is it cocoa or cacao? Cocoa and cacao are different but start from the same source; the cacao tree with a chocolatey but different flavor. Cacao is raw and minimally processed so retains more nutrients. It's a little bitter flavor wise. Cocoa powder is milder and more processed, like what you bake with.

      The health benefit from cacao is from from a type of phytonutrient called flavanols. Published studies show that consuming cocoa flavanols improves cardiovascular function and lessens the burden on the heart that comes with the aging. It also helps lowers blood pressure, improve blood flow to the brain and heart, and prevent blood clots. If that isn't good news for chocolate lovers I don't know what is!

      Cacao adds important minerals such as magnesium, manganese, chromium, phosphorus, iron, potassium, zinc, and copper.

      White round platter with a glass of hemp seed milk, a pitcher, and hemp seeds.

      Chef's tip: For homemade milks that are better then the store and easy to make from your pantry, try my homemade almond milk and homemade hemp milk in photo above).

      Protein Powder Notes

      Protein powder makes it easy to add protein to your smoothie. It's best to choose unflavored, unsweetened powder with minimal additives.

      There are many options available today from whey and egg white protein powder to plant-based protein powder options. Read the labels for a clean product looking for additives, fake flavors, and added sweeteners that you may not want.

      For more suggestions, read this post on How to Choose a Protein Powder and alternatives to powders for adding protein.

      Servings Suggestions

      Enjoy a chocolate banana smoothie right after blending for the best flavor and texture. If you're taking on the go, store in an insulated bottle and shake before you consume to re-blend if needed. Garnish with a sprinkle of cacao nibs, a few banana slices, a little shredded unsweetened coconut, or hemp seeds.

      This chocolate smoothie recipe makes one serving. It works good for after school snacks as well as breakfast meal replacement or a post-workout re-fuel.

      Chocolate smoothies with cacao nibs.

      Recipe FAQs

      How do I make a chocolate smoothie without added sugar

      For a no added sugar smoothie, start with unsweetened milk. Dairy milk contains natural sugars, 13 grams in an 8-ounce glass of low fat milk. To lower sugar, switch out to an unsweetened plant milk. They are delicious for making smoothies. For example, homemade, unstrained almond milk is creamy and makes a terrific smoothie with only 1 gram of natural sugar.

      Be sure to choose an unsweetened protein powder, and if using fruit, choose low sugar fruit like berries and use only a small amount. One other tip for low sugar smoothies, use monk fruit to sweeten instead of maple syrup or honey.

      What kind of milk should I use for a chocolate smoothie

      A variety of milks work well in a chocolate smoothie, all adding their own flavor nuances. Try different ones to see what you like best, then occasionally trade them out and do something new. Try almond milk, hemp milk, coconut milk, cashew milk, organic soy milk, and dairy milk. Rice milk works but as it is so thin and flavorless it doesn't add much as these other milks do.

      Can I use chocolate syrup for the chocolate flavor?

      Simply put, no. Don't use chocolate syrup for a chocolate smoothie. It's best and healthiest to use raw cacao powder or unsweetened cocoa powder for the chocolate flavor.

      The famous chocolate syrup in the brown bottle contains high fructose corn syrup, corn syrup, sugar, water, cocoa, preservatives, salt, mono and diglycerides, Polysorbate 60, xanthan gum, and artificial vanilla flavor. Do you really want that in a healthy smoothie? I don't think so.

      More Healthy Smoothie Recipes

      • Hawaiian green smoothie
        Green Detox Smoothie Recipe
      • Tropical Mango Green Smoothie
        Green Smoothie Recipe with Mango
      • Creamy orange pumpkin pie smoothie in a glass with a silver straw.
        Pumpkin Smoothie (Healthy & Easy)
      • chocolate blueberry smoothie
        Chocolate Blueberry Smoothie (high protein)

      ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

      If you make this recipe, please comment, and let me know, I enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      chocolate maca smoothie | AFoodCentricLife.com

      Healthy Chocolate Banana Smoothie Recipe

      Sally Cameron
      Chocolaty, creamy and good for you, this smoothie will get your day started right with raw cacao powder for heart and brain health, and maca to help your body adapt to what they day throws at you.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 5 minutes mins
      Total Time 5 minutes mins
      Course smoothie
      Cuisine American
      Servings 1 serving
      Calories 384 kcal

      Equipment

      • High speed blender

      Ingredients
        

      • 1 ¼ cups almond milk preferably homemade
      • 2 tablespoons raw cacao powder
      • 2 tablespoons ground flaxseed
      • 1 tablespoon coconut MCT oil
      • 1 tablespoon ground maca powder
      • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
      • 1 small greenish banana
      • 1 scoop protein powder of choice see notes below
      • 2 teaspoons monk fruit (for no sugar) See notes below

      Optional Garnishes

      • 1 tablespoon raw cacao nibs
      • 1 tablespoon unsweetened coconut thread
      • 2-3 slices banana

      Instructions
       

      • Add all ingredients into a blender and blend until smooth and creamy.
      • If you prefer a cold smoothie, add a couple of ice cubes. Garnish as desired.

      Notes

      Protein powder makes it easy to add protein to your smoothie. Choose unflavored, unsweetened powder with no additives. You can also use hemp seeds, chia seeds and other plant-based options to add protein. 
      Substitutions:
      • Swap 2 tablespoons of canned coconut milk for the MCT oil, adds nice creamy richness. 
      For sweeteners:
      • I use a monk fruit simple syrup for sweetness with no added sugar. You can also use maple syrup or honey but they add their own flavor. Granular mink fruit works too, or chocolate stevia drops. 

      Nutrition

      Calories: 384kcalCarbohydrates: 60gProtein: 34gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 6gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gCholesterol: 50mgSodium: 459mgPotassium: 882mgFiber: 14gSugar: 17gVitamin A: 148IUVitamin C: 11mgCalcium: 577mgIron: 5mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Please Note:  Some links are affiliate links which means I may earn a small commission if you buy the item at no extra cost to you. These small sales are how I keep the site up and running. Thanks for your support!

      Baja Shrimp Tacos (Grill or Stovetop)

      05/03/2015 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

      spicy grilled shrimp tacos

      Baja shrimp tacos are all about bold, fresh flavor and quick cooking. You can make these shrimp tacos on the grill, stovetop, or even under the broiler. A grill basket makes grilling easier, but a skillet works great. The shrimp get a quick lime and spice marinade, then cook in just minutes before being tucked into warm corn tortillas with crunchy cabbage, tomatoes, and a squeeze of lime. Add a creamy avocado-lime sauce for a cool, rich contrast to the warm, spiced shrimp.

      Grilled shrimp tacos piled on white paper on a wood table, with avocado sauce and veggies.

      Living in Southern California, Baja shrimp tacos are everywhere-on taco stand menus and in beach cafés. They're a great change of pace from chicken or beef tacos, and the toppings are endlessly flexible. Warm tortillas, crisp cabbage, and bright lime deliver that perfect SoCal mix of texture and flavor-casual beach-food vibes, no sand in your shoes required.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love Baja Shrimp Tacos

      • Fast and weeknight-friendly - shrimp cook in minutes.
      • Grill, stovetop, or broiler - make them any time of year.
      • Budget-friendly - smaller shrimp work great and cost less.
      • Bold flavor, simple prep - quick lime + spice marinade.
      • Make it your way - use the homemade taco seasoning or your favorite blend.

      For another shrimp recipe, try this Thai-inspired shrimp soup called Tom Yum.

      Chef's note: What are Baja Tacos? Baja tacos originated along Mexico's Baja California peninsula and became a staple in Southern California cuisine. Traditionally made with grilled or battered fish or shrimp, they're known for their bright, fresh flavors and simple toppings-like shredded cabbage, creamy sauce, salsa, and plenty of lime. Served in warm corn tortillas and strike the perfect balance of crunchy, creamy, smoky, and citrusy. Think casual beach food with bold flavor and zero fuss.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      • Shrimp - Use wild raw shrimp, peeled and deveined with tails removed. The 26-30 size is great for tacos.
      • Tortillas - Corn tortillas are traditional for Baja-style tacos. For grain-free, try cassava tortillas, or use almond flour or chickpea tortillas if you like those.
      • Oil - A little extra virgin olive oil helps the seasoning coat the shrimp and keeps them juicy.
      • Limes - Fresh lime is key here-use it in the marinade and squeeze more over the tacos right before serving.
      • Tomatoes - Any ripe tomato works. Dice and seed them so the tacos don't get watery.
      • Cabbage - Baja tacos are all about crunchy, cool cabbage. Use green, red, or a mix for color. A shredded cabbage blend saves time, or slice your own very thin.
      • Fresh herbs - Cilantro is classic. If it tastes soapy to you, use Italian parsley, serve it on the side, or skip it.
      • Chiles - Jalapeños add a fresh, mild heat. Use serranos or hotter chiles if you like more kick.
      • Taco seasoning - Make my quick homemade taco seasoning (below) or use your favorite store-bought taco seasoning.

      For all measurements please see the recipe card.

      For a shrimp salad idea with store-bought cooked small shrimp make a California Shrimp Louis Salad.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Creamy avocado-lime sauce (optional) - A cool, creamy base that balances the warm, spiced shrimp.
      • No avocado? - Use sour cream or Greek yogurt with lime and a pinch of cumin.
      • Make it a bowl - Skip tortillas and serve the shrimp over cabbage with tomatoes, avocado, and lime.
      • Add extra veggies - Grilled onions and peppers are great if you're already using the grill.
      • Cheese (optional) - A sprinkle of Monterey Jack or cotija works well, but keep it light.

      Chef's Tip: Homemade Taco Seasoning (Skip the Packet)
      You can use store-bought taco seasoning for Baja shrimp tacos, but I prefer a quick homemade blend-it's fresher, easy to adjust, and lets you control the salt and heat, made without preservatives, thickeners, and flavor enhancers. I use cumin, coriander, ancho chili powder, Mexican oregano, granulated garlic, salt, pepper, and a tiny pinch of chipotle powder for optional heat. It works beautifully on the shrimp.

      How to Make Baja Shrimp Tacos

      Cook the shrimp using your preferred method-they're done fast, so watch closely.

      • Skillet: Sauté in a large cast iron skillet over medium-high heat until cooked through.
      • Grill: Heat grill and use a hot grill basket. Cook 3-4 minutes, shaking or stirring occasionally, until pink and opaque.
      • Broiler: Spread shrimp on a foil-lined rimmed baking sheet and broil until pink and opaque, flipping once after about 2 minutes.
      A bowl of raw shrimp marinating before grilling on a wooden cutting board.

      Serving Suggestions

      Serve Baja shrimp tacos with warm corn tortillas, crunchy cabbage, diced tomatoes, quick pickled red onions, and plenty of lime wedges. Add cilantro for a classic finish (or offer Italian parsley on the side as an easy swap).

      Grilled shrimp in a grilling basket waiting to make tacos.

      Chef's Tip: Make It a Build-Your-Own Taco Night
      Set out the shrimp, tortillas, and toppings in bowls and let everyone build their own tacos at the table. A tortilla warmer keeps tortillas hot and makes serving easier. For dinner, round out the meal with a simple green salad, rice, and pinto or black beans.

      Spicy grilled shrimp tacos on a plate.

      Recipe FAQs

      Should I use corn or flour tortillas for Baja shrimp tacos?

      Corn tortillas are traditional choice for Baja-style tacos. Find a good store bought brand (there re many) or try making your own. If you are grain-free, try cassava tortillas, almond flour tortillas, or chickpea tortillas.

      Is this a quick and easy meal to prepare on busy weeknights?

      Grilled shrimp tacos are an easy weeknight dinner solution made in about 30 minutes. Marinate the shrimp for 20 minutes, then grill or broil for a few minutes on both sides until done (when they turn pink). While shrimp is marinating, get your cabbage and other garnishes ready and heat your tortillas. For a shortcut use shredded packaged cabbage and cheese.

      Is it better to grill or pan-fry the shrimp for Baja shrimp tacos?

      Shrimp tacos can be made by a variety of cooking methods. Use a gas grill with a grill basked or place the shrimp onto soaked bamboo skewers. Try a grill pan on the stove top, pan-fry them in a cast iron skillet, or broil them under a hot broiler. Cook them in an air fryer. All work well so you can enjoy shrimp tacos any time of year.

      More Shrimp Recipes

      Hungry for more shrimp recipes? Try a few of these. Shrimp are so easy and versatile, and America's favorite seafood.

      • grilled shrimp and avocado bowls
        Grilled Shrimp Salad with Raspberry Vinaigrette
      • baked lemon shrimp scampi
        Easy Baked Shrimp Scampi
      • shrimp fra diavolo
        Spicy Shrimp and Pasta (Shrimp Fra Diavolo)
      • Jalapeno mint shrimp.
        Grilled Tequila Lime Shrimp

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make Baja shrimp tacos, please comment, and let me know, I enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      Baja Shrimp Tacos

      Sally Cameron
      Baja shrimp tacos are fast, fresh, and full of bold flavor-spiced shrimp, crunchy cabbage, and lime tucked into warm corn tortillas. Finish with creamy avocado-lime sauce for the perfect cool contrast.
      5 from 2 votes
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Cook Time 15 minutes mins
      Total Time 25 minutes mins
      Course Main Course
      Cuisine Mexican
      Servings 4 servings
      Calories 406 kcal

      Equipment

      • Grill basket or grilling skillet with holes

      Ingredients
        

      Quick taco seasoning (or use store bought)

      • 2 teaspoons ancho chili powder
      • 2 teaspoons ground cumin
      • 2 teaspoons smoked paprika or regular
      • 2 teaspoons granulated garlic
      • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
      • ½ teaspoon dried Mexican oregano
      • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
      • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
      • 1/16 teaspoon chipotle powder skip for no heat or more for higher heat

      Shrimp Tacos

      • 1 ¼ pounds raw shrimp (26-30 count per pound), peeled and deveined, tails removed 21-25 count also works for a meatier bite
      • 1 tablespoon olive oil
      • 1 lime juiced
      • 8 corn tortillas

      Creamy Avocado-Lime Sauce (optional but recommended)

      • 1 large avocado peeled and seeded
      • 2-3 tablespoons mayo or Greek yogurt
      • 1 teaspoon cumin
      • 1 lime juiced
      • pinch sea salt

      Instructions
       

      Make the taco spice mix

      • Add the seasoning ingredients to a small jar with a tight lid and shake to combine. Label and date it. For best flavor, use within about 6 months.

      Avocado sauce (optional)

      • Add the avocado, mayo, cumin, lime, and sat to a food processor and puree smooth. Without a food processor, mashed everything together well in a small bowl until smooth. A mortar and pestle also works.

      Marinate the shrimp

      • Add shrimp to a bowl and toss with olive oil and lime juice. Sprinkle in 1½ tablespoons of the taco seasoning and toss until evenly coated. Marinate at room temperature for 20-30 minutes.

      Prep toppings

      • While shrimp marinate, prep any toppings (cabbage, tomatoes, herbs, etc.) and warm your tortillas just before serving.

      Cook shrimp

      • Shrimp cook fast-watch closely.
        Grill: Preheat grill on high. Add shrimp to a grill basket and cook 3–4 minutes, shaking/stirring occasionally, until pink and opaque.
        Broiler: Spread shrimp on a foil-lined rimmed baking sheet and broil until pink and opaque, flipping once after about 2 minutes.
        Skillet: Cook in a hot cast iron or nonstick skillet over medium-high heat until cooked through.

      Assemble tacos

      • Warm tortillas in a skillet, on a griddle, or in the microwave. Spread a spoonful of avocado-lime sauce on each tortilla (if using), then add shrimp and toppings. Serve with lime wedges; add sliced jalapeños if you like heat.

      Notes

      Taco topping options:
      • chopped tomatoes.
      • thinly sliced red or green cabbage.
      • chopped cilantro (or parsley).
      • sliced jalapeno peppers.
      • quick red pickled onions, make them in about 30 minutes. 

      Nutrition

      Serving: 2tacosCalories: 406kcalCarbohydrates: 46gProtein: 36gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 228mgSodium: 390mgPotassium: 1235mgFiber: 13gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 2123IUVitamin C: 83mgCalcium: 233mgIron: 4mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Peanut Butter Oatmeal Protein Balls (no-bake)

      03/21/2024 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

      A silver tray of peanut butter protein balls tolled in coconut, ready to eat.

      Bite-sized bombs of protein, healthy fats, flavor, and fiber, these no-bake peanut butter oatmeal protein balls are a guilt-free snack when you need just a little something to curb your hunger. If peanut butter is a problem ingredient, see the variations to make it customizable for your family. Beware they are deliciously addictive!

      No-bake oatmeal protein balls rolled in coconut on a silver tray and a gray cake stand.

      When a friend asked me for food ideas for the grand opening of her fitness studio, it was the perfect opportunity to test my no bake peanut butter protein balls recipe. They were a hit! Peanut butter oatmeal protein balls are easy and fun to make. They are sometimes called bliss balls or little protein bites.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll like These Protein Balls

      What makes this the best protein ball recipe? I worked hard on balancing the nutrition and carefully selecting ingredients for the perfect mix, so they are not just glorified candy or a cookie but a healthy snack.

      • Perfect for a quick snack (and easily made vegan).
      • Protein balls hold well in the refrigerator or freezer.
      • No-bake recipe!
      • Make them into bite-sized balls or use these mini silicone molds.

      Here's another terrific no-bake chocolate recipe for chocolate bites with cranberries and walnuts. They are like chocolate bark in a mini muffin cup. Easy and fun to make!

      Recipe Ingredients

      Old fashioned oats (regular or GF) are the base for these peanut butter oatmeal protein balls along with good old fashioned creamy peanut butter.

      Ingredients for peanut butter protein balls in bowls on the counter.
      • Coconut milk: I use light canned coconut milk, but you can use full fat.
      • Nut or seed butter: Use natural peanut butter (creamy style), cashew butter, or almond butter. Use tahini if you have nut allergies (sesame seed butter), or try sunflower seed butter.
      • Sweeteners: Use real maple syrup, honey, or monk fruit maple syrup (how I make them).
      • Extract: Use a high quality vanilla extract or try vanilla paste. Almond extract works too.
      • Protein powder: From whey protein powder to egg white protein, or plant-based protein blends, there are lots of options. I prefer unflavored and unsweetened to control myself but a vanilla protein powder works well too.
      • Rolled oats: Either gluten-free rolled oats, regular rolled oats, or quick oats. You use raw oats, not cooked.
      • Chocolate chips: Use your favorite brand but see my dark chocolate chips tips below, or you can use your brand.
      • Seeds: Raw hemp seeds or hemp hearts and ground flaxseed add healthy fat, protein, and fiber.
      • Coconut: Unsweetened shredded coconut. Use some in the dough then roll the finished balls in extra coconut.
      • Dark cocoa powder: Optional to roll in instead of the coconut for a chocolate truffle protein ball.
      • Spices: Add cinnamon if you like (optional).

      Please see the recipe card for measurements.

      As long as you have the rolled oats out, make a few oatmeal chia seed puddings for breakfast. No bake and easy to make.

      Chef's tip on protein powder: With the overwhelming amount of protein powders on the market it can be hard to choose. Read this article for How to Choose a Protein Powder. And if you have any questions about a specific type of protein powder, comment and I'm happy to help.

      Substitutions and Variations

      Make protein balls many ways to fit your taste and dietary needs. Here are just a few ideas:

      • Maca powder adds a kind of butterscotch flavor and is an adaptogenic herb good for energy.
      • Choose either granular monk fruit or a monk fruit honey or maple syrup to reduce sugar and carbs (always a good idea).
      • Swap chocolate chips for white chocolate chips, or cacao chips.
      • Use chocolate protein powder for chocolate peanut butter protein balls.
      • Add dried fruit like cranberries or raisins, but chop them first.
      • For a coconut allergy, omit and use extra hemp seeds and add chia seeds. I have not made them this way so it's hard to tell you how much of each. Start with a tablespoon until you get a stiff dough.
      • Use almond milk, cream or half and half instead of coconut milk.

      For another no-bake snack, try these no-bake chocolate oatbars.

      Chef's tip on chocolate chips: While you can use standard Tollhouse chips, there are healthier and allergy-friendly options on the market. Check these chocolate chips out: 1) Hu no added sugar chocolate chips, 2) Lily's Dark Chocolate Baking Chips (with erythrirtol and stevia), and the brand 3) Enjoy life semi sweet mini chocolate chips, free of gluten and 14 common allergens, and 4) Pascha Organic Unsweetened Dark Chocolate Baking Chips (also allergen-friendly).

      Recipe Instructions

      No food processor or standing mixer required. Make the simple dough by hand in a bowl. These are small balls, just bite-sized to pop into your mouth.

      Ingredients for peanut butter protein ball dough in a glass bowl ready for mixing.
      1. In a medium bowl, whisk together the milk, maple, peanut butter, and vanilla, then blend in the dry.
      Dough for protein balls in a glass mixing bowl with chocolate chips and rolled oats.
      1. Mix the dough well, it will be stiff. Freeze for 30 minutes.
      Protein balls dough rolled into balls and ready for finishing on a parchment covered tray.
      Step 3: Roll into 1 tablespoon portions into balls with a cookie scoop or a 1 tablespoon measure.
      Peanut butter protein balls rolled in coconut on a sheet tray.

      Step 4: Roll finished balls in extra coconut or cocoa powder to finish (optional).

      Tips for Perfect Protein Balls

      • For perfectly round and portioned protein balls, I use a handy gadget called a cookie scoop (aka a disher). Pack the dough into the scooper, pump the handle to pop the dough out of the scoop, then roll in the palm of your hands. These things are great! Here's a chart of the sizes. For a different brand, they are a usually a "small" size and 1 tablespoon.
      • Wear disposable kitchen food handler gloves to roll the dough. You can roll the final coconut layer without gloves.
      • The dough is a little sticky so use a rubber spatula to mix (versus a wooden spoon).
      • Another option is to use a Souper Cubes freezer mold tray with the small squares which hold an ounce or 2 tablespoons. Or use their cookie dough tray which is a little smaller in volume, about 1.6 Tbsp, or ¾ of an ounce. These work great! See photo below.

      What else can you use a cookie scoop for? Baked turkey meatballs are a snap with a larger size, #40 or #50. Handy little tools! You'll be glad to have them.

      Souper Cubes tray filled with peanut butter protein ball dough.

      Nut Butter and Seed Butter Comparison Chart

      If you want to use a different nut butter or seed butters, this chart should help.

      Nut and seed butter comparison chart with calories, fat, protein, carbs and fiber.

      Serving Suggestions

      Peanut butter oatmeal protein balls make a terrific afternoon snack whenever you need a little something healthy when your stomach growls. Tuck a few into school lunches or a backpack.

      Protein balls are a healthier alternative than junk food or processed snacks. Just sweet enough to take the edge off your sweet tooth and your hunger. Peanut butter protein balls are good at room temperature, chilled, or even frozen.

      How long do they last? A week in the refrigerator and several months in the freezer, but they never last that long because they are so good!

      Finished no-bake energy balls rolled in shredded coconut on a silver tray.

      More Great Snack Recipes

      Good healthy snacks are easy to create with a few good tried and true recipes. Please see the appetizer and snack recipe archive for more ideas.

      • A white bowl of roasted red pepper hummus to serve as an appetizer.
        Roasted Red Bell Pepper Hummus Recipe
      • Close up of creamy basil and avocado dip in white bowl.
        Avocado Dip with Yogurt and Fresh Basil
      • Creamy salmon dip on an appetizer tray with crackers and cucumber chips.
        The Best Smoked Salmon Dip Recipe
      • deviled eggs 2022
        Best Deviled Eggs Recipe (Step by Step)

      ⭐️Did you Make This?

      If you make these peanut butter oatmeal protein balls, please comment and let me know. I enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

      Originally published 2/25/2018, updated and republished 3/21/2024.

      📖 Recipe

      no-bake coconut protein energy balls

      No-Bake Peanut Butter Oatmeal Protein Balls

      Sally Cameron
      Delightful bite-sized bombs of healthy fat, protein and fiber, these balls make a great snack with no baking required. A cool tool called a disher makes them a snap to make, but you can use a tablespoon too. See link in post for the disher. This recipe doubles easily.
      5 from 2 votes
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Cook Time 0 minutes mins
      Freezing time 30 minutes (optional) 10 minutes mins
      Total Time 20 minutes mins
      Course Snack
      Cuisine American
      Servings 8 24 balls or 14 squares
      Calories 218 kcal

      Equipment

      • A cookie scoop/disher #70 sure makes them easier and perfectly portioned (optional).

      Ingredients
        

      • ⅓ cup canned lite coconut milk or full fat
      • 2 tablespoons creamy peanut butter cashew butter, almond butter, or tahini
      • 1 ½ tablespoons maple syrup or zero sugar monk fruit maple syrup
      • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract or ¾ teaspoon paste
      • 1 ½ scoops protein powder, unsweetened 30 grams protein
      • ¾ cup rolled oats gluten-free if needed
      • ⅓ cup chocolate chips I use no sugar added
      • ¼ cup finely shredded unsweetened coconut
      • 3 tablespoons raw hemp seeds aka hemp hearts
      • 3 tablespoons ground flax seed

      Optional ingredients to roll the balls in

      • ¼ cup finely shredded unsweetened coconut
      • ¼ cup dark cocoa powder for a truffle appearance

      Instructions
       

      • Combine coconut milk, nut butter, vanilla, and maple syrup in a medium bowl and stir until smooth. Blend in protein powder and stir together, then add the rest of the ingredients, oats, chocolate chips, hemp seeds, coconut, flax seed. Use a flexible silicone spatula as the mix gets sticky.
        Freeze the dough for 30 minutes to make it easier to handle.
      • Using a tablespoon or #70 disher (see notes below) or tablespoon, portion out 24 balls on a small baking tray lined with parchment or plastic. To finish, dampen hands with a little water and roll into round balls. You can use disposable food handler gloves.
        Lastly rolls balls in extra shredded coconut or dark cocoa powder. Store the balls in the refrigerator or freeze.

      Notes

      Tool tip
      Yield will depend on the size of the cookie scoop (ez-disher) you use. The one I use for this recipe has a diameter of 5/16".
      They are handy tools I can't live without. They look like an ice cream scoop, available online at this link. I have five sizes! A cookie scoop/disher is the fastest and easiest way to portion these no bake protein energy balls. I use a larger size for making meatballs.
      If you have the Souper Cube 2 tablespoon freezer molds, they hold an ounce of dough. The recipe yield is 14 squares/14 servings. Nutrition is then per square: 10 gr carbs, 5 gr protein, 7 gr fat, and 124 kcals per square. 
      Protein powder
      The protein powder I used in this recipe provides 20 grams of protein in 1 scoop. For help in choosing protein powder, read my post on How to Choose a Protein Powder, and if you have questions please comment and I will answer.
      Variations
      • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
      • 2 teaspoons maca powder (for energy)
      • Please see the post for lots of substitution and variation ideas. 
      Nutritional note
      I make mine with the monk fruit maple syrup reducing the sugar by about 18 grams from the overall recipe, and tastes the same. I also use no-sugar-added chocolate chips. 

      Nutrition

      Serving: 3ballsCalories: 218kcalCarbohydrates: 17gProtein: 10gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gCholesterol: 9mgSodium: 36mgPotassium: 151mgFiber: 3gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 44IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 50mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Cheesy Scalloped Potatoes

      09/26/2012 by Sally Cameron 15 Comments

      scalloped potatoes gratin

      Cheesy scalloped potatoes are a classic, crowd-pleasing side dish and pure heaven for any potato lover. Thinly sliced potatoes are layered with Gruyère and Parmesan and baked until the top is bubbly, golden, and irresistibly cheesy. Often called potatoes au gratin, this rich, creamy casserole is an elegant side for Easter, Christmas, and any special occasion dinner.

      A slice of scalloped potatoes on a serving spatula with perfect layers of golden potatoes.

      This cheesy scalloped potatoes recipe is all about real ingredients and reliable results: fresh potatoes, good cheese, milk or half-and-half, and a few fragrant herbs. I slice the potatoes ⅛-inch thick and gently simmer them in the dairy until just tender before baking, which makes them foolproof-no crunchy centers, just perfectly creamy, melt-in-your-mouth potatoes every time.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love Cheesy Scalloped Potatoes

      • Simple ingredients - No canned soup or boxed mix, just fresh potatoes, good cheese, dairy, and a few herbs.
      • Ultra-cheesy flavor - Bake with Gruyère and Parmesan until golden.
      • Foolproof method - ⅛-inch potato slices simmered in dairy before baking give you perfectly tender potatoes with no crunchy centers.
      • Perfect for special dinners - Great for Easter, Christmas, & holidays.
      • Make-ahead friendly - Assemble and bake ahead, then reheat before serving.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      • Potatoes - Gold potatoes are perfect for cheesy scalloped potatoes-they're moist, creamy, and hold their shape when sliced and baked.
      • Dairy - Whole milk works well; half-and-half is richer for holidays and special occasions. You can also add a little heavy cream for an extra-indulgent, French dauphinoise-style version.
      • Cheeses - Use cave-aged or regular Gruyère for nutty flavor and good Parmesan for its salty, umami kick.
      • Herbs -Fresh thyme leaves add an earthy, aromatic note.
      • Spice - A pinch of nutmeg or mace subtly elevates the flavor (optional).

      Please see the recipe card for measurement, salt, and black pepper.

      For another terrific potato dish try my French Potato Salad, served chilled or warm.

      Chef's tip on buying potatoes:
      Potatoes labeled as "yellow" and "gold" both belong to the broad category of yellow-fleshed potato, and they work the best in scalloped potatoes providing a creamy texture that still holds its shape. Buy large potatoes instead of small ones-they're easier to peel and slice on a mandoline. Skip bagged potatoes when you can and pick them individually, looking for smooth skins with no sprouts, soft spots, or green patches.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Cheese options - If you can't find Gruyère, use another mild, good-melting cheese such as regular Gruyère, Comté, Fontina, or Cheddar cheese.
      • Herb options - Dried thyme can stand in for fresh; use about ⅓-1/2 the amount. You can also use fresh marjoram or a little fresh rosemary (it's much stronger), or dried Italian seasoning.

      If you love potatoes, another great recipe that simple is this Baby Dutch Yellow Potato recipe with herbs.

      Chef's Tip - Why I Simmer the Potatoes First
      Most scalloped potatoes recipes layer raw potato slices with cream and cheese, then bake until tender. It works-but it can take a long time, and it's easy to end up with underdone slices in the center. I prefer to slice the potatoes ⅛-inch thick and gently simmer them in the milk or half-and-half first, just until they're tender. Then I layer and bake. It's faster, more reliable, and gives you perfectly tender cheesy scalloped potatoes every time. I've made these so many times, they're practically fool-proof.

      How to Make Cheesy Scalloped Potatoes

      Thin slices of gold potatoes sliced with a mandoline in hands and on cutting board.
      1. Peel potatoes and slice ⅛" thick with a mandoline or food processor with slicing blade.
      Simmering potato slices in milk and herbs for scalloped potatoes.
      1. Simmer potatoes in milk with herbs just until tender when pierced.
      Layering cooked potatoes slices with cheese into a square baking dish for potatoes au gratin.
      1. Begin layering potato slices into a buttered 9x9 or two quart casserole dish alternating with the grated Gruyere and Parmesan cheeses.
      An almost finished dish of scalloped potatoes with bowl of grated cheese on side.
      1. Finish layering and end with the rest of the cheese and parmesan. Bake scalloped potatoes until golden brown on top and the potatoes are set and a bit firm. They will set more upon cooling for a few minutes which makes slicing easier.

      Chef's tool tip: If you don't have a food processor, a classic tool called a mandoline is a terrific kitchen tool for slicing at an economical price. Slice potatoes, apples, pears, beets, carrots and other fruits and vegetables uniformly thin when needed.

      Make-Ahead & Re-Heat

      Assemble and bake the scalloped potatoes until the potatoes are just tender and the top is lightly golden, then cool, cover, and refrigerate for up to 1 day.

      Before serving, let the dish sit at room temperature while the oven heats (up to an hour), then reheat covered at 350°F until hot. Uncover for the last few minutes to re-crisp and brown the top.

      Serving Suggestions

      Au gratin potatoes are terrific with main dishes such as grilled or roast meats such as roast beef tenderloin, roast chicken, pork roast, Thanksgiving roast turkey, or an Easter ham.

      Keep your green vegetable side dish simple as scalloped potatoes are rich and filling. Simple green beans are a great option. And be sure to serve a big side salad.

      A slice of cheesy scalloped potatoes on a brown plate with thyme sprigs.

      Storage

      To reheat, warm portions in the microwave until hot, or cover the dish with foil and bake in a preheated 350°F oven until heated through. Timing will depend on how cold they are from the refrigerator, but they should reach 165°F internally when checked with a digital thermometer.

      Leftover cheesy scalloped potatoes keep in the refrigerator in an airtight container for up to 4 days.

      Recipe FAQs

      Can I make cheesy scalloped potatoes ahead of time?

      Yes, au gratin potatoes are a great make ahead dish. Make them the day ahead, cool completely, and wrap well to refrigerate. Remove the dish from the refrigerator an hour ahead to get the chill off then re-heat in a 350°F oven until 165°F measured internally.

      Can I add extra ingredients like garlic, onions, or bacon?

      For fun variations on au gratin potatoes, add roasted garlic, crisp crumbled bacon, or thinly sliced onions and garlic sautéed before layering.

      Can I use different types of potatoes?

      Gold or yellow potatoes are the best option for au gratin potatoes. They are the perfect cross between waxy and starchy potatoes and hold up well to slicing and baking while holding their shape. Russets are too starchy and light. Save them for baked potatoes and mashed potatoes.

      More Potato Recipes

      Who doesn't love potatoes? They are so versatile and an always welcome side dish. Try a few of my other potato recipes.

      • White bowl of golden browned air fryer red potatoes with rosemary.
        Air Fryer Red Potatoes (or oven roasted)
      • Baby dutch yellow potatoes wtih herbs and Parmesan cheese.
        Buttery Baby Dutch Yellow Potatoes
      • Whipped sweet potatoes ready for serving in a gray bowl.
        Simple Whipped Sweet Potatoes Recipe
      • Parmesan potato wedges
        Crispy Baked Parmesan Potatoes (Sliced & Oven-Roasted)

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this Cheesy Scalloped Potatoes recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      scalloped potatoes gratin

      Cheesy Scalloped Potatoes

      Sally Cameron
      A classic casserole dish, this recipe for scalloped potatoes is sure to please for special occasions or holidays. Choose aged gruyere cheese for its rich, nutty flavor. A small piece will satisfy. Use half and half versus whole milk for a richer dish. A sprinkle of grated Parmesan cheese is nice for the top before baking for extra crunch and flavor.
      5 from 2 votes
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 15 minutes mins
      Cook Time 1 hour hr
      Total Time 1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
      Course Side Dish
      Cuisine American
      Servings 8 (or 6 big servings)
      Calories 200 kcal

      Equipment

      • Food processor, mandoline or handheld slicer

      Ingredients
        

      • 2 ¼ pounds large gold or yellow potatoes
      • 2 cups whole milk or half and half
      • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh thyme leaves
      • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
      • ¼ teaspoon white pepper or black pepper
      • ⅛ teaspoon nutmeg or mace
      • 4-5 ounces aged gruyere cheese
      • 2-3 tablespoons grated Parmesan cheese

      Instructions
       

      Peel and Slice the Potatoes

      • Pre-heat the oven to 350 degrees. Peel the potatoes and slice on a mandolin or hand-held slicer adjusted to ⅛″ (3-4 cm) thickness.

      Simmer Potatoes

      • Place the potatoes and milk in a deep sauté pan and bring to a simmer over medium heat. Add the thyme, salt and pepper. Cover and turn heat to low. Watch carefully and don't let the milk boil over. It's messy to clean up and happens in the blink of an eye. Simmer over low for about 7 minutes or until potatoes are tender when pierced with the tip of a sharp paring knife. Remove potatoes from the heat and allow to cool a bit.

      Assemble the Casserole

      • Layer half of the potatoes in a lightly buttered or sprayed 9x9 square casserole or oval baking dish. Sprinkle with the nutmeg. Add ⅔ of the grated cheese. Layer on the rest of the potatoes and top with remaining ⅓ of the cheese and Parmesan.

      Bake the Potatoes

      • Bake casserole uncovered for 50-60 minutes, until the top is golden brown. Remove from the oven and allow to cool for a few minutes. Slice and serve.

      Notes

      Cheese options - If you can't find Gruyère, use another mild, good-melting cheese such as regular Gruyère, Comté, Fontina, or Cheddar cheese.
      Herb options - Dried thyme can stand in for fresh; use about ⅓–½ the amount. You can also use fresh marjoram or a little fresh rosemary (it’s much stronger), or dried Italian seasoning.
      Leftover scalloped potatoes keep in the refrigerator for 3-4 days well covered. Re-heat covered with foil at 350 degrees for about 30 minutes or until hot. To save time, you can make this dish a day ahead, then heat for your dinner. Heating time depends on how cold the casserole is out of the refrigerator. Allowing it to sit on the counter for an hour first helps get the chill off. 

      Nutrition

      Calories: 200kcalCarbohydrates: 26gProtein: 9gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gCholesterol: 24mgSodium: 590mgPotassium: 648mgFiber: 3gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 288IUVitamin C: 27mgCalcium: 249mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Baked Barbecue Chicken Thighs

      02/24/2026 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      Plate of burnished glossy barbecue chicken thighs with serving fork.

      If you're craving barbecue chicken flavor but don't want to fire up the grill (or don't even have a grill), these baked barbecue chicken thighs are the answer. A few weeks ago I wanted that same sticky, saucy BBQ chicken for dinner, but I wasn't in the mood to fuss with the grill, so I baked them in the oven instead. This easy method delivers juicy dark meat and a glossy BBQ glaze with minimal effort-perfect for busy weeknights or cold-weather days when grilling just isn't happening.

      An oval platter with crinkled parchment and 6 glossy BBQ chicken thighs with serving fork.

      Baked BBQ chicken thighs is one of those "too simple to be this good" dinners. The oven does the work: the thighs brown, the fat renders, then you brush on BBQ sauce near the end so it sets into a glossy glaze. They're great right off the pan and even better as leftovers for lunch the next day. If you have my homemade BBQ sauce on hand, this is the perfect place to use it.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Baked BBQ Chicken Thighs Highlights

      • No grill required - Great BBQ chicken flavor from the oven.
      • Dead simple recipe - Trim, pat dry, season, bake, glaze, done.
      • Juicy every time - Thighs are moist and forgiving, even at higher heat.
      • BBQ glaze - Sauce goes on near the end so it's glossy, not scorched.
      • Great leftovers - Reheats well and makes an easy lunch the next day.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Raw chicken thighs with bbq sauce, and seasonings on a cuonter.
      • Chicken thighs - Use bone-in, skin-on for the juiciest results and best browning.
      • Oil - Just a light coating helps the seasoning stick and encourages browning.
      • Seasoning - Use either your favorite BBQ dry, my homemade BBQ spice rub, or a simple mix of pantry spices (salt, black pepper, garlic powder, onion powder, smoked paprika).
      • BBQ sauce - This is the star. Use a thick sauce that clings well-my homemade BBQ sauce (naturally gluten-free) is easy and adds the best sweet-tangy, smoky flavor, but your favorite sauce works too. Just watch the sugar content as high sugar in sauce burns.

      Chef's tip: Why Make Homemade BBQ Sauce? Most store-bought barbecue sauces are loaded with added sugars (cane sugar, corn syrup, high fructose corn syrup) and extra preservatives and thickeners. If you want a cleaner option-and better flavor-make your own. My homemade BBQ sauce comes together in minutes, and you can control the sweetness, salt, and spice so it tastes exactly the way you like, without the stuff you don't need.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Boneless, skinless thighs - Boneless should work fine; they'll cook faster. Bake at the same temperature, start checking around 15 minutes, then glaze for the last few minutes until they reach 175°F-185°F for best texture.
      • Chicken drumsticks - Use the same method. They may need a little longer depending on size; glaze near the end.

      How to Make Oven Baked Barbecue Chicken Thighs

      This simple method gives you juicy oven baked BBQ chicken thighs with a glossy BBQ glaze. Start by pre-heating the oven to 425°F with the oven rack in the middle.

      Trimming raw chicken thighs in a cutting board.
      1. Trim extra fat and skin from chicken thighs.
      Six seasoned chicken thighs on a white cutting board.
      1. Rub with a little olive oil and season both sides well.
      Seasoned chicken thighs on a foil covered baking sheet ready for the oven.

      3. Arrange thighs on a baking sheet-foil covered for a quick broil at the end or parchment for not broiling.

      Partially baked chicken thighs on a baking sheet with bbq glaze.

      4. Bake at 425°F for 18-20 minutes, then glaze with BBQ sauce with a pastry brush. Bake another 5 minutes, then glaze one more time and finish, based upon temperature, another few minutes if needed. 175°F - 185°F

      Six glossy baked bbq chicken thighs on a baking sheet, ready to serve.

      5. For a bit of grilled char on the top, switch the oven to broil mode and broil 1-1 ½ minutes. Do not walk away from the broiler, they need a very short time and go quickly (optional).

      Serving Suggestions

      This baked BBQ chicken thighs recipe pairs well with just about any simple side. Here are a few favorites:

      • Potatoes - roasted potatoes, mashed potatoes, or whipped sweet potatoes for a great dinner side.
      • Grains - my quinoa corn salad is a great match year round, and simple brown rice (from the freezer for a shortcut) is perfect.
      • Veggie - roasted broccoli or simple vegetables (green beans, Brussels sprouts) keep it easy during the week.

      Recipe FAQs

      What temperature should chicken thighs be cooked to?

      Chicken thighs are safe at 165°F, but they're much better cooked a little higher. Aim for 175-185°F for juicy, tender dark meat.

      Can I use parchment paper?

      Yes-parchment works well if you're baking only. If you plan to broil at the end, use foil instead (parchment isn't broiler-safe).

      How do I keep the BBQ sauce from burning?

      Bake the thighs most of the way first, then add the BBQ sauce near the end. Lowering the oven temperature once glazed helps the sauce turn glossy without scorching. And be aware of the sugar content of your BBQ sauce. Many bottled brands are very high in sugar, so the chicken thighs might burn more easily.

      Can I use boneless, skinless thighs?

      Yes, they should work, but they'll cook faster. Start checking early and add the BBQ sauce only near the end so it doesn't burn.

      More BBQ Recipes and Smoker Favorites

      If you love bold BBQ flavor, here are more favorites to try-from easy dinners like my BQ-glazed meatloaf to smoked recipes when you're in the mood to fire up the pellet grill, or a gas grill with a smoker insert.

      • Whole smoked chicken legs in dry rub and bbq sauce on a white tray.
        Smoked Chicken Legs Recipe
      • Bbq glazed beef meatloaf on a platter with a serving fork, sprinkled with chopped parsley.
        1 Pound Meatloaf Recipe
      • Smoked baby back ribs being sliced on a sheet tray with BBQ sauce.
        3-2-1 Ribs (Smoked Baby Back Ribs Recipe)
      • BBQ glazed smoked pork tenderloin sliced on a gray platter for serving.
        Smoked Pork Tenderloin (pellet grill)

      If You Make This Recipe

      If you make these baked barbecue chicken thighs, please leave a comment and let me know how they came out. I love to hear from you and appreciate your comments, as do other readers. And please leave a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating. Thanks for your support!

      📖 Recipe

      Plate of burnished glossy barbecue chicken thighs with serving fork.

      Baked Barbecue Chicken Thighs

      Sally Cameron
      When you're craving BBQ but don't want to fire up the grill, these baked BBQ chicken thighs are just the thing. They're fast, easy, and scale up or down-make 2 or make 12. Leftovers are terrific for tacos, bowls, and quick lunches.
      No ratings yet
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Cook Time 35 minutes mins
      Total Time 45 minutes mins
      Course Dinner, Entree, main
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6
      Calories 228 kcal

      Equipment

      • Rimmed baking sheet
      • Pastry brush
      • Parchment or foil

      Ingredients
        

      • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
      • 1 ½ teaspoons granulated garlic powder
      • 1 ¼ teaspoons smoked paprika
      • ½ teaspoon black pepper
      • 3 pounds bone-in chicken thighs 6-8 ounce thighs
      • 1 tablespoon olive oil or avocado oil
      • ½ cup BBQ sauce preferably low sugar

      Instructions
       

      Set up

      • Line a rimmed baking sheet parchment paper, or if you plan to use the broiler option for extra color at the end, use aluminum foil. Pre-heat the oven to 425°F. Set the oven rack in the center. Mix the salt, garlic, paprika, and pepper together.

      Prep chicken

      • Trim extra skin and fat from the chicken. Pat dry with paper towels. Place on the baking sheet and rub both sides with the oil, then season both sides with the seasoning mix.

      Bake chicken

      • Bake the chicken for 18-20 minutes until some of the fat renders out. Depending on the size they will be almost done.

      Glaze and finish

      • Remove the tray from the oven, drop the oven temperature to 400°F. With a pastry brush, glaze the top of the thighs by dabbing on the BBQ sauce. Bake for 5 more minutes, then do the glaze step again. Thighs should be done between 175°F - 185°F.
        If you want a little char on the top of the chicken thighs, turn the broiler on and broil for 1-1 ½ minutes. Do not walk away from the broiler as they go quickly.

      Notes

      Nutrition note: Bone-in chicken thighs are tricky to calculate because trimming and how much fat renders out can vary a lot. The nutrition estimate above is based on about 4½ ounces of edible cooked chicken per thigh (meat only). If you trim excess skin and fat as shown and discard the rendered fat from the pan, the fat and calories will be lower; if you eat the skin, they'll be a little higher. I trim aggressively but keep a small amount of skin to hold the glaze.
       
       
       

      Nutrition

      Calories: 228kcalCarbohydrates: 11gProtein: 27gFat: 8gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.02gCholesterol: 129mgSodium: 949mgPotassium: 409mgFiber: 0.5gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 292IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 23mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Gluten-Free BBQ Sauce Recipe

      05/22/2024 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

      A glass jar of deep red homemade bbq sauce.

      Making your own gluten-free BBQ sauce is a fantastic way to spice up your grilling game without the worry of gluten. Whether you're slathering it on ribs, brushing it over grilled chicken, or using it as a dipping sauce for barbecued shrimp, this gluten free BBQ sauce is packed with classic smoky, tangy, and sweet savory flavor loved by many. No one will even know it's gluten-free! This barbecue sauce works for everyone.

      A jar of burnished red, thick homemade bbq  sauce with a pastry brush.

      I've tinkered, tested, and tasted my way through many batches to create my homemade gluten-free barbecue sauce recipe and now I'm sharing it. Make your own bbq sauce to avoid hidden gluten and customize the flavors to suit your taste and dietary preferences perfectly.

      Skip unhealthy ingredients common in many big brand store-bought barbecue sauces (sorry sweet baby ray). Read the package label and you'll find high fructose corn syrup, corn syrup, and preservatives.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love This BBQ Sauce

      • Takes just minutes to make.
      • Versatile for many grilling needs.
      • Everyday ingredients, easily customizable.
      • No gluten, no added salt, lower sugar, can be made vegan if preferred.
      • Gluten-free BBQ sauce is not just for people with celiac disease. Many people are gluten-sensitive.

      BBQ Sauce Ingredients

      Ingredients for homemade bbq sauce in small bowls on a tray.
      • Ketchup: Start with prepared tomato ketchup (preferably unsweetened) so you control the sweetness. Here is the ketchup brand I prefer. It is easier than starting with tomato paste. 
      • Sugar: Choose either dark brown sugar, light brown sugar, coconut sugar, or for a no-sugar gluten-free bbq sauce use golden brown monk fruit. 
      • Molasses: Gives barbecue sauce a deep, sweet, rich flavor and color.
      • Onion: I've used chopped sweet onion, shallot, and onion powder and onion powder is easiest and works great. 
      • Vinegar: Use apple cider vinegar (or white vinegar) for tang, and balsamic vinegar for it's rich sweet flavor. 
      • Spices: Cayenne pepper or chipotle pepper (which is smoky too) for heat and spice, ancho chili powder for that bbq flavor, smoked paprika, and granulated garlic or garlic powder for flavor.
      • Mustard: I recommend using dijon mustard for more flavor and kick instead of mustard powder. 
      • Worcestershire sauce: Lends a rich, savory, umami kind of flavor to many sauces and dishes. A must for bbq sauce.
      • Liquid smoke: A bottled liquid condiment providing natural smoke flavor. Optional but adds a nice smoky flavor. It's very concentrated, use just a little!

      Please see the recipe card for measurements.

      Chef's tip: Gluten-free worcestershire sauce. Is worcestershire sauce gluten-free? Some are, some are not. Top brand Lea and Perrins is certified GF (in US) as is the Wizard's (also vegan, no anchovy). Another is French's Classic Worcestershire. Call the company's customer service number for produce information if in doubt as many are not gluten-free, and  look for an allergen notification on their website. 

      Substitutions and Variations

      • For a honey BBQ sauce, either swap the brown sugar for honey or use some of both.
      • For a sweeter BBQ sauce without sugar, use monk fruit (brown or regular).
      • For spicy BBQ sauce, add your favorite hot sauce, more cayenne pepper or chipotle pepper, but add carefully!

      Chef's tip: Many BBQ sauces include soy sauce. If you like the salty flavor it adds, use only tamari soy sauce as it is wheat-free gluten-free soy sauce. I've left it out of this recipe as many people are soy-sensitive. If you're not soy-sensitive and like it, add a little. Start with a teaspoon or two and taste, remembering even the low-sodium brands have a lot of sodium.

      Recipe Instructions

      Why make homemade BBQ sauce? It's always fresh and there are no expired bottles taking up space in the fridge when you need to grab some. It takes about 5 minutes!

      Ingredients for gluten-free bbq sauce in a small steel pan cooking.
      Step 1: Combine all ingredients into a small (2 qt) saucepan.
      Whisking bbq sauce in a small stainless steel pan to thicken.
      Step 2: Whisk until smooth and cook over medium heat until bubbly and thickened, 4-5 minutes.
      Pouring finished barbecue sauce from pan into a glass measuring cup.
      Step 3: Pour hot barbecue sauce into a container for cooling. When cool, refrigerate in an airtight container for up to 2 weeks. Be sure to label and date.

      Ways to Use Gluten-free BBQ Sauce

      • As a dipping sauce for sweet potato fries or wedges.
      • Brush onto grilled shrimp after grilling.
      • Use instead of hoisin sauce for these grilled chicken kabobs.
      • Smear over a burger instead of ketchup.
      • A must for baby back ribs!
      • Terrific to glaze grilled, broiled, baked, or stovetop seared salmon.
      • Use almost anywhere you'd use ketchup for more flavor.

      Recipe FAQs

      What ingredients typically contain gluten in BBQ sauce?

      Gluten-containing ingredients to be wary of when making homemade BBQ sauce are worcestershire sauce (Lea and Perrins and Wizard's are gluten-free), soy sauce (made with wheat), or ingredients like barley malt, malt vinegar, or modified food starch which may contain gluten. Read labels carefully and if in doubt, call the company's customer service line and ask or research their website. 

      What are the best gluten-free substitutes for thickening BBQ sauce?

      If your BBQ sauce needs thickening, the best way is to thicken it by cooking it down a little bit over medium-low heat in a small pan. For a thickening ingredients, arrowroot starch works well as it is clear. To use arrowroot, mix a tablespoon into 1-2 tablespoons of cold water until smooth and add to the bubbling bbq sauce, stir until thickened. Cool and refrigerate.

      How do I store homemade gluten-free BBQ sauce?

      Store homemade GF BBQ sauce in the refrigerator in an airtight container, labeled and dated, for up to 2 weeks. If it smells "off" or looks funny, toss it and make more. It's easy to do. It also freezes, but as it takes little time to make, making fresh is a good way to go. 

      More Recipes!

      Try the dry rub as the seasoning for what you're grilling, like baby back ribs, chicken, shrimp, or more! And you'll need side dishes for that great grilled dinner!

      • Savory dry rub for grilling with spices and a little brown sugar.
        Homemade BBQ Spice Rub
      • Oven baby back ribs glazed with rich brown hoisin sauce.
        Baby Back Ribs Recipe (Oven Method)
      • White shallow bowl stilled with green cabbage coleslaw, carrots, and parsley with a light dressing.
        Simple Easy Coleslaw Recipe
      • Broccoli bacon salad
        Crunchy Broccoli Salad with Bacon

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this gluten-free bbq sauce recipe? Please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      A glass jar of deep red homemade bbq sauce.

      Gluten-Free BBQ Sauce

      Sally Cameron
      Whether you're slathering it on ribs, brushing it over grilled chicken, or using it as a dipping sauce for barbecued shrimp, this gluten free BBQ sauce is packed with classic smoky, tangy, and sweet savory flavor.
      5 from 3 votes
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 2 minutes mins
      Cook Time 3 minutes mins
      Total Time 5 minutes mins
      Course condiment
      Cuisine American
      Servings 8 Yield 1 ½ cups
      Calories 44 kcal

      Equipment

      • Small pan like a 2 quart

      Ingredients
        

      • 1 cup unsweetened ketchup
      • ¼ cup water
      • 2 tablespoons brown sugar or golden monk fruit
      • 1 tablespoons apple cider vinegar or white vinegar
      • 1 tablespoon molasses
      • 1 tablespoon balsamic vinegar
      • 2 teaspoons worcestershire sauce
      • 2 teaspoons dijon mustard
      • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika
      • 1 teaspoon ancho chili powder
      • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
      • ¼ teaspoon onion powder
      • ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper or chipotle pepper
      • ⅛ teaspoon liquid smoke optional

      Instructions
       

      • Add all ingredients to a small (2 quart) pan and whisk until smooth over medium heat until bubbly. Cook 3-4 minutes until smooth and thickened. Remove from the heat and cool completely. Turn heat down a bit if needed. Refrigerate, label and date for up to two weeks.

      Notes

      How to customize gluten-free bbq sauce:
      • For a sweeter bbq sauce, add more brown sugar, monk fruit, or use honey.
      • For a hotter, spicer bbq sauce, add your favorite hot sauce or more cayenne or chipotle powder. 
      • For tangier, add a little more apple cider vinegar.
      • This is thick bbq sauce. If you need it thinner, like more of a glaze, thin it down with a little water. 
      I use Primal Kitchen brand organic unsweetened ketchup for my recipes and that is what is reflected in the nutritional analysis per serving. 
       

      Nutrition

      Serving: 3tablespoonsCalories: 44kcalCarbohydrates: 7gProtein: 0.2gFat: 0.1gSaturated Fat: 0.01gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.04gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.04gSodium: 41mgPotassium: 71mgFiber: 0.2gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 102IUVitamin C: 0.3mgCalcium: 12mgIron: 0.3mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Cabbage and Chicken Soup

      01/27/2026 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

      Cabbage and chicken soup with vegetables, cannellini beans, and chicken in a white pot.

      If you're craving a soup that feels fresh but not heavy, this cabbage and chicken soup with white beans is it. It's brothy and light, but still satisfying with plenty of vegetables, white beans, and tender shredded chicken. It comes together quickly after a little chopping and is a great way to use leftover or rotisserie chicken. Cabbage is the quiet hero-it softens into silky chunks, adds body and fiber, and makes the soup feel hearty without weighing you down.

      A pot of colorful cabbage and chicken soup with tomatoes, carrots, beans, and herbs, with sliced bread.

      This cabbage and chicken soup with white beans is a bright, colorful, satisfying one-pot soup. Chunky cabbage, tender chicken, and cannellini beans simmer in a savory broth for a bowl that feels hearty but still light-and packs plenty of protein. Finish with fresh parsley and a squeeze of lemon at the table to wake up all the flavors. Definitely not your typical bland chicken cabbage soup.

      Cabbage and Chicken Soup Highlights

      • Easy, weeknight soup - about 15 minutes prep and 30 minutes cooking.
      • Not boring cabbage soup - colorful veggies and tender chicken in every bowl.
      • Great texture - chunky-cut carrot, celery, and cabbage added at the end for a crisp-tender bite.
      • Light but filling - brothy, veggie-forward, with beans for extra body and protein.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Ingredients for cabbage and chicken soup with broth, vegetables, herbs, oil, and tomatoes.
      • Cabbage - A small head of green cabbage, adds body without heaviness.
      • Chicken - Roast chicken breast or rotisserie chicken, shredded.
      • Broth - Chicken broth (homemade or good-quality store-bought).
      • Beans - Cannellini beans add gentle creaminess and make the soup more satisfying.
      • Onion - Builds a savory base and a little natural sweetness.
      • Carrot - Adds sweetness and color.
      • Celery - Adds classic soup flavor.
      • Garlic - Adds savory depth.
      • Oil - Olive oil or avocado oil for sautéing.
      • Bay leaf - Adds subtle background flavor as the soup simmers.
      • Thyme - Gives the soup a simple, savory backbone (fresh or dried both work).
      • Tomatoes - Diced canned tomatoes add color and a gentle sweetness that balances the cabbage.
      • Parsley - Stir in at the end for freshness.
      • Lemon wedges - Serve at the table to brighten each bowl without making the whole pot taste lemony.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

      If you love chicken soups, here is a reader favorite chicken vegetable soup with pasta

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Use other beans - Instead of cannellini beans, use Great Northern beans or navy beans.
      • Herbs - Add a little fresh chopped dill at the end, it goes nicely with the cabbage and lemon.

      Beans in soup are wonderful, here's another, creamy fennel and white bean soup.

      Chef's Tip: Homemade Broth Is Worth It
      This soup is simple, so the broth you start with really matters. Homemade broth has deeper flavor and a richer body than most store-bought options-and once you make a batch, it's easy to freeze. I freeze homemade broth in portioned containers so a great pot of soup is always within reach. If you have time, use my long-simmered chicken bone broth for the best flavor. Need it faster? My Instant Pot chicken broth is a great shortcut. This soup is also perfect with roasted turkey broth, and vegetable broth works well when that's what you have.

      How to Make Cabbage and Chicken Soup

      Chopped onion sautéing with oil in a white pot stovetop.
      1. Over medium to med-low heat, saute onion in oil until soft, 2-3 minutes. Add garlic and cook 30 seconds.
      Red carrots in a pot with onions and celery for making soup.
      1. Add the carrots and celery and cook another 5 minutes until softened.
      Chopped carrots, celery, onion, and cabbage in a pot.
      1. Add the tomatoes, half the cabbage, bay leaf and thyme, and cook for 5 minutes with a lid, med-low heat.
      Golden chicken broth pouring into a pot of vegetables for soup.
      1. Add the broth and simmer 5 minutes.
      Adding chicken and white  beans being added to a soup pot with broth and veggies.
      1. Add the chicken and beans to the pot.
      Adding cabbage to a pot of cabbage and chicken soup.
      1. Add the rest of the cabbage and cook a few minutes until softened. Adding part of it later adds more texture.
      Adding fresh green parsley as garnish to a pot of chicken , vegetables, and white beans soup.

      7. Finish off with fresh parsley, remove bay leaves, and serve.

      Cabbage and chicken soup with vegetables, cannellini beans, and chicken in a white pot.

      8. Finished cabbage and chicken soup.

      Serving Suggestions

      I typically serve cabbage and chicken soup with garlic toast as the crunchy salty Parmesan finish tastes great against the soup, but a salad is another good option, or even a grilled cheese sandwich for a fuller meal. For another side, try homemade cornbread smeared with soft butter.

      Storage & Freezing

      Cool completely, then refrigerate in an airtight container for up to 4 days. Freeze in airtight containers or freezer bags for up to 3 months (leave a little headspace). Thaw overnight in the refrigerator.

      To reheat, warm gently on the stovetop.

      Recipe FAQs

      Can I make this soup without beans?

      Yes. Skip the cannellini beans for a lighter soup, or replace them with extra chicken or more vegetables, or swap for rice or cooked small potatoes.

      How do I keep the cabbage from getting too soft?

      Add only part of the cabbage earlier for flavor, then stir in the rest at the end so it stays crisp-tender and chunky.

      Can I make it in a slow cooker or Instant Pot?

      You can, but it's so fast on the stove that it's usually not worth it. If you do, add the "last half" of cabbage at the end so it doesn't overcook.

      Can I use rotisserie chicken?

      Yes. Rotisserie or any leftover cooked chicken works great. Remove any skin and shred, then add it near the end just to heat through.

      What's the best cabbage to use?

      Green cabbage is best. It softens nicely but still has good texture, especially if you add part earlier in cooking, then some at the end.

      More Great Soups to Try

      From smooth and creamy soups to hearty, satisfying bowls, there's a soup here for every season and appetite. Explore the full soup recipe index to find your next favorite.

      • A bowl of Greek avgolemono chicken soup with fresh dill in a white bowl.
        Greek Avgolemono Soup (Lemon Chicken Soup)
      • Navy bean soup with ham and vegetables.
        Instant Pot Navy Bean Soup Recipe (with ham)
      • The deep colors of beef barley soup in a white bowl with herbs.
        Beef Barley Soup Recipe (Gluten-Free Option)
      • roasted red pepper soup
        Roasted Red Pepper Soup (sheet pan recipe)

      If You Make This Soup

      If you make this chicken cabbage soup, please let me know! I love to hear from you and your comments help other readers. Thanks for supporting my site!

      📖 Recipe

      Cabbage and chicken soup with vegetables, cannellini beans, and chicken in a white pot.

      Cabbage and Chicken Soup

      Sally Cameron
      A bright, hearty-but-light cabbage and chicken soup with cannellini beans, chunky vegetables, and a savory broth. Finish with parsley and a squeeze of lemon.
      No ratings yet
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 15 minutes mins
      Cook Time 30 minutes mins
      Total Time 45 minutes mins
      Course Soup
      Servings 4 2 cup servings, Yield 9 cups
      Calories 312 kcal

      Equipment

      • 4-5 ½ quart Dutch oven or large heavy soup pot

      Ingredients
        

      • 1 tablespoon olive oil
      • 1 cup chopped onion
      • 3 garlic cloves finely chopped
      • ¾ cup chopped carrot
      • ½ cup chopped celery
      • ¾ teaspoon dried thyme or 1 ½ teaspoons fresh chopped
      • 15 ounce can diced tomatoes drained
      • 2 bay leaves
      • 4 cups chopped green cabbage about 1 pound, half a head
      • 4-5 cups chicken broth
      • 15 ounce can cannellini beans drained and rinsed
      • 2 cups shredded cooked chicken 11 ounces
      • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh parsley
      • lemon wedges optional for serving

      Instructions
       

      • Heat the pot over medium heat, add the oil and saute the onion until soft, 2-3 minutes. add the garlic and cook another 30 seconds. Add the carrot and celery and cook another 5-7 minutes until all vegetables are softened.
      • Add the diced tomatoes, bay leaf, thyme, and half of the cabbage to the pot with the sautéed vegetables. Cover and cook for about 5 minutes to soften the cabbage and let the flavors start to mingle.
      • Pour in 4 cups of the broth, then simmer about 5 minutes more with the lid partially on. Add the beans and cooked chicken and heat through until hot. Stir in the remaining cabbage at the end so it stays a little crisp and fresh for texture. For a more brothy soup, add the last 1 cup of broth. Add the chopped parsley.
      • Serve with lemon wedges for brightness if desired.

      Notes

      Cabbage prep: Use about ¾ pound chopped green cabbage. Cut the cabbage in half, cut out the tough core, then slice into about 1-inch strips and chop crosswise into bite-size chunks. Don't stress exact size-chunkier pieces hold their texture best in this soup.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 312kcalCarbohydrates: 31gProtein: 30gFat: 10gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gCholesterol: 53mgSodium: 533mgPotassium: 748mgFiber: 8gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 4315IUVitamin C: 17mgCalcium: 146mgIron: 5mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Quick Pickled Red Onions

      02/10/2026 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

      A jar of bright pink pickled onions with a small bowl of them beside, and bay leaves.

      These quick pickled red onions are crisp, tangy, and ready fast. They're the easiest way to add color, crunch, and brightness to tacos, bowls, salads, sandwiches, and grilled meats. This is a simple refrigerator pickle-no canning required. Make a jar in minutes, let it chill while you cook dinner, and you'll have a punchy condiment ready in 30-60 minutes.

      Two jars of bright pink quick pickled red onions on a wire cooling rack.

      These quick pickled red onions lift dishes with their tangy flavor, crisp crunch, and beautiful bright pink color. Quick pickling mellows sharp raw onion into a balanced condiment with acidity, a touch of sweetness, and great texture. They keep well in the fridge, so you can make a jar once and reach for them all week.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love Quick Pickled Red Onions

      • Fast - Ready in about 30 minutes, even better after a few hours.
      • Easy - Simple pantry ingredients, no special equipment.
      • Versatile - Perfect on tacos, burgers, grain bowls, salads, avocado toast, and proteins.
      • Meal-prep friendly - Keeps well in the fridge for quick flavor all week.

      Quick pickled red onions are perfect on these Grilled Baja Shrimp Tacos.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Ingredients to make quick pickled red onions on the counter in prep bowls.
      • Red onion - The star; turns crisp-tender and beautifully pink as it pickles.
      • Vinegar - Provides tang and brightness; apple cider is slightly mellow, white wine vinegar is a bit sharper. Unseasoned rice vinegar is a gentler, slightly sweeter vinegar option that makes a milder pickle without water dilution.
      • Kosher salt - Seasons the onions and balances the acidity.
      • Sugar or monk fruit sweetener - Rounds out the brine and tames sharpness without making the onions sweet.
      • Black peppercorns - Adds subtle warmth and classic pickling flavor.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and peppercorns.

      Idea - Add pink pickled onions to this grilled shrimp bowl for color and flavor.

      Variations

      • Add seeds - Coriander seed or mustard seed adds depth; coriander is citrusy and aromatic, mustard is more pungent and "pickle-y."
      • Add herbs -  Thyme adds an herbal note that plays well with savory dishes. Bay leaf adds gentle savory aroma that adds background complexity.
      • Add some kick - A pinch of red pepper flakes.
      • Taco-style: Apple cider vinegar + coriander + peppercorns + pinch chili flakes.
      • Clean + classic: white wine vinegar + peppercorns + bay leaf.
      • Pink peppercorns - ½ teaspoons adds a slightly floral, fruity pepper note, and they look beautiful in the jar. Milder than black peppercorns. Don't use for people with cashew/pistachio allergies.

      Chef's Tip: Vinegar Acidity for Quick Pickled Onions

      Chef's Tip: Vinegar Acidity for Quick Pickled Onions
      For quick pickled onions, use a vinegar that's 5% acidity (most standard cooking vinegars are-check the label). This level of acidity gives the brine the right tangy balance and helps keep refrigerator pickles stable and fresh. Avoid very low-acid vinegars and sweetened or flavored vinegars, which can change both the flavor and the strength of the brine. Unseasoned rice vinegar is an exception. See the recipe card notes. It's what I used for this batch.

      How to Make Quick Pickled Red Onions

      Thinly sliced red onion to make picked red onions on a cutting board.
      1. Slice the onion in half through the root end, peel, lay halves flat and thinly slice (⅛").
      Jars being packed with thin sliced red onion halves.
      1. Pack clean jars full of sliced onions (these are not yet full).
      Small pot with a golden pickling brine being warmed.
      1. Heat the brine until hot and steaming but no boiling.
      Pouring pickling brine into jars full of thinly sliced red onion.
      1. Add peppercorns and any seeds or herbs to the jar. Pour the hot brine over the onions and allow to cool and quick pickle. Onions are ready in 30 minutes or even better longer. Cool completely and refrigerate tightly sealed.
      A jar of bright pink pickled onions with a small bowl of them beside, and bay leaves.

      Serving Suggestions

      Quick pickled red onions add a bright, tangy finish and beautiful color to just about anything. Try them:

      • Tacos & wraps - Spoon them over shrimp tacos, chicken tacos, or fish tacos for crunch and acidity.
      • Salads & salad bowls - Scatter them on greens with avocado, cucumbers, and any grilled protein. Add them to this Buffalo chicken salad, or a cold green bean salad.
      • Sandwiches - Add a layer to turkey, chicken, or veggie sandwiches for a punchy pop.
      • Grilled or roasted meats - Serve alongside pork, steak, chicken, or salmon to cut through richness.
      • Eggs & breakfast - A little pile on scrambled eggs, egg bowl, or egg tacos and wraps, and avocado toast.

      Storing Refrigerator Quick Pickled Onions

      Using 5% vinegar helps keep the brine acidic, which discourages unwanted microbial growth-then store the onions refrigerated in a clean, covered jar and use within 2-3 weeks for best quality, keeping the onions submerged in brine.

      Recipe FAQs

      How long do quick pickled red onions last?

      They keep well in the fridge for up to 2 weeks, and the flavor gets better after the first day.

      Why is vinegar used for pickled red onions?

      Vinegar provides the acidity that "pickles" the onions, giving them their tangy flavor while lightly softening their texture. It also helps preserve them in the refrigerator.

      Does the vinegar need to be 5% acidity?

      Yes-use a standard vinegar that's 5% acidity (most are, check the label). That acidity gives quick pickled onions the right tangy balance and helps keep the brine sufficiently acidic for refrigerator pickling. Avoid very low-acid vinegars and sweetened/flavored vinegars, which can change the flavor and the brine's strength. Look for "5% acidity" on the label. See recipe card for unseasoned rice vinegar exception, no water needed.

      Can I use only vinegar without water?

      You can, but using a mix of vinegar and water creates a more balanced brine that's tangy without being harsh. Rice vinegar is mild enough to use on its own if you prefer.

      More Homemade Condiment Recipes

      Homemade condiments are the easiest way to make everyday meals taste special. Here are a few more favorites to add brightness, heat, and flavor to all kinds of dishes. For more ides, check out the recipe index page for condiments.

      • A glass jar of deep red homemade bbq sauce.
        Gluten-Free BBQ Sauce Recipe
      • Deep purple blueberry compote in a glass jar with a silver spoon.
        Easy Blueberry Compote Recipe
      • Chunky harissa aioli sauce in a jar with a cream colored spoon.
        Easy Harissa Aioli With Garlic Recipe
      • A square jar filled with lemon curd dripping off a silver spoon.
        Easy Sugar Free Lemon Curd

      Did You Make Pickled Red Onions?

      If you do please leave me a comment and let me know how your pickled onions came out. I love hearing from you and other readers appreciate your comments too. And pleas leave a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐. Thanks for supporting my site.

      📖 Recipe

      A jar of bright pink pickled onions with a small bowl of them beside, and bay leaves.

      Quick Pickled Red Onions

      Sally Cameron
      These quick pickled red onions are crisp, tangy, and ready fast. They're the easiest way to add color, crunch, and brightness to tacos, bowls, salads, sandwiches, and grilled meats.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Brining 30 minutes mins
      Total Time 40 minutes mins
      Course condiment
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6
      Calories 28 kcal

      Equipment

      • Small pot, 2 quart to make the brine

      Ingredients
        

      Onion

      • 1-2 large red onions

      Brine

      • ½ cup white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar or 1 cup unseasoned rice vinegar
      • ½ cup water skip for the rice vinegar
      • 2 tablespoons sugar or granular monk fruit blend
      • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
      • ½ teaspoon whole black peppercorns
      • ½ teaspoon pink peppercorns in place of the black or use both

      Flavor options

      • ¼-1/2 teaspoon coriander seed or mustard seed
      • 1 small bay leaf
      • 1 sprig thyme

      Instructions
       

      Slice and pack onions

      • Slice the root end off the onion and cut the onion in half. Peel the onion, lay halves flat and thinly slice, about ⅛" thick. Pack the onions into a clean pint jar (or heat-safe container). Really pack them in to the top, as when you the add brine they shrink up a bit.

      Make the brine

      • In a small saucepan, combine vinegar, water, salt, and sugar (or monk fruit blend). Warm just until the salt and sweetener dissolve and the liquid is steaming (no need to boil).
        Note - If using rice vinegar, skip the water and use 1 cup vinegar, as it is milder.

      Pickle the onions

      • To the jar, add any herb and spice options, then pour the warm brine over the onions to cover. Press onions down so they're submerged. Wait 5-10 minutes, then use a clean fork to press them down gently. If you've got extra slices, top off the jar now. Then make sure everything is fully submerged.

      Cool and refrigerate

      • Cool to room temp (70°F), then cover tightly with lids and refrigerate. They're good in about 30 minutes, best after a few hours, and even better the next day.

      Notes

      Storage - Keep onions refrigerated and use within 2-3 weeks for best flavor/texture.
      Note: Quick pickled onions are refrigerated (not canned), so vinegar choice and dilution are mainly about flavor. Using straight unseasoned rice vinegar (no water) makes a brighter, more acidic brine with excellent color. It is what I used in the main photo.  Diluting stronger vinegars with water makes a milder pickling brine.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 28kcalCarbohydrates: 6gProtein: 0.3gFat: 0.1gSaturated Fat: 0.01gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.02gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.03gSodium: 585mgPotassium: 42mgFiber: 0.4gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 11IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 9mgIron: 0.2mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      1 Pound Meatloaf Recipe

      01/20/2026 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

      Bbq glazed beef meatloaf on a platter with a serving fork, sprinkled with chopped parsley.

      This 1 pound meatloaf recipe is lean, flavorful, and tender without feeling heavy. Lean ground beef keeps it from being greasy, and quick-cooking oats replace breadcrumbs for a moist, sturdy texture (use certified gluten-free quick oats if needed). A little finely chopped apple adds moisture (you won't taste it), and the top can be finished with tangy barbecue sauce or classic ketchup-whatever your family loves.

      A simple all-beef 1 pound meatloaf with bbq glaze on a plate with a serving fork.

      As a personal chef, this 1 pound meatloaf recipe was a regular request for weekly menus. It's built around the standard 1-pound package of ground beef, so it's easy to shop for and cooks faster than a bigger meatloaf. Quick-cooking oats replace breadcrumbs as the binder, giving you a meatloaf that's tender and evenly textured, never heavy (and gluten-free if needed).

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Gluten-Free Meatloaf Highlights

      • Classic comfort, updated - A fresh take on meatloaf with a tangy BBQ glaze.
      • Lean and flavorful - Made with 93/7 grass-fed beef for great flavor without excess grease.
      • Family-friendly and easy - Simple steps, everyday ingredients, dependable results.
      • Great for meal prep - Slices well and makes excellent leftovers.
      • Gluten-free - Made without breadcrumbs, using whole grain quick oats instead.

      This air fryer butternut squash is great with the meatloaf and compliments the tangy BBQ glaze, or easy roast broccoli.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Ground beef, onion, herbs, egg, oats, and ingredients for a 1 pound meatloaf ready for mixing.
      • Ground beef - I use 93/7 pasture-raised ground beef. It stays moist but isn't greasy. 90/10 is another good option.
      • Onion - Yellow, brown, or white onion adds moisture and savory flavor.
      • Apple - Yes, apple! It adds moisture and a little texture. Granny Smith is my first choice, but Honeycrisp or any crisp apple works.
      • Egg - Large eggs help bind the loaf so it slices cleanly.
      • Quick oats - The "secret" to a tender, evenly textured meatloaf. Quick oats absorb just enough moisture to hold everything together without feeling heavy. (See Chef's Tip on oat types.)
      • Garlic - Fresh garlic gives the best flavor.
      • Herbs - Go fresh or dried. Thyme and oregano for classic meatloaf flavor or a dried Italian seasoning blend works nicely.
      • Parsley - Fresh parsley adds a clean, garden-fresh lift.
      • Worcestershire sauce - A small amount adds savory depth and a little punch.
      • BBQ sauce - I use my homemade BBQ sauce (low sugar, gluten-free), but your favorite works-just read labels if you need it gluten-free.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

      Chef's Tip - Quick Oats vs. Instant Oats vs. Rolled Oats
      For the best meatloaf texture, use quick oats (they hydrate fast and disappear into the mix). Some brands label them as quick-cooking rolled oats-same thing. Instant oats also work in a pinch (same amount) they are a bit more processed. Old-fashioned rolled oats can leave more texture; if that's all you have, pulse them briefly in a food processor to refine them, and let the meatloaf mixture rest 20 minutes before baking to hydrate the oats. Avoid steel-cut oats (too hard/chewy).

      For another super side, try this corn souffle, made without box mixes.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Horseradish kick - Add a spoonful of prepared horseradish to the meatloaf mixture for a little heat and backbone without making it "spicy."
      • Turkey option - You can use ground turkey instead of beef, but choose a higher-fat turkey (93% or similar) and watch it closely so it doesn't dry out.
      • Breadcrumbs or panko instead of quick oats - You can use plain or gluten-free breadcrumbs or panko in place of the quick oats. Start with about the same amount you would use of oats, then add a spoonful more if the mixture feels too soft; it should hold together when you gently press it into a loaf.

      Chef's Tip - Free-Form Meatloaf vs. Loaf Pan Meatloaf
      I've baked meatloaf both ways many times. For this 1 pound meatloaf recipe, a free-form loaf works better because the smaller amount of mixture holds its shape and bakes nicely. You can bake it in a standard loaf pan, but it will be a thinner, flatter meatloaf. If you do, line the pan with a parchment sling so you can lift the meatloaf out easily.

      How to Make a 1 Pound Meatloaf

      Pre-heat the oven to 350°F. Line a sheet pan with parchment or foil.

      Sauteing chopped onion and garlic until soft in a pan on the stovetop.
      1. Saute onion until soft over medium low heat in olive oil, add garlic and cook 30 seconds.
      Finely chopped Granny Smth apple on a white cutting board.
      1. While onion is cooking, core, peel, thinly slices, and very finely chop the apple (you need ⅓ cup).
      Onion, egg, herbs, ketchup, wet ingredients for a meatloaf in a bowl.
      1. Add onion, herbs, egg, ketchup, worcestershire, seasonings, to a bowl.
      Wet ingredient blend of egg, ketchup, herbs, onion and apple in a glass bowl.
      1. Blend the wet ingredients well.
      Adding quick oats to the meatloaf mix as a binder.
      1. Add the quick oats and mix well.
      Chunks of pink ground beef, next step in making a meatloaf mixture.
      1. Tear the beef into chunks and add it to the bowl for easier mixing. Mix gently until well combine but don't overwork. Wear disposable gloves if desired.

      A free form 1 pound meatloaf on a parchment covered baking sheet.

      7. Form the beef mix into a long narrow smooth loaf on the baking sheet. Aim for a loaf about 1 ½" high at the center.

      Glazing a meatloaf before baking with BBQ sauce with pastry brush.

      8. Add a tablespoon of bbq sauce to a small bowl and glaze the meatloaf. Be sure to wash the brush and bowl right away for next use.

      A finished meatloaf baked with barbecue glaze, cooling to slice.

      9. Glaze the meatloaf at halfway point in baking, then again at the end of baking, 30-35 minutes, or until the meatloaf reads 165°F with a digital thermometer. Allow it to cool 10 minutes before slicing. Serve with extra bbq sauce if desired.

      Meatloaf Serving Suggestions

      • Mashed potatoes - Classic meatloaf partner. Serve with creamy mashed potatoes.
      • Green beans or other green veg - Simple blanched green beans tossed with oli e oil are perfect, or use roasted broccoli, asparagus, or Brussels sprouts for an easy green side (link where it fits).
      • Glazed carrots - Maple glazed carrots (link to your recipe) are a great contrast to the savory meatloaf and look pretty on the plate.
      • Simple salad - A crisp green salad with a light vinaigrette helps balance the richness and makes this feel like a complete, well-rounded dinner.

      Storing and Freezing

      Freezing - Meatloaf freezes well, but like most dishes it's best fresh. If you do want to freeze it, cool completely, then wrap individual slices (or the remaining piece) tightly in parchment and foil, or place in a freezer bag, and freeze for up to 2-3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator and reheat at 325-350°F until hot.

      Refrigerating leftovers - Let the meatloaf cool, then store slices or chunks in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

      Reheating - Reheat slices in a small baking dish, covered, at 325-350°F until warmed through, or gently reheat in the microwave, adding a spoonful of water or broth if they look dry.

      Recipe FAQs

      Can I make this meatloaf ahead of time?

      You can mix and shape the meatloaf, then cover and refrigerate it for several hours or up to overnight. When you're ready to bake, add the BBQ sauce or ketchup glaze and bake, adding a little extra time if the loaf is going into the oven very cold. Always check that the internal temperature reaches 160°F - 165°F.

      Can I use breadcrumbs or panko instead of oats?

      Yes. You can use plain or gluten-free breadcrumbs or panko instead of the quick oats. Start with about the same amount, then add a little more if the mixture feels too soft-the meatloaf should hold together when you gently shape it into a loaf. The texture will be slightly different than with oats (a bit more traditional and fine-crumbed). I like using quick oats because they're a whole grain and give the meatloaf a tender, sturdy texture.

      Can I use old-fashioned rolled oats instead of quick oats?

      Yes, if you refine them in a food processor first, to break them down into smaller pieces. Pulse in quick bursts so you don't make oat flour. They need some texture.

      Can I make this with ground turkey instead of beef?

      Yes. Use a higher-fat ground turkey (around 93% lean) so the meatloaf stays moist, and keep an eye on the baking time, as turkey can dry out if overcooked. The internal temperature for ground turkey should reach 165°F.

      More Recipes With Ground Meat

      Ground meat is endlessly versatile and perfect for simple, satisfying meals. Whether you have ground turkey, ground beef, or even ground bison, these recipes are full of flavor.

      • Taco meat in a cast iron pan with fixings for tacos around it.
        Ground Meat Taco Recipe (or ground turkey)
      • bison bolognese with pasta
        Bison Bolognese(Ground Bison Meat Sauce)
      • Colorful baked ground turkey stuffed peppers with quinoa and herbs.
        Ground Turkey Stuffed Peppers
      • Creamy casserole dish of beef stroganoff made with meatballs with herbs on top.
        How to Make Meatball Beef Stroganoff

      Did You Make This?

      If you make this 1 pound meatloaf recipe, please let me know by leaving a comment. I enjoy hearing from you and your comments help other readers as well. Thanks for supporting my site! ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐

      Originally posted in 2011, now updated.

      📖 Recipe

      Bbq glazed beef meatloaf on a platter with a serving fork, sprinkled with chopped parsley.

      1 Pound Meatloaf Recipe (with BBQ Glaze)

      Sally Cameron
      A fresh take on an American classic comfort food with lean ground beef. The classic side dishes are green beans and mashed potatoes. Leftovers are terrific the next day.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 20 minutes mins
      Cook Time 30 minutes mins
      Total Time 50 minutes mins
      Course Main Course
      Cuisine American
      Servings 4
      Calories 330 kcal

      Equipment

      • Rimmed sheet tray
      • Parchment paper
      • Pastry brush
      • Digital thermometer
      • Disposable kitchen food handling gloves

      Ingredients
        

      • 1 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil
      • ½ cup finely chopped onion
      • 2 large garlic cloves finely chopped or microplaned
      • 1 tablespoon olive oil for sauteing onions and garlic
      • ⅓ cup finely chopped granny smith apple peeled, cored, very finely chopped
      • ¼ cup ketchup
      • 1 large egg
      • 2 tablespoons chopped fresh parsley
      • 1 teaspoon dried Italian blend herbs or dried thyme and oregano
      • 1 teaspoon worcestershire sauce
      • ¾ teaspoon sea salt
      • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
      • ½ cup quick cooking oats GF if needed
      • 1 pound ground beef 93/7 grass fed or pastured beef

      Glaze

      • ½ cup low sugar barbecue sauce homemade or bottled, or ketchup

      Instructions
       

      Prep the pan and oven

      • Preheat oven to 350°F. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment (or foil) and lightly spray with nonstick spray.

      Sauté the aromatics

      • In a small skillet over medium heat, warm 1 tablespoon olive oil. Sauté the onion until softened, about 2-3 minutes. Add the garlic and cook 30 seconds. Cool slightly.

      Mix the wet/flavor base first

      • In a large bowl, add the sautéed onion and garlic, chopped apple, ketchup, egg, parsley, dried herbs, Worcestershire, salt, and pepper. Stir together well.

      Mix in oats and meat

      • Mix in the oats. Tear the meat into chunks and add to the bowl. Mix gently with your hands to incorporate all ingredients. Using disposable kitchen gloves makes it easier and cleaner. Don't overwork the meat mixture.

      Shape the loaf

      • Turn mixture onto the prepared baking sheet and with your hands, smooth and form into a compact loaf, aiming for a long narrow oval.

      Glaze safely

      • Brush the top of the meatloaf with some barbecue sauce (or ketchup). Be careful not to double dip into the clean glaze with a pastry brush that has touched the raw meat. Set aside the remaining glaze for later (wash the brush).

      Bake meatloaf

      • Bake until the center reaches 165°F, about 30-40 minutes. Brush with additional glaze at the mid point during baking if you like, then at the end.
        Note - If you are glazing while baking, be sure to pull the meatloaf and close the oven door quickly to preserve the heat while glazing, then return it to the oven.

      Slice and serve

      • Allow the baked meatloaf to rest about 10 minutes before slicing and serving.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 330kcalCarbohydrates: 26gProtein: 28gFat: 11gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 117mgSodium: 919mgPotassium: 595mgFiber: 2gSugar: 14gVitamin A: 327IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 54mgIron: 4mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Pork Tenderloin Medallions with Pan Sauce

      02/03/2026 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      A black carbon steel pan with golden pork medallions in pan sauce with serving fork.

      Pork tenderloin medallions with a simple pan sauce feels fancy, but it's easy enough for a weeknight. Sear the pork tenderloin whole for flavor, slice into medallions, then briefly finish in the oven. While the pork rests, make a quick pan sauce in the skillet (with an optional creamy version). It's a restaurant-worthy dinner that's perfect for special occasions or date night at home.

      Seared pork tenderloin medallions in a black pan surrounded with creamy brown pan sauce.

      I discovered this method by accident, and now it's a go-to way to cook pork tenderloin. I meant to slice the tenderloin into medallions first, but I started searing it whole (on cooking auto-pilot). So I pulled it off the heat, sliced it into medallions, gave them some quick heat for color, and briefly finished them in the oven. Best mistake ever-those medallions looked like little pork filets, and the flavor and texture were fantastic. And that simple pan sauce? The perfect easy finishing touch.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love Pork Medallions

      • Easy and fast - A quick sear and a short oven finish means dinner is on the table without a lot of effort.
      • Looks fancy (but it's not) - The medallions look like little pork filets and plate beautifully for family and friends.
      • Simple ingredients, big flavor - Shallots, thyme, wine, broth, and butter make a pan sauce that tastes restaurant-worthy.
      • Tender, juicy pork - Searing the tenderloin whole first helps lock in flavor and keeps the medallions tender.

      If you love pork tenderloin (we do), try my smoked pork tenderloin if you have a pellet grill. Its fantastic.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Prepped ingredients to make pork tenderloin medallions.

      Medallions

      • Pork tenderloin - For nice medallions, you'll need two 1-pound tenderloins.
      • Oil - Use an oil that works for higher heat needs such as searing. See note below.

      Pan Sauce

      • Unsalted butter - Builds flavor and gives the pan sauce a silky start, then a glossy finish, plus you control the salt.
      • Shallot - For a sweet, delicate onion base that melts into the sauce.
      • Fresh thyme - Classic with pork; perfumes the sauce without overpowering it.
      • Dry white wine - Deglazes the pan and adds brightness; reducing it concentrates flavor and keeps the sauce from tasting flat.
      • Chicken broth - Adds savory depth and volume so the sauce is spoonable and coats the pork. Choose low sodium broth or homemade broth.
      • Dijon mustard - Adds gentle tang and helps the sauce emulsify for a smooth, restaurant-style texture.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • No wine: Swap the white wine with more chicken broth, then finish with a small squeeze of lemon or a splash of white wine vinegar for brightness.
      • Herb swap: Use rosemary or sage instead of thyme (go lighter, both are stronger).
      • Add balsamic vinegar - Add a teaspoon towards the end, adds depth and subtle sweetness.
      • Thicker sauce - At the end, whisk in a combination of 1 teaspoon water to ½ teaspoon arrowroot starch (called a slurry), and cook 1 minute to thicken.
      • Creamy Option - For a creamier, glossy sauce, stir in 2 tablespoons heavy cream at the very end and warm gently (don't boil).

      If you want to brine your pork tenderloin, follow my Pork Brine.

      Chef's Note:  Skip "Vegetable Oil" For high-heat searing, I recommend using a clean-tasting, high-heat neutral oil. Personally, I skip generic grocery-store "vegetable oils" as they're highly refined. I use Zero Acre Farms (online, no affiliate) and love how it performs for searing, but any healthy neutral oil you trust and use regularly will work.

      How to Make Pork Tenderloin Medallions

      This pork medallions recipe goes fast when your mise en place is done-the French teaching of having everything prepped and ready before you turn on the heat. Measure your liquids, chop the shallot, and have the butter and Dijon ready so you can move through the pan sauce without stopping.

      Drying pork tenderloin well for seasoning and searing on a white cutting board.
      1. Dry meat well with paper towels. Preheat the oven to 375°F.
      Trimming pork tenderloins of extra fat and silverskin with a knife.
      1. With a sharp knife, trim excess fat and the silverskin (tough connective tissue, not good to eat).
      Seasoning pork with kosher salt and pepper.
      1. Season the tenderloins all over with salt and pepper.
      Searing pork tenderloins in a stainless steel wide skillet.
      1. Heat a 12" fry pan over medium high, when hot add the oil, the place the top side of the pork down in the pan. Watch your temperature. You want to sear and get it brown, not burn.
      Browned pork tenderloin in a large fry pan.
      1. After the first side is done, flip the tenderloins and do the other side, then the sides. You want a light golden brown all around.
      Slicing pork into medallions on a cutting board.
      1. Remove the pork to a cutting board. Trim the little ends, then slice the rest into medallions approximately 1 ½" wide.
      Pork medallion pieces searing briefly in a hot skillet to brown top side.
      1. Pop the medallions back into the hot pan for about 30 seconds per side to give them color.
      Tenderloin medallions ready for the oven to finish roasting.
      1. Place the medallions on a parchment covered sheet pan and finish in a 375°F oven for about 5 minutes or to 140°-145°. Remove from oven and cover with foil if needed while making the sauce.
      Adding butter to a skillet with lots of brown bits called fond.
      1. While the medallions are finishing, start the sauce. Add 2 tablespoons butter to the pan.
      Adding chopped shallots to a pan with butter to make a pan sauce.
      1. When butter is melted and foamy, add the shallots and cook 2-3 minutes until softened and lightly browned
      Adding chopped garlic to a pan with sautéed shallots in butter.
      1. Add the garlic and cook 1 minute longer.
      Deglazing a pan for pan sauce with white wine.
      1. Add the wine to deglaze the pan, scraping up the browned bits.
      Adding golden Dijon mustard to a pan for thickening a sauce.

      7. Whisk in the Dijon until smooth, add the thyme springs and chicken broth.

      A browned pan sauce cooking down with thyme sprigs for flavor.

      8. Simmer the pan sauce until it reduces and thickens. 2-3 minutes.

      Finishing the pan sauce with extra butter for serving.

      9. Stir in the last 2 tablespoons of butter. if you want thicker pan sauce, add the arrowroot and water slurry and cook 1 more minute while it thickens.

      Finished pork tenderloin medallions in a golden brown creamy pan sauce in a black pan.

      10. Pork tenderloin medallions are ready to serve with the pan sauce, unless you are doing any options. See recipe card.

      Serving Suggestions

      • Mashed potatoes - Perfect for soaking up the pan sauce.
      • Rice - Serve over jasmine, basmati, or brown rice to make it a simple.
      • Cauliflower puree - A lighter option that still feels creamy.
      • Green beans or asparagus - Blanched, sautéed or steamed with a little olive oil, salt, and lemon for a fresh contrast.
      • Simple salad - A crisp green salad with a light vinaigrette balances the richness of the pork and sauce.

      Recipes FAQs

      Why sear the tenderloin whole before slicing into medallions?

      Searing the whole tenderloin builds a browned crust all the way around. When you slice after searing, the medallions look like little pork filets and stay tender and juicy.

      What temperature should pork tenderloin medallions be cooked to?

      For juicy pork, cook to 145°F internal temperature, then rest a few minutes before serving.

      Can I make the pan sauce without wine?

      Yes. Use more chicken broth, then finish with a small squeeze of lemon juice or a splash of white wine vinegar for brightness.

      Can I make pork tenderloin medallions ahead?

      You can make the sauce a few hours ahead and rewarm gently. For best texture, cook the pork just before serving (tenderloin is lean and can dry out when reheated).

      More Recipes with Pork

      sPork is such a versatile protein with great cuts, from pork tenderloin, to rib roasts, pork chops, pork ribs and more. Try one of these recipes for options! And if you have a pellet grill, try my 3-2-1 baby back ribs, or oven method baby back ribs for year round.

      • Pork tenderloin with creamy mustard sauce close up with a serving fork.
        Roast Pork Tenderloin with Dijon Mustard Sauce
      • A golden crusted pork rib roast on a gray platter with fresh green parsley.
        Pistachio Crusted Pork Rib Roast
      • Close up of creamy pork chops with sauce.
        Sour Cream Pork Chops Recipe
      • BBQ glazed smoked pork tenderloin sliced on a gray platter for serving.
        Smoked Pork Tenderloin (pellet grill)

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make pork tenderloin medallions, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      A black carbon steel pan with golden pork medallions in pan sauce with serving fork.

      Pork Tenderloin with Simple Pan Sauce

      Sally Cameron
      No ratings yet
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Cook Time 15 minutes mins
      Total Time 25 minutes mins
      Course Dinner, Entree, Main Course
      Cuisine American
      Servings 4
      Calories 423 kcal

      Equipment

      • 12" skillet
      • Quarter sheet pan

      Ingredients
        

      Pork Tenderloin

      • 2 pounds pork tenderloins 2 pieces at 1 pound each
      • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt or sea salt
      • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
      • 1 ½ tablespoons neutral oil good for higher heat

      Pan Sauce

      • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter
      • ¼ cup finely chopped shallot ½ a large
      • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped or microplaned
      • ½ cup dry white wine
      • ¾ cup chicken broth
      • 1 tablespoon smooth Dijon mustard
      • 4-5 small thyme sprigs or ½ teaspoon dried thyme

      Sauce options

      • 2 tablespoons heavy cream optional for a creamier sauce
      • 1 teaspoon good balsamic vinegar or glaze
      • ½ teaspoon arrowroot starch optional for thickening sauce

      Instructions
       

      Sear pork

      • Pre-heat the oven to 375°F. Heat a 12" skillet over medium high heat, season the pork, add the oil to the pan, and sear the pork tenderloin on all sides. Quickly sear to a nice golden brown, about 6 minutes. Remove meat to a cutting board.

      Slice medallions

      • With a sharp slicing knife, cut the pork tenderloin into 1 ½" wide medallions. The end pieces will be a bit smaller.

      Sear top and bottom of medallions

      • Return the medallions to the hot pan, cut sides down, just long enough to get a little color on each side, about 30 second each. You're not cooking them through-just adding a bit of color on the top and bottom.

      Finish in the oven

      • Transfer the medallions to a parchment-lined quarter sheet pan. Roast at 375°F for about 5 minutes, or until they reach 140-145°F in the center. Let rest covered in foil to stay warm while you make the pan sauce. Timing depends on the size of your tenderloins.

      Make pan sauce

      • Add half of the butter to the hot pan over medium low heat. When melted and foamy, add minced shallots. Sauté until soft and lightly browned, 2-3 minutes. Add garlic and cook 1 minute longer.
        Pour in the wine to deglaze, scraping up any tasty browned bits. A wooden spatula works great. Let wine reduce by half. Whisk in Dijon, add the thyme sprigs, and broth. Simmer until the sauce is thickened 2-3 minutes. Whisk in the final 2 tablespoons of butter.

      Add any options

      • To make sauce thicker, add the ½ teaspoon of arrowroot starch mixed with 1 teaspoon water, then cook 1 minute. Taste and adjust seasoning with any salt and pepper. If using heavy cream option (2 tablespoons), add now and heat through gently. Stir in the balsamic at the end as well.

      Plate and serve

      • Add medallions to plates and spoon the pan sauce over the top to serve.

      Notes

      For searing pork tenderloin, use a neutral oil that handles higher heat and has a clean flavor and profile. I skip generic grocery-store "vegetable oil" blends and choose a better-quality neutral oil instead. I use Zero Acre Farms (no affiliate) and highly recommend it for high-heat cooking (it's currently sold online). Use any neutral high-heat oil you trust and like for your kitchen.
      If you don't really drink wine but sometimes cook with it, such as for deglazing a pan, buy the little airline size bottles. They work great and are inexpensive (come in a 4-pack). Although I drink wine, I cook with these little bottles a lot. 

      Nutrition

      Calories: 423kcalCarbohydrates: 5gProtein: 49gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 10gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 178mgSodium: 178mgPotassium: 1025mgFiber: 1gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 407IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 37mgIron: 3mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Simple Steamed Brussels Sprouts

      02/05/2026 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      A white bowl of brght green Brussels sprouts tossed with olive oil, salt, pepper and red pepper flakes.

      Steamed Brussels sprouts is one of the easiest ways to enjoy them so they turn out tender, bright green, and pleasantly sweet, not mushy or bitter in under 20 minutes. Simply steam Brussels sprouts, then flavor in many ways. Try one of 7 flavor options, or all of them. You'll love these!

      A white round bowl of bright green steamed Brussels sprouts with a serving spoon.

      This simple method for steamed Brussels sprouts is ready in under 20 minutes and makes the perfect base for all kinds of flavors. Toss them with garlic confit and lemon, a quick soy-ginger drizzle, or a sprinkle of Parmesan and chili flakes. Once you know how to steam Brussels sprouts properly, you can finish them a dozen different ways.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love Steamed Brussels Sprouts

      • Fast and foolproof - From pot to plate in about 10 minutes.
      • Tender, not sulfur-y - Gentle steaming keeps them bright green and sweet instead of gray.
      • Healthy base, endless finishes - Use this method as a canvas, then add garlic confit, soy-ginger, lemon-butter, or Parmesan on top.
      • Versatile side dish- Serve with meatloaf, roast chicken, pork tenderloin, or simply with eggs for a quick lunch.

      For another great way to cook Brussels, try this Brussels sprouts with balsamic vinegar.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Please see the section below ingredients for 7 different ways to flavor simple stem Brussels sprouts, or serve them simply steamed with salt, pepper, and a little olive oil or butter.

      A bowl of bright green raw Brussels sprouts and olive oil for steaming.
      • Brussels sprouts - Look for firm, tight sprouts that feel heavy for their size. When buying, remember that about a 20% trim loss is normal (stems + outer leaves).
      • Olive oil or butter - To lightly coat the hot sprouts so seasoning sticks (or use garlic confit oil).
      • Water - Just enough to sit under the steamer basket; the sprouts should sit above the water, not in it.
      • Fresh lemon juice (optional) - A squeeze at the end brightens the flavor and balances their natural sweetness.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

      Variations: Flavor Ideas for Steamed Brussels Sprouts

      For the flavor variations you don't need much volume of your chosen option, 1 - 2 tablespoons is about all.

      • Garlic Confit & Lemon - Toss hot steamed Brussels sprouts with a tablespoon of the garlic oil and 3-4 confit garlic cloves, mash into a paste, toss with the hot sprouts. One of my favorites!
      • Soy-Ginger-Sesame - Drizzle with tamari (GF) or soy sauce, a little grated fresh ginger, a few drops of toasted sesame oil, and sprinkle with sesame seeds.
      • Chili & Citrus - Toss with olive oil or neutral oil, red pepper flakes or chili crisp, and finish with lemon or lime juice.
      • Lemon-Butter & Parmesan - Drizzle a tablespoons of melted butter or ghee over the hot sprouts, add lemon juice, salt, pepper, and a shower of freshly grated Parmesan.
      • Miso-Maple - Whisk together sweet white miso paste, a little maple syrup, a splash of rice vinegar, and a little oil. Toss with hot steamed Brussels sprouts for a glossy, sweet-savory glaze with lots of umami. Add a little microplaned garlic (or garlic confit).
      • Maple-Dijon - Whisk Dijon, maple syrup, olive oil (or melted butter), a pinch of salt, and a splash of apple cider vinegar, toss with hot sprouts.
      • Basil Pesto - Toss hot sprouts with a spoonful of basil pesto (thins out nicely with a bit of cooking water or olive oil.

      Prep ahead tip - Trim root end and peel off any outer rough layer, then store in an airtight container for using during the week. Then all you have to do to is halve them and steam. Doing the prep work saves precious time (about 10 minutes).

      Try the Brussels sprouts with pancetta, a great savory stovetop option.

      How to Make Steamed Brussels Sprouts

      Bowls of trimmed Brussels sprouts and the trimmings on a counter.
      1. Trim the stem ends, remove any yellowed outer leaves.
      A glass bowl of trimmed and halved Brussels sprouts.
      1. Halve the sprouts.
      Steaming Brussels sprouts in a pan seeing through a glass lid on the stovetop.
      1. Add about an inch of water to a pot with steamer basket. Bring to a simmer. Add veggies and steam until tender when pierced with the tip of a paring knife, 5-8 minutes. Check at 5 minutes.
      Steamed sprouts in a stainless bowl in a steaming rack.
      1. Transfer immediately to a bowl. Toss with a drizzle of olive oil or butter, salt, and any finishing flavors (see ideas below). Serve hot or warm.

      Chef's Tip - Using Frozen Brussels Sprouts
      Frozen Brussels sprouts are blanched before freezing, so they cook faster and turn out softer than fresh. You can use them when fresh aren't available-just know they'll be softer and less crisp. Steam them from frozen (don't thaw) and start checking around 4 minutes so they don't overcook. Drain well, let the steam evaporate for a minute, then toss with plain butter or olive oil, or finish with one of the flavor variations.

      Serving Suggestions

      Steamed Brussels sprouts are neutral enough to work with almost any main dish-it's the flavor variation you choose that ties them to the rest of the plate.

      • Weeknight dinner side - Serve alongside roasted or baked chicken, pork tenderloin, meatloaf, or salmon.
      • With comfort food - Balance richer mains like meatloaf, mashed potatoes, roast beef, or mac and cheese with a bright, veggie-forward side. A lemony or Dijon finish works especially well here.
      • With grilled or roasted meats - Pair soy-ginger, miso-maple, or chili oil Brussels with grilled steak, pork chops, ribs, or BBQ chicken when it's too cold (or too dark) to grill veggies.
      • On a grain bowl - Spoon warm Brussels over cooked quinoa, farro, or brown rice with a protein (rotisserie chicken, leftover roast meat, tofu, or beans) and drizzle with extra sauce or dressing.
      • As part of a veggie spread - Serve them warm or at room temperature with other simple vegetables (roasted carrots, green beans, roasted potatoes) and a creamy sauce or dip on the side.
      • Lunch prep - Steamed Brussels sprouts reheat well. Add them to meal-prep containers with leftover chicken or meatloaf and a grain for an easy, veggie-forward lunch.

      Storing Leftovers

      Cool leftover Brussels sprouts, then store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat gently, or slice and add to grain bowls, salads, frittatas (chopped), or quick sautéed veggie mixes.

      Recipe FAQs

      How do I keep steamed Brussels sprouts from getting mushy or sulfur-y?

      The two keys are not overcooking and getting them out of the steam as soon as they're done. Start checking early, and as soon as they're just tender, remove the basket from the pot and transfer the sprouts to a bowl. Overcooking is what gives Brussels sprouts that strong cabbagey, sulfur-y flavor many people dislike.

      Do I need a steamer basket to steam Brussels sprouts?

      A steamer basket is easiest, but you can improvise. Use a heat-safe metal strainer or colander that fits over your pot, making sure the bottom doesn't sit in the water. In a pinch, you can put the sprouts directly into a small amount of simmering water, cover, and treat it like a shallow steam-just watch closely and drain them as soon as they're tender. Steamer baskets are inexpensive tools to add to your kitchen.

      Can I make steamed Brussels sprouts ahead of time?

      Yes. For the best texture, steam them until just tender, cool quickly, then refrigerate in an airtight container for up to 3 days. Reheat gently in a steamer, in a covered skillet with a splash of water, or in the microwave, then toss with your chosen flavor variation.

      More Vegetable Side Dish Recipes

      These terrific veggie sides make the saying "eat more veggies" easy! And check out the vegetables and side dish recipe index page for more ideas.

      • Rund bowl of golden green Brussels sprouts with pancetta, herbs, and shallots ready for serving.
        Brussels Sprouts With Pancetta (Stovetop)
      • roasted carrots with thyme
        Maple Roasted Carrots (Easy Glazed Carrots Recipe)
      • roasted broccoli
        Roasted Broccoli with Parmesan and Lemon
      • cauliflower colcannon
        Cauliflower Colcannon with Kale

      Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you made steamed Brussels sprouts, please leave a comment and let me know. I love hearing from you and your comments also help other readers. And please leave a star rating ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐. Thank you!

      📖 Recipe

      A white bowl of brght green Brussels sprouts tossed with olive oil, salt, pepper and red pepper flakes.

      Simple Steamed Brussels Sprouts

      Sally Cameron
      Bright green steamed Brussels sprouts, a simple side dish that takes minutes and goes with just about anything. See the notes at the bottom for 7 flavor variations beyond simple salt and pepper.
      No ratings yet
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Cook Time 8 minutes mins
      Total Time 18 minutes mins
      Course Side Dish, vegetables
      Cuisine American
      Servings 4 to 6
      Calories 104 kcal

      Equipment

      • Medium pot with a lid 5 quarts
      • Steamer basket that fits inside pot

      Ingredients
        

      • 1 ½ - 2 pounds fresh Brussel sprouts of similar size trimmed and halved
      • 1 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil or melted butter
      • ¼ teaspoon salt
      • ⅛ teaspoon pepper

      Instructions
       

      Prep Brussels sprouts

      • Trim the stem ends, remove any yellowed outer leaves, and halve the sprouts.

      Steam sprouts

      • Add a steamer basket to a medium pot 4-5 quart pot and pour in cold water just to the bottom of the steamer basket (the sprouts shouldn't sit in the water).
        Cover with a lid and bring to a boil over medium-high heat. Add the Brussels sprouts, cover, and steam for about 5–8 minutes, until bright green and just tender when pierced with the tip of a paring knife. Check at 5 minutes.

      Season and serve

      • Toss the hot Brussels sprouts with a little butter or olive oil and salt and pepper to taste.
        For more flavor ideas (garlic confit, miso–maple, soy–ginger, lemon–Parmesan, and more), see the “Variations: Flavor Ideas for Steamed Brussels Sprouts” section in the post.

      Notes

      Using frozen Brussels sprouts: You can make this with frozen Brussels sprouts when fresh aren't available. Cook them from frozen (don't thaw) and steam just until heated through and tender, 4-6 minutes. When they're done, drain well and let excess moisture evaporate for a minute or two, then toss with one of the flavor variations. They'll be softer than fresh, but still good-see the post above for more tips and flavor ideas.
      Flavor variations: This recipe card gives you the basic method for perfectly steamed Brussels sprouts. In the post above, you’ll find 7 easy flavor ideas—like garlic confit + lemon, miso–maple, soy–ginger, Dijon–ACV, and lemon–Parmesan—to dress them up.
      The garlic confit flavor variation is one we have often. Use 1 tablespoon of the oil and 3-4 garlic confit cloves, mash into a paste (a mortar and pestle work well), and toss with the hot sprouts to serve. Sprinkle with red pepper flakes, lemon, if desired. 
       

      Nutrition

      Calories: 104kcalCarbohydrates: 15gProtein: 6gFat: 4gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gSodium: 188mgPotassium: 663mgFiber: 6gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 1283IUVitamin C: 145mgCalcium: 72mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Almond Flour Chocolate Cookies

      01/29/2026 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      Chocolate almond cookies with crinkled tops and sugar sprinkles.

      These almond flour chocolate cookies are everything a chocolate cookie should be-soft, chewy, deeply chocolaty, and nicely crinkled on top. They bake up light and delicate, with a melt-in-your-mouth center and perfectly crisp edges. Naturally gluten-free and easy to prepare, they're the kind of cookie you can make for holidays, dessert boards, cookie boxes, or whenever you're craving something a little indulgent.

      A stack of chocolate almond cookies on a white plate with cooling cookies behind.

      After nailing the texture of my soft, crinkly ginger cookies, I knew I wanted a chocolate version with that same tender bite and effortless simplicity. This recipe delivers-an easy, naturally gluten-free chocolate cookie made with everyday ingredients and no traditional flour. Rich, tender, and deeply chocolaty, it's the kind of cookie you'll keep in regular rotation year-round.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Almond Flour Chocolate Cookies at a Glance

      • Perfect bite - Crisp edges but inside, chewy chocolate cookies.
      • Chocolate-forward - Deep cocoa flavor that tastes rich, not overly sweet.
      • Quick + simple - Pantry ingredients and a straightforward mix-and-scoop dough.

      For another chocolatey baked treat, make some fudgy gluten-free brownies.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Almond flour, cocoa powder, sugar, and other ingredients for chocolate almond flour cookies.
      • Flour - Fine blanched almond flour creates a tender crumb with a slightly chewy texture.
      • Cocoa powder - Unsweetened cocoa powder for rich chocolate flavor, notes below on type, dutch, natural, or blend.
      • Baking soda- Helps the cookies spread and brown properly.
      • Salt - Balances the sweetness and enhances the chocolate flavor.
      • Espresso powder - Deepens the chocolate flavor without adding a coffee taste, optional but try it!
      • Butter - Unsalted butter for proper control of salt.
      • Brown sugar - Light brown sugar adds sweetness, moisture, and chew.
      • Sugar - Granulated sugar contributes structure and crisp edges.
      • Egg - Binds the dough and adds structure.
      • Vanilla extract - Adds warmth and rounds out the chocolate.
      • Almond extract - A subtle complement to vanilla that enhances the chocolate, optional.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements.

      Chef's Tip - Natural Cocoa vs. Dutch-Process Cocoa and Black Cocoa Powder
      Natural cocoa is more acidic and lighter in color, with a brighter chocolate flavor. Dutch-process cocoa is treated with an alkaline solution to neutralize natural acidity, so it's darker, smoother, and tastes less sharp. Black cocoa is ultra-dutched with it's black color and mellow flavor. I use a blend of all three cocoas and it works beautifully with baking soda because there are other mild acids in the dough (like brown sugar) to balance things out.

      For another easy and fun to make chocolate treat, makes these chocolate bark bites, like chocolate bark in bite-sized mini muffin cups.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • The only substitution would be using non-dairy butter for a dairy- free, gluten-free cookie, but I have not tested this. If you try it please comment and let me know how they turned out and what brand of non-dairy butter you used.

      Baking Tip: How to Rescue Hard Brown Sugar

      Brown sugar hardens when its natural molasses dries out, but it's easy to bring it back to soft, scoopable life for baking needs:

      • Fast Method (10-20 seconds) - Break the sugar into chunks, place in a microwave-safe bowl, cover with a damp paper towel, and heat in 10-second bursts until softened. Use immediately.
      • Overnight Method (Best for long-term) - Place the sugar in an airtight container with a slice of apple, a piece of fresh bread, or a dampened (not wet) terracotta sugar saver. It will rehydrate overnight and stay soft.
      • Keep it soft long-term - Store brown sugar in a truly airtight container with a sugar saver-or replace the apple slice or bread every few days to maintain moisture.

      How to Make Almond Flour Chocolate Cookies

      Cocoa powder, almond flour, and baking soda in a fine sieve for sifting into a bowl.
      1. Add almond flour, cocoa powder, espresso powder, baking soda, and salt to a fine sieve
      Sifted cocoa powder, flour, and dry ingredients for chocolate almond flour cookies in a stainless bowl.
      1. Shake the dry mix through by hitting the edge of the sieve on your opposite hand, until no lumps remain.
      Brown sugar, sugar, and butter in a glass bowl for creaming into a cookie dough.
      1. Add both sugars and soft butter to another medium bowl.
      Creaming butter and sugar, adding vanilla, for cookie dough in a glass bowl.
      1. Beat well with a hand mixer on high speed (creaming) until soft and fluffy, then beat in the egg and extracts.
      Chocolate almond flour cookie dough ready for portioning and baking.
      1. Add the dry ingredients to the creamed mixture and mix on low speed just until combined. The dough is stiff and feels a bit gritty due to the almond flour.
      Chocolate cookie dough balls on a parchment lined baking sheet with a cookies scoop.
      1. Chill the dough for 45 minutes in the refrigerator. Pre-heat oven to 350°F, line a sheet pan with parchment. Scoop the dough, roll into 1 ½" balls with a #50 cookie scoop (easiest) or tablespoon.
      Baked chocolate almond flour cookies on a baking sheet cooling.
      1. Bake 14-15 minutes until edges are set and center still a bit soft. Cool cookies on the tray for 10 minutes as they are fragile when hot, then move to a wire rack in a single layer for complete cooling.
      A round wire cooling rack piled with chocolate cookies.

      Chocolate for breakfast? Why not, with this chocolate banana smoothie.

      Serving, Storing & Freezing

      Serve almond flour chocolate cookies slightly warm or at room temperature. They're rich and chocolatey on their own, or lovely with coffee, tea, or a glass of cold milk (dairy or non-dairy both play nicely here).

      Storing

      Store baked chocolate cookies in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 3 days, or refrigerate for up to 7 days. Because almond flour cookies are more delicate than wheat-based cookies, refrigeration helps them hold their shape longer, especially in warm kitchens.

      Freezing cookies

      Freeze fully cooled cookies in a single layer, then transfer to an airtight container or freezer bag for up to 2 months. Thaw at room temperature or warm briefly in a low oven to refresh.

      Freezing cookie dough

      This dough should freeze well but I have not tested it. Scoop into portions, freeze solid, then store in a freezer bag for up to 2 months. Bake from frozen, adding 1-2 extra minutes to the baking time.

      Recipe FAQs

      Are these cookies gluten-free?

      Yes. Almond flour is naturally gluten-free, making these gluten-free chocolate cookies, a great option for everyone. They are a flourless cookie.

      Can I use almond meal instead of almond flour?

      You can, but the texture will be slightly coarser and the cookies a bit more rustic. Finely ground almond flour produces the best, smoothest cookie texture.

      Can I use a sugar substitute?

      Sugar substitutes might work, but results vary, and I have not tested this option. Granulated monk fruit/allulose blends tend to perform better than erythritol, which can create a dry or cooling effect. With cookies, sugar is more than sweetness-it contributes to structure, spread, crisp edges, moisture retention, browning, and that classic chewy bite which are not the same with sugar substitutes.

      Do these almond flour chocolate cookies need to cool before eating?

      Yes. Before eating they must cool 10 minutes on the baking sheet because they are fragile when hot, and set as they cool. Then go right ahead!

      More Cookie Recipes

      Here are a few more cookie recipes for year round enjoyment, all gluten-free and no one would ever know it.

      • A plate of golden sugar sprinkled ginger cookies with more cooling on a wire rack.
        Soft & Chewy Gluten-Free Ginger Cookies
      • A stack of crunchy cookies on a counter with a glass of milk and cookies cooling behind.
        Cranberry Oatmeal Cookies Recipe (gluten-free)
      • A round white plate piled with chocolate chip meringue cookies.
        Forgotten Cookies (chocolate chip meringues)
      • sand tart cookies
        Old Fashioned Sand Tarts Cookie Recipe

      Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make these almond flour chocolate cookies, please leave a comment. I love to hear from you and your comments are helpful to other readers as well. I hope you enjoyed them! Thanks for supporting my site. Please leave a star rating too.

      📖 Recipe

      Chocolate almond cookies with crinkled tops and sugar sprinkles.

      Almond Flour Chocolate Cookies

      Sally Cameron
      A simple irresistible chocolate cookie with a chewy center, lightly crisp edges, and a crackled sparkly top, made with almond flour for naturally gluten-free cookies.
      No ratings yet
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Cook Time 15 minutes mins
      chilling time 45 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
      Course Cookies, Dessert
      Cuisine American
      Servings 12 Yield 24 cookies
      Calories 205 kcal

      Equipment

      • Hand mixer
      • 1-2 Rimmed baking sheet half sheet size
      • Parchment paper
      • Wire cooling rack
      • Fine sieve
      • #50 cookie scoop (aka disher)

      Ingredients
        

      • 1 ¾ cups super-fine blanched almond flour
      • ¼ cup Dutch-process cocoa powder or blend of cocoa powders
      • ½ - ¾ teaspoon espresso powder optional but really good!
      • ½ teaspoon baking soda
      • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
      • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter room temperature, very soft
      • ½ cup light brown sugar lightly packed
      • ¼ cup granulated sugar
      • 1 large egg
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
      • ¼ teaspoon almond extract optional

      Instructions
       

      Sift the dry ingredients

      • Place the almond flour, cocoa powder, espresso powder, baking soda, and salt in a sieve over a medium bowl and sift the dry ingredients through until there are no more lumps.

      Cream the butter and sugars

      • In a separate bowl, beat the soft butter, brown sugar, and granulated sugar until light and fluffy, 1-2 minutes in high speed. Add the egg and extracts and mix on low speed just until blended in.

      Add dry ingredients

      • Add the dry mixture to the creamy and mix on low until blended. The dough is stiff and fees a bit gritty due to the almond flour.

      Chill dough

      • Chill the dough for 45 minutes for slightly thicker cookies and better shape.

      Scoop & bake

      • Preheat oven to 350°F. Line a sheet pan with parchment. Scoop the dough into 1½-tablespoon balls. Using a #50 cookie scoop is best. Roll the balls in sugar for a sparkly top after baking.

      Cooling cookies

      • Bake 14-15 minutes. The edges should look set, and the centers still soft and a bit puffed and crackled. Cool cookies on the tray for 10 minutes before moving as they are fragile when hot, then move to a wire rack for full cooling.

      Notes

      Here is the cocoa powder I use, King Arthur Triple Cocoa Blend, and their espresso powder as well.
      Storing
      Store baked cookies in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 3 days, or refrigerate for up to 7 days.
      Freezing cookies
      Freeze fully cooled cookies in a single layer, then transfer to an airtight container or freezer bag for up to 2 months. Thaw at room temperature or warm briefly in a low oven to refresh.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 205kcalCarbohydrates: 18gProtein: 4gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.3gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 31mgSodium: 104mgPotassium: 49mgFiber: 2gSugar: 14gVitamin A: 197IUCalcium: 48mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Green Enchilada Sauce with Tomatillos

      01/22/2026 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

      tomatillo salsa verde

      Homemade green enchilada sauce made with fresh tomatillos is bright, tangy, and so much better than anything from a jar. This easy tomatillo enchilada sauce comes together in about 30 minutes-just chop, simmer, and blend. It's the classic sauce for enchiladas verdes, but it's just as good spooned over tacos, chicken, eggs, and roasted vegetables. Make a batch and freeze it in portions so you always have a stash of green enchilada sauce ready to go.

      jars of freshly made tomatillo salsa verde (tomatillo sauce)  on a counter.

      Yes, you can grab tomatillo enchilada sauce off the shelf, but homemade is a different story-brighter, fresher, and done in about 30 minutes. A quick chop, a gentle simmer, and a spin in the blender, and you've got a sauce you can freeze in portions and use anytime you want enchiladas verdes. But don't stop at chicken enchiladas, it's good on so many things!

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love Green Enchilada Sauce

      • Fast and easy - A quick chop, simmer, and blend and it's ready in about 30 minutes.
      • Fresh, bright flavor - Tomatillos bring a tangy, zesty kick you don't get from a jar.
      • Customizable heat - Keep it mild or turn it up with your favorite chiles.
      • So many uses - Perfect for enchiladas verdes, tacos, eggs, this easy chicken recipe, bowls, over omelets, and more (see the list below).
      • Freezer-friendly - Make a batch now and freeze portions for fast meals later.

      Use this tomatillo sauce over these grilled shrimp tacos. Skip takeout tacos and make these!

      Chef's tip: Buying tomatillos. When buying tomatillos, peel back a bit of the paper and look for a smooth flesh and bright green color. Don't buy any with black spots or shriveled areas. While they look like green tomatoes, they are a different fruit (they are fruit not vegetable).

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Tomatillos, onion, chili peppers, garlic and spices for making green enchilada sauce in prep bowls.
      • Tomatillos - They come in green, yellow, and even purple. I use green tomatillos with their papery husks for the classic, bright flavor and color.
      • Chiles - Anaheim adds mild, green flavor; jalapeño adds mild-to-medium heat. Adjust the jalapeño to taste.
      • Onion - Adds savory depth and a little natural sweetness as it simmers.
      • Garlic - Fresh cloves give the cleanest, best flavor.
      • Liquid - I use water for a fresh, pure tomatillo flavor, but chicken broth or vegetable broth works too for a slightly richer sauce.
      • Spices - Ground cumin adds warmth; ground coriander is optional for a subtle citrusy note.
      • Oregano - Use dried oregano for convenience, or Mexican oregano if you have it for a more authentic flavor.
      • Arrowroot starch - Optional thickener at the end if you want a more sauce-like consistency. (Cornstarch works too, but arrowroot stays a bit silkier.)

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

      My favorite thing to do with this tomatillo enchilada sauce is make this easy Salsa Verde Chicken with boneless, skinless breasts. Dinner in under 30 minutes! Add rice and you're ready.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Try different tomatillos - Green is classic, but yellow or purple tomatillos work too (color and flavor will vary slightly).
      • Make it hotter - Swap the jalapeño for a serrano pepper (or use two jalapeños).
      • Pepper swap - If you can't find Anaheim, use a poblano (or other mild green pepper). Both are mild; poblano is a little deeper and more earthy.
      • Make it creamy - Blend in a little sour cream/Greek yogurt/crema after cooling slightly (for enchiladas verdes).

      Use this green enchilada sauce to make a terrific tomatillo soup with either leftover chicken or turkey, and pinto beans. Fast and hearty!

      How to Make Green Enchilada Sauce

      two bowls on the counter, one with peeled green tomatillos and the other with the husks.
      1. Peel tomatillos and wash off the sticky coating. Discard the husks.
      Chopped green tomatillos ready to make enchilada sauce
      1. Roughly chop the tomatillos into quarters or sixths.
      Chopping green chili pepper and deseeding them.
      1. Slice chili peppers lengthwise, de-seed, remove white membrane, and chop.
      Ingredients for green enchilada sauce in a dutch oven ready for simmering, with spices, onions.
      1. Add tomatillos, onions, spices, salt, chili peppers, and garlic to the pot.
      Cooked green enchilada sauce ready to be pureed.
      1. Bring almost to a boil, turn down to low, cover with a lid, simmer on low for 15-20 minutes until falling apart.
      Pureed green tomatillo sauce in a blender container.
      1. Carefully add hot enchilada sauce to a blender container, tight lid on, pulse to refine, chunky or smooth. Do in two batches with a smaller blender.

      Chef's Tip: Thicken Green Enchilada Sauce Right in the Blender: For a green enchilada sauce with a little more body, I thicken it right in the blender. With the sauce still hot, add 1 tablespoon arrowroot starch directly to the blended sauce and pulse until smooth. It thickens almost immediately and evenly-no slurry needed. This gives the sauce enough body to cling to tortillas and fillings without tasting heavy or starchy.

      A pot of finished green tomatillo sauce with a ladle ona marble counter.

      Chef's Tip: Safely Handling Chili Peppers - If you're heat sensitive or want to protect your hands, wear disposable kitchen gloves while trimming and deseeding chili peppers. Once you're done, discard the gloves and wash your hands thoroughly before touching anything else. This is especially important if working with hotter chili peppers. Hotter chiles contain higher concentrations of capsaicin and related compounds, responsible for chili pepper heat and that lingering "burning" sensation on skin and eyes. For chili pepper heat ratings, go to go to the source, Scoville.org

      Serving Suggestions

      12 Ways to Use Tomatillo Sauce

      • As a sauce: Over grilled or baked fish like cod, halibut, or salmon, shrimp or scallops.
      • Use it as a marinade: Use tomatillo sauce as a marinade for chicken, pork, or fish to infuse them with a bright, tangy flavor before grilling or roasting.
      • Make green chicken enchiladas (Enchiladas Suizas).
      • Chips and salsa! My great weakness.
      • Make dips: Combine the tomatillo sauce with cream cheese or Greek yogurt to create a creamy dip for chips, crackers, or fresh vegetables.
      • Add a spoonful to top a bowl of chili.
      • Rice and grain bowls: Stir the sauce into cooked rice, quinoa, or couscous to add moisture and flavor.
      • Use it with Huevos Rancheros instead of the more traditional red enchilada sauce.
      • Pour it with eggs - poached, scrambled eggs, or over omelets for a lift of flavor.
      • Use it with any kind of tacos as the sauce.
      • Alongside baked nachos with cheese.
      • Serve aside grilled flank steak for a Mexican style dinner.

      Storing and Freezing

      Tomatillo sauce is good for 4-5 days. If you're not going to use it up, freeze it in jars labeled with the date and volume (like 8 ounces or 1 cup portions). Souper Cubes work terrific for freezing sauces.

      Jars are freshly made tomatillo sauce ready for the ridge or freezer.

      Green Enchilada Sauce Recipe FAQs

      What is the difference between tomatillo sauce, green enchilada sauce, and salsa verde?

      The terms are often used interchangeably as they are both green Mexican-style sauces made from tomatillos and chilies. It can be prepared either raw or cooked, each method offering distinct flavors and textures.

      How can I adjust the spiciness of my tomatillo sauce?

      The spiciness of tomatillo sauce can be customized by using different types and amounts of chili peppers. For a milder sauce, use fewer peppers and remove their seeds and membranes, which contain most of the heat. For a spicier version, include more peppers or choose hotter varieties like serrano or jalapeño peppers.

      Can I substitute green tomatoes for tomatillos in the sauce?

      Not really. Green tomatoes and tomatillos are different fruits with different flavors. Tomatillos have a tart, citrusy taste, whereas green tomatoes are more acidic and less fruity.

      More Mexican Inspired Recipes

      If you're making tacos, skip the packaged seasoning with crazy high sodium and make your own with my homemade taco seasoning blend.

      • spicy grilled shrimp tacos
        Baja Shrimp Tacos (Grill or Stovetop)
      • Taco meat in a cast iron pan with fixings for tacos around it.
        Ground Meat Taco Recipe (or ground turkey)
      • chicken tomatillo soup
        Tomatillo Soup (with Chicken or Turkey)
      • Close up of Mexican chicken soup in a white bowl.
        Mexican Chicken Tortilla Soup Recipe

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this green enchilada sauce sauce, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers. Thanks for supporting my site!

      📖 Recipe

      tomatillo salsa verde

      Green Enchilada Sauce (Tomatillo Sauce)

      Sally Cameron
      A tangy, green Mexican-inspired sauce that usually tops chicken enchiladas but works in so many ways. See post for ideas. Freezes beautifully for breakfasts, snacks and dinners. Note - the arrowroot starch makes a thicker sauce but it's optional.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Cook Time 20 minutes mins
      Total Time 30 minutes mins
      Course salsa, Sauce
      Cuisine Mexican
      Servings 15 yield 5-6 cups
      Calories 29 kcal

      Equipment

      • blender

      Ingredients
        

      • 2 ½-3 pounds green tomatillos
      • 1 medium onion
      • 1 large Anaheim chili pepper
      • 1 large jalapeno chili pepper
      • 2 large garlic cloves chopped
      • 1 cup water
      • 2 teaspoons ground cumin
      • 1 ½ teaspoons dried oregano
      • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
      • ½ teaspoon sea salt
      • 1 tablespoon arrowroot starch optional

      Instructions
       

      Prep tomatillos, onions, chilies

      • Remove paper husks from the tomatillos, wash and chop them. Roughly chop the onion. Split the chiles in half lengthwise, remove seeds and membrane, then chop. Peel and smash the garlic cloves.

      Cook the enchilada sauce

      • Add everything to a medium (4-5 quart) saucepan with the water, cumin, oregano, coriander, and salt. Bring to a boil then turn down to low. Cover and simmer with a lid on for approximately 15-20 minutes, until it all falls apart and gets very soft.

      Puree and portion

      • Carefully pour hot salsa into a blender. Fix the lid on tightly and pulse briefly for a few seconds to puree as thick or fine as you want. If your blender is smaller, do this in two batches.
        Use as is (warm) or cool and refrigerate, or portion and freeze. Salsa will last 5 days in the refrigerator or several months in the freezer. To thicken, see note below.

      Notes

      How to Thicken Green Enchilada Sauce

      If you prefer a slightly thicker green enchilada sauce with more body, you can thicken it right in the blender. With the sauce still hot, add 1 tablespoon of arrowroot starch directly to the blended sauce and pulse until smooth. It thickens almost immediately and evenly, without the extra step of making a slurry.
      Arrowroot also holds up much better through freezing and thawing, keeping the sauce smooth and stable. Cornstarch can break down after freezing, making sauces watery or separated.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 0.333cupCalories: 29kcalCarbohydrates: 6gProtein: 1gFat: 1gSaturated Fat: 1gSodium: 92mgPotassium: 217mgFiber: 2gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 103IUVitamin C: 11mgCalcium: 13mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Green Chicken Enchiladas Recipe

      08/23/2010 by Sally Cameron 5 Comments

      Chicken enchiladas

      If you love real Mexican food-not the drive-through kind-this green chicken enchiladas recipe is for you. This chicken enchiladas recipe starts with my homemade green enchilada sauce, tender shredded chicken, and plenty of melted cheese. It's the dish I used to order at Mexican restaurants all the time, until I created my own healthier, from-scratch version that we now make at home.

      Chicken enchiladas

      Why Make This Green Chicken Enchiladas Recipe

      To make this recipe faster, roast the chicken and prepare the sauce a day or two ahead, then assemble and bake when you are ready for dinner. For the chicken, roast, cool then shred the meat.

      Using leftover chicken from either a whole roast chicken or roast chicken breasts works great and is usually what I do. You can also use a store rotisserie chicken. 

      Homemade Tomatillo Sauce: Salsa Verde

      A staple in Mexican cuisine, fresh tomatillos look like green tomatoes covered with a papery husk and have a tart flavor. For the sauce I use fresh diced tomatillos, diced onions and spices simmered for 20-30 minutes.

      Buy bright green firm fruit. Remove the husks and rinse off the light sticky film. I make this sauce ahead and freeze it, handy for whipping up a batch of enchiladas. If this is too much work (it's REALLY is easy!), by a jarred sauce like Trader Joe's Salsa Verde.

      tomatillo salsa verde
      Homemade tomatillo sauce, salsa verde.

      Roast Chicken Options

      Sunday dinner is usually whole roast chicken on my menu plan, so I have leftover shredded chicken for enchiladas, tacos, salad, etc. Another option is to get a couple of bone-in chicken breasts and roast them, then shred the meat. Directions are in the recipe for this option.

      Another option is to buy a store roasted chicken and shred the meat. Once the is chicken ready and the sauce made it's just assemble and bake when you are ready to eat.

      How to Steam Tortillas and Assembling the Enchiladas

      One thing about corn tortillas is that they break when you roll them. The secret I found is steaming them lightly first, then they roll without breaking. Here are ways to steam tortillas:

      • Use a large pot with a folding steamer rack, without the center handle. Wrap a stack of tortillas in a clean kitchen towel and steam until soft and pliable. Placing the stack in a microwave safe bag helps.
      • Use a bamboo steamer set over a large pot of simmering water.
      • Use a steam oven
      • Wrap tortillas in damp paper towels or damp clean kitchen towel and microwave for a minute or until just soft and pliable.

      When assembling enchiladas I add sweet corn kernels for more texture and flavor. Frozen corn works just fine, and I use roasted corn when I can find it. You can also skip the corn.

      Basket of green tomatillos.
      Basket of green tomatillos.

      Tortilla Options

      Corn tortillas are traditional for chicken enchiladas and good if you eat gluten-free. I prefer organic corn tortillas because they are not GMO. Read labels for added ingredients like gums and choose one without if possible.

      Another option we enjoy is cassava tortillas. They are pretty fragile when making enchiladas but they taste great and are lighter than corn.

      Next time you feel like good Mexican food, look no further than your own kitchen.

      📖 Recipe

      chicken enchiladas | AFoodCentricLife.com

      Green Chicken Enchiladas

      Sally Cameron
      This is a client and family favorite recipe. Do it in steps by roasting the chicken breast and shredding the meat a day ahead or buying a store roasted chicken and shreding the meat. Make the sauce a day ahead as well or use a jarred salsa verde like Trader Joes. Before dinner, just assemble and bake.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 40 minutes mins
      Cook Time 40 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
      Course Main Course
      Cuisine Mexican
      Servings 4
      Calories 817 kcal

      Ingredients
        

      • 3 3 ½ cups shredded cooked chicken rotisserie
      • 4-5 cups tomatillo sauce recipe link below or store bottled
      • 1 cup frozen corn kernels thawed
      • ¼ cup chopped cilantro leaves plus more for garnish if desired
      • ¼ cup chopped green onions plus more for garnish if desired
      • 8 corn tortillas
      • 8 ounces shredded Mexican cheese blend
      • Salt and pepper to taste

      Instructions
       

      To Make the Sauce

      • Combine tomatillos, onion, jalapeno, garlic, water, oregano and spices in a medium saucepan. Bring almost to a boil, turn down heat to low, cover with a lid and cook until tomatillos are broken down and saucy, about 20 minutes.
      • Add cooked tomatillos to a blender and blend briefly to smooth it out. When blending hot liquids, take precaution. Fill blender only half full, place lid on top and a towel on top of the lid. Blend on low speed for a few seconds. Do in two batches for safety. Use tomatillo sauce immediately or cool completely and refrigerate for up to 4 days or freeze for several months.

      To Roast the Chicken

      • Pre-heat the oven to 375°F. Cover a rimmed baking sheet with parchment or foil. Place chicken breasts on the baking sheet and season with salt and pepper. Roast in oven until chicken reaches 160-165 degrees, about 30-40 minutes. Remove from oven and cool.  If you are going to complete the enchiladas now, turn the oven down to 350°F degrees. When chicken is cool enough to handle, remove skin and shred meat. You should have about 3 ½ cups. Save any extra for chicken salad or soft tacos.

      Assemble Enchiladas

      • In a large bowl, mix shredded chicken, corn, cilantro, green onions and about ½ cup of the tomatillo. Season with salt and pepper to taste.
      • Steam tortillas briefly to soften them making them easier to roll. Fill a large pot with a few inches of water. Place a steamer rack without the center handle in the pot. The water should reach just the bottom of the steamer. Place a lid on the pot and over medium heat heat until steam is coming out from under the lid. Add the tortillas and steam for approximately 4 minutes or until softened. See note at end for other ideas to steam tortillas.
      • Assemble the enchiladas. Place one cooked tortilla on a plate. Top with 1 tablespoon of tomatillo sauce, then about ⅓ cup of chicken mixture on top, then sprinkle with cheese. Roll enchilada and place in the prepared baking dish seam side down. Complete with the rest of the tortillas. Top the enchiladas with sauce (you may not need it all) and sprinkle with cheese. 

      Bake Enchiladas

      • Bake enchiladas covered with foil for 30 minutes, until cheese is melted and the enchiladas are hot throughout, 165°F. Take the foil off the last few minutes. To serve, garnish with a dollop of sour cream and a sprinkle of cilantro if desired.

      Notes

      How to steam tortillas.
      1. Use a large pot with a folding steamer rack, without the center handle.
      2. Use a bamboo steam set over a large pot of simmering water.
      3. Use a steam oven
      4. Wrap tortillas in damp paper towels and microwave for a minute or until just soft and pliable.
      Nutrition calculation does not include the tomatillo sauce as it would include the entire batch of sauce.  For salsa verde/tomatillo sauce nutrition numbers please see the post. ⅓ cup serving has 29 kcals. 

      Nutrition

      Calories: 817kcalCarbohydrates: 31gProtein: 74gFat: 44gSaturated Fat: 17gPolyunsaturated Fat: 7gMonounsaturated Fat: 16gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 228mgSodium: 625mgPotassium: 833mgFiber: 5gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 749IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 459mgIron: 3mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Chicken Bone Broth (Homemade)

      01/15/2026 by Sally Cameron 17 Comments

      Golden chicken bone broth in glass jars with carrots, celery, and parsley, cooling on the counter.

      If you've never made chicken bone broth at home, this is the place to start. Meaty chicken parts and bones simmer low and slow with classic vegetables and herbs, creating a rich, golden, gelatin-rich broth with a silky body you won't get from a carton. Make a big batch once, freeze it in jars, and you'll have instant upgrade power for soups, stews, risotto, and sipping.

      Jars of golden chicken bone broth on a wire cooling rack.

      Homemade chicken bone broth is easy to make. Once everything is in the pot, it mostly takes care of itself while the broth gently simmers and your house fills with that "something good is happening" smell. There's little babysitting-just check the water level occasionally adding boiling water as needed, then strain and chill. I'll walk you through the simple step-by-step process so you can keep jars of this gelatin-rich chicken bone broth recipe in your freezer for soups, stews, and sipping.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why Make Chicken Bone Broth

      • Control the ingredients - You decide exactly what goes in, especially the salt. I make bone broth without salt, so you can season each recipe later instead of being stuck with a salty boxed broth.
      • No preservatives or additives - Just chicken, vegetables, herbs, and water. No "natural flavors," no MSG, and no mystery ingredients.
      • Richer flavor and nutrition - A long, gentle simmer extracts deep chicken flavor and plenty of gelatin, creating a gelatin-rich chicken bone broth with a silky texture you don't get from most store-bought broth.
      • Make once, use for weeks (freezer-friendly) - Cook a big batch, cool it, portion into jars or containers, and freeze. You'll have homemade broth ready for chicken soup, risotto, cooking grains-or sipping straight when you want "warm mug therapy."

      Making risotto, like this pumpkin risotto, is a favorite way to use good homemade chicken bone broth. It adds rich flavor.

      Chef's Tip - Is it Chicken Broth or Chicken Stock?
      People use "broth" and "stock" interchangeably, but traditionally there's a difference. Broth is made with meaty chicken pieces (often with vegetables) and may be seasoned for sipping. Stock is made mostly from bones, simmered longer, and typically left unsalted because it's a cooking building block. I use a hybrid method-meaty chicken pieces plus bones (like backs) and chicken feet for collagen/gelatin, along with vegetables and herbs-so you get deep flavor and that gelatin-rich body. Call it broth or stock-either works here.

      Any soup recipe using broth, like this Greek avgolemono chicken soup, gains extra flavor from homemade broth.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Raw chicken parts and feet, herbs, carrot, onion, and celery for bone broth.
      • Chicken - Use a whole cut-up organic chicken or a mix of bone-in thighs and legs. Adding chicken feet gives the broth extra collagen and body. Ask your butcher if they sell chicken backs or other chicken bones. The feet may look a little creepy, but they help your broth set like jello.
      • Onion - Adds sweetness and depth, use brown or yellow onions, but not red (color).
      • Celery - Brings fresh, savory flavor and round out the classic broth base.
      • Carrots - Add gentle sweetness and helps give the broth its beautiful golden color.
      • Parsley - Stems and leaves add a fresh, herbal note and help brighten the flavor of a long-simmered broth.
      • Bay leaf - Use one or two bay leaves, fresh or dried, to add subtle, earthy depth.
      • Peppercorns - Whole black peppercorns season the broth gently as it simmers without making it spicy or muddy like ground pepper can.
      • Vinegar - Apple cider vinegar or white vinegar help extract minerals from the bones. Lemon juice or white wine work as well but are not quite as acidic.

      Please see the recipe card for exact measurements. Don't add salt to the broth-season the dish you're using it in instead. If you plan to sip it, add a pinch of salt to your mug after it's done.

      Chef's Note - Should I Peel the Onions for Chicken Bone Broth?
      For the broth, you can leave onion skins on or peel them-both work. Skins add deeper golden color and a slightly more complex, rustic flavor (just wash well), while peeled onions give a paler broth with a cleaner, milder taste. Onion skins also contain beneficial plant compounds (like quercetin), but they can occasionally add a faint bitter or astringent edge depending on the onions and simmer time. Bottom line: choose skins-on for color and depth, peeled for a cleaner finish.

      How to Make Chicken Bone Broth

      Chop onion, carrot, and celery roughly.
      1. Roughly chop the onion, carrot, celery.
      Add chicken with most skin removed, along with vegetables, herbs, vinegar, and peppercorns to pot.
      1. Remove as much skin from the chicken as possible, add everything to the pot and cover with cold water.
      Skimming impurities from chicken broth while it is simmering.
      1. As the broth heats up, impurities rise to the surface. Skim with a spoon and discard until it stops forming.
      Almonst finished deep golden chicken broth in a pot still with the vegetables.
      1. As the broth simmers over the hours, the water level will drop. Keep an electric tea kettle of hot water ready and add water as needed. Don't worry, it won't dilute the broth.
      Straining finished chicken broth through a mesh colander into a clean pot.
      1. Strain finished broth through a mesh colander. Discard spent bones, meat, and aromatics.
      Chilling a pot of golden bone chicken bone broth in an ice bath in the sink.
      1. Chill the strained chicken bone broth in a sink ice bath, in a clean pot, until 70°F or lower before refrigerating (covered) until the next day.

      In the morning, skim the solidified fat off the top. Use your chicken broth within three days or freeze in portions. Freeze in muffin tins for small measures, canning jars, mason jars, and Souper Cubes for easy stacking.

      Chef's Tip - For Even Clearer Broth
      For a slightly clearer broth, you can start with just the chicken, water, and vinegar. Bring it to a gentle simmer, skimming off the foam as it happens, then add the vegetables and herbs and continue simmering. Most of the time I add everything at once (as you see in the photos) because it's faster and still makes a delicious, golden broth.

      Bone Broth Tips & Troubleshooting

      • Simmer; don't boil - Keep your broth at a low simmer. Boiling or stirring creates cloudy broth. Just let it bubble away.
      • Skim the "scum" - The scum that forms when first simmering is simply impurities being released from bones and meat. Skim off and discard until it stops. Skimming gives you get a cleaner-tasting, clearer broth.
      • Adding vinegar - A little vinegar (1-2 tablespoons) helps release collagen and minerals from the bones so more goodness ends up in your broth. Add 20-30 minutes before simmering. Optional but beneficial. Lemon juice and white wine also work.
      • Low and slow - A low, slow simmer for a long duration (12 to 20 hours), is the primary driver of nutrient extraction and flavor (with or without vinegar).
      • Broth didn't gel - It's still perfectly usable, but if you want that nice jiggly texture when it's cold, next time add collagen-rich parts like chicken feet (the best), wings, or backs, and be sure you're keeping the broth at a gentle simmer long enough.
      • Strain gently - Use a fine-mesh strainer and let the broth drip through without pressing on the solids. Pressing can push sediment into your nice clear broth.
      • Cool down quickly - Use an ice bath to cool below 70°F before refrigerating.
      • Degrease - The next morning, scrape off the gelled fat from the top of the broth, then portion and refrigerate or freeze, with labels and dates.
      • No extra sink for ice bath - Use a cooler partially filled with ice and cold water, or a large bucket.

      Using Chicken Bone Broth

      Storage & Freezing

      Store chicken broth in the refrigerator, tightly covered and use within 4-5 days. For longer storage, freeze in jars or silicone freezer molds. Properly cooled and frozen, it keeps well for about 3 months. Label and date your containers so you actually use them. I freeze in 3 cup, 1 cup and ½ cup portions for different needs.

      Chicken Broth FAQs

      Should I add salt to my bone broth?

      In short, no. I recommend keeping bone broth unsalted. That way you control the seasoning when you use it in recipes and you won't end up with overly salty soups or sauces. Taste and season with salt when you're cooking with the broth, not when you're making it.

      How long should I simmer chicken bone broth?

      For the best flavor and body, I like to cook chicken bone broth at a very gentle simmer on the stovetop for 12-20 hours. Keep the heat low so you see just an occasional lazy bubble rather than a hard boil. This helps extract collagen and flavor without turning the broth cloudy. This recipe is scaled to make about 1 gallon (16 cups) of broth, which is an ideal big batch to cool and freeze in portions for the time invested.

      Why is my bone broth cloudy?

      Cloudy broth is usually from boiling too hard, not skimming the initial foam, or stirring a lot as it cooks. It's still perfectly safe and tasty-it just won't be as clear. To keep broth clearer, bring it up to a gentle simmer slowly, skim the scum early, and avoid boiling.

      What if my bone broth doesn't gel when chilled?

      Don't worry-broth that doesn't gel is still full of flavor and nutrients. It just means there wasn't quite as much collagen. Next time, add more collagen-rich parts (like feet, wings, or backs) and simmer a bit longer. You can still reduce a non-gelling broth on the stovetop to intensify flavor.

      Do I have to use organic chicken?

      Use the best quality chicken that fits your budget. I prefer organic or pasture-raised chicken for broth because you're extracting so much from the bones and skin over many hours of cooking. But if that isn't available, use what you can find-homemade broth from a conventional chicken is still far better than most boxed broth.

      Recipes Using Chicken Broth

      Chicken broth is the foundation of so many great soups, stews, and dishes like risotto. Try a few of these or check out the soup recipes index page for more ideas!

      • Ribollita in a gray pot.
        Italian Ribollita Soup (Ribollita Toscana)
      • A bowl of Greek avgolemono chicken soup with fresh dill in a white bowl.
        Greek Avgolemono Soup (Lemon Chicken Soup)
      • golden risotto Milanese with peas
        Saffron Risotto (Risotto Milanese)
      • A gray bowl of pumpkin risotto with a golden spoon and sage leaves.
        Creamy Pumpkin Risotto With Sage

      Did You Make Broth?

      If you make chicken bone broth, please leave a comment and let me know. I love hearing from you and your comments also help other readers. And please leave a start rating. Thanks for supporting my site.

      📖 Recipe

      Golden chicken bone broth in glass jars with carrots, celery, and parsley, cooling on the counter.

      Homemade Chicken Bone Broth

      Sally Cameron
      Making your own chicken broth is so much better than store bought. Although the simmer time is 12-24 hours, it's easy and mostly hands-off. The longer the simmer the more gelatinous your broth will be. Freeze for soups, stews, sauces, risottos and many uses.  
      4 from 3 votes
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 20 minutes mins
      Cook Time 20 hours hrs
      Cooling 1 hour hr
      Total Time 21 hours hrs 20 minutes mins
      Course Soup
      Cuisine American
      Servings 16 8-ounce serving, Yield 4 quarts
      Calories 7 kcal

      Equipment

      • 10-12 quart stockpot
      • Tea kettle regular or electric
      • Mesh colander

      Ingredients
        

      • 5 pounds chicken pieces and parts (thighs, legs, wings, backs) or whole chicken plus parts
      • 1 pound chicken feet or 1 more pound chicken pieces (optional)
      • 2 large celery ribs roughly chopped
      • 2 medium carrots scrubbed, roughly chopped
      • 1 medium onion roughly chopped
      • 1 large dried bay leaf
      • 1 handful parsley leaves and stems
      • ½ teaspoon black peppercorns
      • 6 sprigs fresh thyme
      • 1-2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar
      • 4 quarts filtered water
      • Extra boiling water as needed

      Instructions
       

      How to Cut up a Whole Chicken

      • If using a whole chicken, break it down into pieces with a sharp French knife, Chef's knife, or cleaver.  Cut off the leg and thigh pieces and cut them in half at the joint, then cut off the wings. Next, cut through the center breast bone of the chicken, splitting the body into two halves. Cut the breasts free and cut them in half. What's left is the body. Cut that in half crosswise. Poultry shears also help break it down more easily. Remove excess skin.

      Start the Broth

      • Add the chicken pieces to a large stock pot, about 10-12 quarts. Cover with cold water and bring to a simmer. As the chicken simmers, impurities will begin to rise to the top. It looks like a gray foamy scum. Skim it off and discard. Continue to skim and discard until its mostly gone.

      Long Simmer the Broth

      • Add the vegetables, peppercorns, thyme and vinegar. Keep the pot at a low simmer (just a few bubbles) for 20-24 hours, adding boiling water from a kettle as the water level gets low. The longer you simmer, the better the broth.

      Strain and Chill the Broth

      • Strain out the spent vegetables, meat, bones, and cool the broth in a large clean stainless steel pot in a sink filled with ice and water. Place a small rack or trivet under the pot to speed cooling. Stir occasionally to assist cooling. Cool to 70°F or below before covering and refrigerating. Refrigerate overnight.

      Use and Freezing

      • In the morning, skim off the solidified fat. Use broth within 3-4 days (refrigerated) or portion and freeze in small containers, labeled, for up to three months.

      Notes

      Cooling tip: Use stainless steel or glass for cooling-metal helps broth cool faster. Avoid plastic, which insulates and slows cooling (and hot liquids + plastic aren't a great combo). Cool quickly for best food safety. 

      Nutrition

      Serving: 8ouncesCalories: 7kcalCarbohydrates: 2gProtein: 1gFat: 1gSaturated Fat: 1gCholesterol: 1mgSodium: 18mgPotassium: 34mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 1283IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 12mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Easy Baked Crab Cakes (with canned crab)

      08/16/2011 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

      baked crab cakes

      A plate of baked crab cakes with a big green salad and a glass of chilled rose wine make for a wonderful impromptu summer dinner.  Sometimes I bake my crab cakes instead of pan-frying them. They are always a hit at my house and for catered parties.

      baked crab cakes
      Baked crab cakes on a plate with greens and sauce.

      As I cook most every night we rarely eat out. When we do, one of our favorite place makes fantastic crab cakes. While restaurants often use sweet pacific Dungeness crab, at insane prices a pound (when you can find it), it's a little pricey for an every day dinner. Good thing is you can make them at home for a lot less.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Canned Crab

      For homemade crab cakes, I use jumbo lump pasteurized crab available in tubs and cans. It's a lot more affordable than Dungeness. For far less you can enjoy crab cakes at home whenever the mood strikes.

      Appetizer or Full Size

      A pound of crab will make about 8-9, 2 ½ ounce crab cakes that will serve 2-4 people. It also makes about 18 mini-sized cocktail crab cakes for easy entertaining. Many recipes use Saltine crackers and I do too, but specifically the non-fat crackers. They do not contain any partially hydrogenated oils, a healthier choice.

      These days I use homemade gluten-free breadcrumbs or GF saltines.

      Spices

      Old Bay seasoning is traditional and Phillips Seafood Seasoning is good but not easy to find. I now make my own spice blend with smoked paprika, cumin, celery seed and other spices.

      The best thing about making your own spice blend is that you can adjust it to your taste preference. See this link for a homemade Old Bay recipe.

      Trick for Perfect Shape

      To get perfectly formed and portioned crab cakes I use a metal ring mold. For dinner size use a 2 ¼" (5.7cm) across the bottom edge.

      For cocktail size, use a smaller one, about 1″ - 1 ¼"" in diameter. My cutter set has 16 concentric circles. You can get similar sets on Amazon or in kitchen and restaurant supply stores.

      Formed crab cakes on a tray with parchment.

      Instructions

      Drain juices from the crab. Mix together Dijon mustard, dry mustard, egg, (mayonnaise and seasoning. Add to the crab and mix gently adding the crumbs.

      Pack the crab in the ring lightly but firmly. Put fingers in the center of the crab and gently lift off the ring. Place the crab cakes on a rimmed baking sheet lined with parchment or wax paper. 

      Cover with plastic film and refrigerate until ready to bake. They can be made several hours ahead.

      Formed crab cakes coated in crumbs.

      Bake

      To bake, coat the crab cakes with toasted breadcrumbs gently pressing the crumbs on. Place on a rimmed baking sheet topped with a wire rack and bake. The wire rack provides air circulation around the crab cakes so they get crisp. Bake until golden brown and hot.

      To Serve

      Serve with your favorite sauce; tartar sauce, cocktail sauce or make your own. I mix mayo (Vegenaise), finely chopped shallot, lemon zest and juice, capers, fresh chopped dill and parsley.

      With a crisp exterior from toasted breadcrumbs and a tender interior, these crab cakes are hard to beat.

      Another Seafood Appetizer

      For another easy seafood appetizer, make the roasted garlic shrimp. They were a standard appetizer at my catered parties and always disappeared quickly.

      📖 Recipe

      crab cakes | afoodcentriclife.com

      Baked Crab Cakes

      Sally Cameron
      For prefect crab cakes and portion control, use a ring mold to shape them. For entree size use a 2 ¼" (5.7cm) ring. For mini or cocktail size, use a smaller one, about 1″ - 1 ¼"". 
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 15 minutes mins
      Cook Time 15 minutes mins
      Chill time 45 minutes mins
      Total Time 1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
      Course Appetizer
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6
      Calories 247 kcal

      Ingredients
        

      • 3 slices sandwich bread each white, whole wheat or gluten-free
      • 2 teaspoons olive oil sub melted coconut oil, avocado oil
      • 1 pound pasteurized jumbo lump crabmeat
      • 6-7 tablespoons finely crushed non-fat Saltine crackers*
      • 2 tablespoons finely chopped chives
      • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
      • 2 teaspoons dry mustard
      • 1 large egg
      • 4 tablespoons Mayonnaise or Vegenaise
      • 2-3 teaspoons Old Bay or Phillips Seasoning or your own spice blend
      • Salt and pepper to taste

      Instructions
       

      For Homemade Bread Crumbs

      • Pre-heat oven to 325 degrees. Trim crusts from bread and tear into pieces. In a food processor fitted with steel blade, place bread and process to fine crumbs. Add 2 teaspoons oil and pulse to evenly combine. Place breadcrumbs on a rimmed baking sheet in a single layer and bake until golden brown, about 8-10 minutes. Cool.

      Crab Cakes

      • Drain any juices from the crab. Place crab in a medium bowl. Toss crab with Saltine crumbs and chives. Start with 6 tablespoons of cracker crumbs. If it seems wet, add another tablespoon.
      • In a small bowl mix together Dijon mustard, dry mustard, egg, Vegenaise (or mayonnaise) and seasoning. Add to the crab and mix gently. Taste and add more seasoning if you prefer.
      • With ring mold, pack in crab gently but firmly and smooth the top. Place crab cakes on a rimmed backing sheet lined with wax paper or parchment. Cover with plastic film and chill for 30-60 minutes, or several hours.
      • When ready to bake, pre-heat oven to 450 degrees. Gently coat crab cakes with toasted breadcrumbs. Place crab cakes on a rimmed baking sheet topped with a wire rack. Spray the rack with non-stick spray. Bake crab cakes until golden brown and hot, about 12 minutes.

      Notes

      To crush Saltines finely use a food processor or place in a Ziploc style bag and crush with a rolling pin. The non-fat variety do not have an partially hydrogenated oils.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 247kcalCarbohydrates: 18gProtein: 17gFat: 11gSaturated Fat: 2gCholesterol: 104mgSodium: 605mgPotassium: 245mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 89IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 111mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Pan Seared Halibut with Miso Butter

      02/11/2014 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

      Miso butter topped halibut on a bed of black rice in a gray bowl.

      Here is an easy and elegant halibut dish prepared in a snap. Pan seared halibut with miso butter. Make the rice ahead of time and re-heat, prep the asparagus in a minute to roast. You will have a healthy dinner on the table in just minutes. The savory miso-butter sauce is delicious as well as versatile. That perfect combination of sweet, savory, and umami all in one bite.

      Pan seared halibut with miso butter sauce in gray bowl atop forbidden black rice sprinkled with chopped chives.

      If your only experience with miso is the golden soup at a sushi bar, prepare to be amazed. With a savory, umami flavor, there is much more you can do with miso like this miso butter. Try it with fish or seared scallops. Here, I've paired it with fresh pan-seareed halibut. Other firm white fish works as well such as cod.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Like This Recipe

      • It's simple, fast, and healthy.
      • Use the miso butter with other fish and seafood such as shrimp and scallops.
      • A great meal for a busy week.

      Here's another easy halibut recipe served with a lemon-caper vinaigrette.

      Recipe Ingredients

      • Fish: Choose a fresh white fish such as halibut, cod. Monkfish and sea bass work too.
      • Garlic: Use granulated or powdered garlic.
      • Miso: Use what is called sweet white miso. It's the most mild miso flavor and easy to find.
      • Butter: Unsalted dairy butter or plant-based stick butter.
      • Oil: Just a little for the pan, use extra virgin olive oil, extra virgin coconut oil, or a healthy neutral oil.
      • Liquid: Dry sake, dry white wine, vegetable broth, or fish broth.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and black pepper.

      Chef's note: What is miso? Miso is a centuries-old, traditional Japanese seasoning, double fermented from whole soybeans into a paste. Miso is a living, fermented food containing natural digestive enzymes and other probiotic microorganisms which aid in digestion. Find it in the refrigerated dairy area of your grocery store and buy organic. If you eat gluten-free, be sure to read the label. Some miso is fermented with grain.

      Recipe Instructions

      Season fresh halibut fillets (or other white fish) with black pepper and granulated garlic. You won't need salt as miso is salty. Sear quickly in a non-stick pan with a little coconut oil until a golden crust is achieved. Turn fish over and spread with half of a sweet white miso and butter combination. You can use coconut butter or dairy butter. One clarification - use oil for the pan and butter with the miso for the paste/sauce.

      Splash in a bit of dry sake, white wine, or vegetable broth. Quickly cover pan with a lid and turn heat to low. The miso-butter melts over the top as the fish quickly finishes cooking, another 3-4 minutes. Cooking times will depend on the thickness of your fish fillets.

      Golden halibut in a gray bowl on black rice with miso butter sauce.

      Serving Suggestions

      Serve halibut over black rice or quinoa with a side of fresh roast asparagus or steamed snap or snow peas. Create a sauce using the miso butter. Remove the fish to a plate and whisk with the pan juices to create a sauce. Alternatively toss the extra miso with hot rice.

      More Seafood Recipes

      For more recipes with fish and shellfish, please check out the recipes page for fish and seafood.

      • Close up of a platter of salmon filets with lemon and herbs on a table.
        How to Make Steamed Salmon
      • baked lemon shrimp scampi
        Easy Baked Shrimp Scampi
      • Seared scallops with white wine
        Scallops with White Wine Sauce
      • Roast halibut with tomatoes.
        Baked Halibut with Roasted Cherry Tomatoes

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make pan seared halibut with miso butter, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      Miso butter topped halibut on a bed of black rice in a gray bowl.

      Pan Seared Halibut with Miso Sauce

      Sally Cameron
      Sweet white miso and either coconut butter or dairy butter make an incredible savory sauce for topping seared fish. Its a quick, easy and healthy recipe that works with halibut or other firm, white fish filets, as well as seared scallops. Serve with Forbidden black rice and a green vegetable such as roast asparagus or steamed snap or snow peas.
      5 from 3 votes
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Cook Time 10 minutes mins
      Total Time 20 minutes mins
      Course Entree, fish
      Cuisine Asian
      Servings 4
      Calories 239 kcal

      Equipment

      • Non-stick pan with lid

      Ingredients
        

      • 1 ¼ pounds halibut filet or other white fish
      • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
      • ½ teaspoon granulated garlic
      • 2 tablespoons sweet white miso  soft at room temperature
      • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter dairy or coconut, soft at room temperature
      • 2 teaspoons coconut oil for the pan
      • ½ cup dry sake white wine, vegetable or fish broth

      Optional Garnish

      • 1 tablespoon chopped chives

      Instructions
       

      • Cut fish into four equal portions and season with black pepper and granulated garlic. Mix together miso and butter into a smooth paste.
      • Heat a non-stick pan over medium heat and add coconut oil. Place fish top side down into pan and sear until a golden crust forms. Turn fish over and spread half of the miso-butter paste on top of the filets. Splash in the sake or broth and quickly cover the pan with a lid. Fish will steam finish in 2-4 minutes depending on the thickness as the miso butter melts on top. Fish is done when a digital thermometer reads 145°F.
      • When fish is done, remove to a plate and keep warm. Use other half of miso butter to whisk with pan juices into a sauce or toss with hot rice.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 239kcalCarbohydrates: 3gProtein: 28gFat: 10gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 85mgSodium: 416mgPotassium: 667mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 311IUVitamin C: 0.4mgCalcium: 21mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Oven Baked Chicken Wings

      01/13/2026 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

      platter of oven baked chicken wings piled high with a buffalo ranch dressing in a small bowl.

      Oven baked chicken wings are my go-to when I want wings that are crispy, well-seasoned, and hard to resist-without air frying or firing up the grill. Baked at high heat, they cook evenly and develop that roasted skin with crispy edges wing lovers love. Season them with my homemade dry rub (or your own) for big flavor, or keep it classic with salt and pepper-either way, these wings are perfect for a crowd, game day, or an easy weeknight dinner.

      A platter of crisp seasoned oven baked chicken wings with carrots, celery and sauces.

      Whenever I roast a whole chicken, I'm the person who "quality checks" (devours) the wings before the carving even starts. These oven baked chicken wings are perfect for Super Bowl spreads and game day, but they're just as great for weekend hangouts, cookouts, or any night you want something fun and unfussy. Add buffalo sauce or Buffalo Ranch Dip, plus blue cheese, celery, and carrots, and you're ready to serve.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love These Oven Baked Chicken Wings

      • Easy party wings - Feeds a crowd, scales up fast, no messy frying.
      • No fryer, no grill, no drama - Just an oven, sheet pan, and wire rack.
      • Sauce options - Serve with buffalo sauce on the side, buffalo ranch dressing, or blue cheese dressing.
      • Crispy wings - High heat roasting, crisp skin, and juicy meat.

      Chef's Tip - Baking Soda vs. Baking Powder for Crispy Wings
      Baking soda increases the surface pH of chicken skin, which boosts browning and helps wings get crispy in the oven. Baking powder contains baking soda plus added acids and starch; it can add crispness, but the results are different and can taste slightly "off" if you use too much. For crispy baked chicken wings, use baking soda sparingly and measure it as written.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      A bowl of raw chicken wings, oil, spices, and baking soda to make oven wings.
      • Chicken wings - See buying notes below for chicken wing options.
      • Seasoning - Use my spiced dry rub blend, your favorite rub, classic salt & pepper, or lemon pepper.
      • Oil - Helps the wings brown evenly and blends. Use a neutral healthy oil or avocado oil spray.
      • Baking soda - A small amount mixed into the dry rub helps dry the skin and promotes crispier oven-baked wings. Baking soda, not powder.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

      Chef's Tip - Buying Chicken Wings
      Most stores sell "party wings," a mix of flats and drumettes, but they're often on the small side and skimpy on meat. I prefer to buy whole wings and cut them at the joint myself with sturdy kitchen shears (poultry shears). You'll get larger, meatier pieces this way. Some stores also sell just flats or just drumettes, so choose the style you like and check what's available at your local market.

      How to Make Oven Baked Chicken Wings

      Pre-heat the oven to 425°F. Set a wire rack over a rimmed baking sheet lined with parchment for easier clean up.

      Cutting whole chicken wings into flats and drumettes with kitchen shears for baked wings.
      1. For whole wings, cut them apart at the joint with poultry shears, and snip the little inside wing shape of fat.
      Drying chicken wings well on paper towels.
      1. Dry the wings really well with paper towels.
      Chicken wing parts being oiled before seasoning, in a glass bowl.
      1. Toss wings with 2 teaspoons of oil or use avocado spray, and lightly spray.
      Chicken wing flats and drumettes seasoned with dry rub before baking.
      1. Mix the dry tub and baking soda, then toss the wings with the seasoning or shake in a zip bag to coat.
      Party wings ready for baking arranged on a wire rack over a sheet pan.
      1. Arrange chicken wings on a lightly sprayed wired rack, nice side down first.
      Oven baked chicken wings finished baking to a crisp golden brown.
      1. Bake chicken wings at 425°F for 35-50 minutes, flipping once at 20-25 minutes. Start checking at 35 minutes. Wings are done when they're deeply browned and crisp and register 180-200°F internally.

      Serving Suggestions

      Pile the baked wings onto a platter and serve with your favorite buffalo sauce, buffalo ranch or blue cheese dressing, plus crisp celery and carrot sticks. This keeps the wings crispy (the whole point) and lets everyone choose their heat level. If you'd rather sauce them, lightly brush a few wings and leave the rest plain so you've got options for all your guests.

      Can I make these wings ahead of time?
      They're best fresh out of the oven, but you can make wings ahead and reheat baked wings to keep them crispy. Reheat on a wire rack in a 350°F oven until hot and crisp again, about 15-20 minutes. Avoid the microwave-it softens the skin.

      Recipe FAQs

      How do you get oven baked chicken wings crispy?

      Dry the wings very well with paper towels, bake them on a wire rack so air can circulate, and use high heat. A small amount of baking soda mixed into the seasoning boosts browning and helps the skin crisp-just measure it and use it sparingly.

      Do I have to use baking soda?

      No. It helps wings crisp and brown more deeply, but they'll still be good without it-just a little less crisp.

      Can I use whole wings instead of flats and drumettes?

      Yes. Whole wings are often meatier and can be baked as-is or cut at the joint into drumettes and flats with kitchen shears. Larger wings may need a few extra minutes-cook until deeply browned and 180-200°F internally.

      How many wings should I plan per person?

      Plan on about ½ pound per person for appetizer/party wings. Three pounds serves about 6 people; four pounds serves about 8, depending on appetites. For a meal, figure ¾ pound - 1 pound per person.

      How long do you bake chicken wings at 425°F?

      At 425°F, wings typically take 35-50 minutes, flipping once at 20-25 minutes.

      More Great Appetizer Recipes

      From garlicky baked shrimp and homemade smoked salmon, to deviled eggs and artichoke dip, check out the appetizer recipe index page for more ideas!

      • A small appetizer plate of golden baked shrimp on wooden skewers with cocktail sauce.
        Simple Baked Shrimp With Lemon Garlic Marinade
      • Flaked smoked salmon from a pellet grill on a serving board with lemons.
        Smoked Salmon on a Pellet Grill
      • deviled eggs 2022
        Best Deviled Eggs Recipe (Step by Step)

      📖 Recipe

      platter of oven baked chicken wings piled high with a buffalo ranch dressing in a small bowl.

      Oven Baked Chicken Wings

      Sally Cameron
      Crispy-skinned and irresistible, oven baked chicken wings are great for game days, holidays, parties, and just plain fun.
      5 from 2 votes
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Course Appetizer
      Cuisine American
      Servings 4 as an appetizer
      Calories 296 kcal

      Equipment

      • 1 Rimmed baking sheet half sheet size
      • 1 Wire cooling rack
      • Parchment paper for easier clean-up, or use aluminum foil

      Ingredients
        

      Chicken wings

      • 2 pounds chicken wings SEE NOTES BELOW
      • 3 tablespoons your favorite dry rub recipe link for my rub is below
      • 1 ½ teaspoons baking soda
      • 2 teaspoons neutral high heat oil or avocado oil spray
      • ½ teaspoon salt **if the rub is salt-free

      Instructions
       

      Get ready to bake

      • Pre-heat the oven to 425°. Line a baking sheet with parchment or foil, place a wire rack on top.

      Trim wings

      • If you purchased whole wings, trim off the wing tips with poultry shears or kitchen shears, then cut them at the joint to separate. Also trim that that little wing-shaped piece of fat inside the "v". Next, pat wings totally dry with paper towels.

      Season wings

      • Combine the dry rub and the baking soda.m Add salt if the rub does not have salt. Add dry wings to a medium bowl and toss lightly with oil or avocado spray. Toss with the spice mixture. Alternatively add to a zip bag, and toss with the spices to coat. Wings don't need a heavy coating, just an even one.
      • Lay wings flat on the wire rack leaving some room for air circulation. Start wings "pretty side" down so they finish skin-side up for the best browning and presentation.

      Bake wings

      • Bake until deeply browned and crisp, 35-50 minutes, turning every 20-25 minutes. Ovens vary, so start checking at 35 minutes. Wings are done when they register 180°F-200°F internally. For a little extra shine at the end, give them a quick, light spray of avocado oil (optional).

      To serve wings

      • Pile wings on a platter and serve with carrot sticks, celery sticks, radishes, and other veggies, plus buffalo sauce and my Buffalo Ranch Dip, or blue cheese dressing.

      Notes

      For making the wings ahead, they're best fresh out of the oven, but you can reheat them on a wire rack in a hot oven until crisp again. Avoid the microwave-it softens the skin.
      Buying chicken wings: Most stores sell "party wings," a mix of flats and drumettes, but they're often on the small side and skimpy on meat. I prefer to buy whole wings and cut them at the joint myself with sturdy kitchen shears (poultry shears). You'll get larger, meatier pieces this way. Some stores also sell just flats or just drumettes, so choose the style you like and check what's available at your local market.
      Scalable formula per 1 lb wings for a crowd:
      • 1½ tablespoon dry rub
      • ¾ teaspoon baking soda
      • light oil spray (or ½-1 teaspoon oil)
       
       

      Nutrition

      Calories: 296kcalCarbohydrates: 3gProtein: 23gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 5gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 94mgSodium: 504mgPotassium: 311mgFiber: 2gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 2766IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 27mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Greek Avgolemono Soup (Lemon Chicken Soup)

      01/06/2026 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      A bowl of Greek avgolemono chicken soup with fresh dill in a white bowl.

      This Greek avgolemono soup recipe is a classic, nourishing Greek lemon chicken soup-perfect for cold winter days with bright lemon flavor. Avgolemono is finished with eggs and lemon juice gently tempered with hot broth, then whisked back into the pot. The result is a wonderfully creamy texture without a drop of cream, with its signature velvety body and pale golden color. Add tender orzo (gluten-free if you like) and a shower of fresh dill.

      Greek lemon chicken soup, called avgolemono, in a white bowl with lemon slice and fresh dill.

      I fell in love with avgolemono at a little soup spot years ago. One spoonful and I was hooked. I've always loved lemon (my two trees happily prove the point), and this Greek lemon chicken soup shows lemon at its best: brightening the broth, lifting the flavors, and balancing savory chicken. The creamy texture comes from tempered eggs, not dairy, and fresh dill adds that final Greek note. Finish it with orzo-gluten-free or traditional-and you've got a bowl that truly satisfies.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Greek Avgolemono Soup Recipe Highlights

      • Bright, lemony flavor - Wakes up classic chicken soup.
      • Nourishing and satisfying - Protein + broth + orzo = comfort.
      • Creamy without cream - Thanks to the egg-lemon tempering method.
      • Easy & adaptable - Gluten-free orzo option.
      • Uses leftover chicken - Perfect for roast chicken leftovers or rotisserie chicken.

      For another terrific chicken soup, try this chicken vegetable soup recipe.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Ingredients for Greek avgolemono soup in prep bowls on the counter.
      • Chicken - Cooked, shredded chicken breast (or rotisserie) keeps this fast and easy.
      • Onion - Part of the aromatic flavor base.
      • Celery - Adds savory, earthy depth and classic soup aroma.
      • Carrot - Brings natural sweetness and balance to the lemon.
      • Garlic - For flavor and a subtle savory backbone.
      • Broth - Use low-sodium chicken broth, homemade broth is best.
      • Lemon - The signature bright acidity that makes avgolemono what is is.
      • Eggs - Create the soup's silky, creamy texture when tempered into hot broth.
      • Fresh dill - Adds that unmistakable Greek finish; fresh is worth it here.
      • Orzo - Rice shaped pasta. Gives the soup substance; use regular or gluten-free orzo as needed.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

      Try this recipe to make easy roast chicken breast for the soup! Cook once eat twice, dinner one night and soup the next.

      Substitutions & Variations

      • Using raw chicken instead: If you prefer, you can simmer a 1-1¼ pounds bone-in, skinless chicken breast directly in the broth until cooked through, then shred and return to the pot. This adds flavor but takes a little longer. Cut the breast in half crosswise for faster cooking. After cooking, remove bones and shred, then add back to the pot.
      • Swap the orzo for cooked rice, either white or brown, or another tiny pasta shape.

      If you love lemon like I do, try this lemon blender marinade for chicken. It's one of my go-to recipes.

      Chef's Tip - Tempering: Keeping Avgolemono Silky
      Whisk the eggs and lemon juice together until smooth. Then temper: slowly drizzle in about 1 cup of hot broth while whisking constantly to gently warm the mixture. Once it's warm and fluid, whisk it back into the pot off heat (or on very low). Don't let the soup boil after adding the egg-lemon mixture-gentle heat keeps it creamy and velvety and not curdled or scrambled.

      How to Make Avgolemono Soup

      Cooked orzo pasta in a sieve over a bowl being rinsed and drained.
      1. Cook orzo, drain and rinse in cool water, toss with a tiny bit of olive oil. Best to cook it separately
      Sautéing onions and garlic in a dutch oven.
      1. Saute onions in olive oil until soft, 3-4 minutes on med-low, then add garlic for 1 minute longer.
      Onion, carrots, celery , and garlic cooking in a large pot.
      1. Add the carrot and celery and cook until softened, 3-4 minutes.
      A pot of golden chicken broth with cooked vegetables for a soup base.
      1. Add the broth and simmer 5 minutes to blend flavors.
      Whisking eggs and lemon juice together in a glass bowl.

      5. Whisk 2 whole eggs + 1 egg yolk with lemon juice until smooth.

      Tempering eggs, broth and lemon juice together with a silver whisk.

      6. Slowly whisk in 1 cup of hot chicken broth from the pot (tempering) so eggs do not scramble when added to the soup.

      Pouring egg-broth-lemon juice mixture into the sop base.

      7. Add the tempered eggs into the soup and stir.

      A golden creamy soup being cooked for Greek avgolemono soup.

      8. Stir soup until smooth over low heat. Do not boil or it might scramble.

      Shredded chicken breast being added to avgolemono lemon chicken soup.

      9. Stir in the chicken and orzo.

      A bowl of Greek avgolemono chicken soup with fresh dill in a white bowl.

      10. Garnish with fresh chopped dill and a little extra lemon and enjoy!

      Serving Suggestions

      Avgolemono soup is best served warm, garnished with fresh herbs like parsley or dill, and can be accompanied by toasted garlic bread or a light Greek salad. Serve with lemon wedges for a more lemony taste if preferred.

      Storing Greek Lemon Chicken Soup

      Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat gently over low heat-do not boil as it will effect the silky texture and the tempered egg-lemon mixture.

      Can avgolemono soup be frozen?
      Freezing lemon chicken soup is not recommended. The egg-lemon mixture can separate and become grainy when thawed.

      Lemon Chicken Soup FAQs

      What is avgolemono soup?

      Avgolemono is a traditional Greek soup finished with a mixture of eggs and lemon juice that's gently tempered with hot broth, creating a silky, creamy texture without any cream.

      Why didn't my avgolemono turn creamy?

      The egg-lemon mixture likely wasn't tempered slowly enough, or the soup was too hot. Whisk the eggs and lemon together, slowly add hot broth to warm them, then stir back into the soup over low heat. Do not boil after adding.

      Can avgolemono soup be made ahead?

      Yes. For best results, make the soup base ahead and store it without the pasta. Add the cooked orzo and gently reheat just before serving to keep the texture light and silky.

      Can I add more lemon?

      Yes. Lemon flavor varies by preference and by the acidity of the lemons themselves (such as Meyer lemon vs Eureka). Taste and adjust with more lemon juice at the end if needed.

      More Great Soup Recipes!

      From creamy smooth soups to hearty options that are almost a meal themselves, check out the soups recipe index for more inspiration!

      • A bowl of creamy, golde leek and potato soups garnished with croutons and olive oil.
        Leek and Potato Soup (No Cream)
      • A dutch oven full of chicken minestrone soup with a bowl on the side.
        Hearty Chicken Minestrone Soup
      • A gray bowl of chunky leek mushroom soup with a spoon beside bowl.
        Creamy Leek and Mushroom Soup Recipe
      • Gray bowl with bean and kale soup topped with parmesan and basil.
        Hearty Tuscan White Bean Soup

      Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this Greek avgolemono soup, please comment and let me know how you liked it. I love hearing from you and your comments are enjoyed by other readers. And please leave a star rating! Thanks for supporting my site.

      📖 Recipe

      A bowl of Greek avgolemono chicken soup with fresh dill in a white bowl.

      Greek Avgolemono Soup Recipe (Lemon Chicken Soup)

      Sally Cameron
      No ratings yet
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Course Soup
      Cuisine Greek
      Servings 4 Yield 2 quarts
      Calories 454 kcal

      Equipment

      • Large Dutch oven or soup pot 5 ½ - 6 quarts

      Ingredients
        

      • ¾ cup gluten free orzo pasta (6 oz dry) wheat orzo note below
      • 1 ½ tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
      • 1 cup chopped onion
      • 2 large garlic cloves finely chopped and smeared to a paste or microplaned
      • ½ cup finely chopped celery
      • ½ cup finely chopped carrot
      • 5 cups good quality chicken broth, low sodium preferably homemade
      • 1 large bay leaf fresh or dried
      • 2 cups shredded cooked chicken 11 ounces
      • 3 large eggs use 2 whole eggs + 1 extra yolk
      • 3-4 tablespoons fresh squeezed lemon juice
      • 1 ½ tablespoons fresh chopped dill
      • ½ teaspoon sea salt
      • ¼ teaspoon black pepper optional

      Instructions
       

      Cook the pasta

      • Start by cooking the orzo according to package directions. Drain and rinse under cool water to stop the cooking process and remove excess starch. Save for adding to the soup, adding a tiny bit of olive oil to the pasta so it does not stick together in a clump.

      Start the soup: cook the vegetables

      • Heat the olive oil in a pot over medium heat. Add the onion and cook until soft, 3-4 minutes. Add the garlic and cook 1 minute. Add the celery and carrot; cook until softened, 3-4 minutes.

      Add the broth

      • Add broth to the pot and the bay leaf. Simmer for 5-10 minutes to blend the flavors and heat the broth. Add the salt (taste first as broth salt levels vary widely unless homemade). Turn the heat down to low before tempering the eggs (so they do not scramble).

      Temper the eggs

      • Whisk 2 whole eggs plus the extra yolk until light and frothy, then whisk in the lemon juice. While whisking constantly, slowly ladle 1 cup of hot broth from the pot into the egg-lemon mixture until it's very warm. A few vegetable bits are fine-just aim for mostly broth.

      Add the avgolemono (eggs and lemon)

      • With the pot on LOW, slowly pour the warm egg-lemon mixture into the soup while stirring constantly. Do not boil.

      Add the chicken and pasta to serve

      • Add the shredded chicken and cooked orzo; heat gently until warmed through. Do not boil or get the soup too hot (because of the eggs).

      Make any adjustments

      • Taste and adjust with more lemon juice, salt and pepper. Remove bay leaf before serving. Add the dill off the heat for the freshest flavor.

      Notes

      Cooking the orzo separately keeps the soup light and silky and makes leftovers much better the next day.
      Rinse pasta after cooking: You can rinse the cooked orzo under cold water to stop the cooking process and remove excess starch, which helps prevent it from clumping in the soup.
      Add pasta at the End: Stir the pre-cooked orzo into the soup just before serving, only heating it through for a few minutes, to ensure the best texture. Do not boil the soup after adding the delicate egg-lemon (avgolemono) mixture, as this could cause the eggs to curdle. 
      Orzo doubles or triples in quantity from the raw volume. Wheat generally triples and the gluten-free generally doubles. So ½ cup of wheat orzo = about 1 ½ cups of cooked orzo, and ¾ cup of GF orzo = about 1 ½ cup cooked.
      Nutrition note: Nutrition is calculated using gluten-free orzo (measured by weight). If you swap wheat orzo or change the amount of pasta/broth, the numbers will vary slightly.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 2cupsCalories: 454kcalCarbohydrates: 42gProtein: 35gFat: 17gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 198mgSodium: 538mgPotassium: 647mgFiber: 2gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 2980IUVitamin C: 9mgCalcium: 66mgIron: 3mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Shrimp Tom Yum Soup

      04/11/2014 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      Thai shrimp soup called Tom Yum in bowls with shrimp, jalapenos, cilantro, and limes.

      Perfumed with aromatic lemongrass and ginger, bright with fresh lime, and warmed by a touch of jalapeño heat, this is my version of classic Thai shrimp tom yum soup. It's beautiful in the bowl and even better on the spoon, and it comes together in under 30 minutes for a quick but healthy meal. Make it mild or make it spicy-either way, it's light, fresh, and seriously delicious.

      Brothy shrimp Tom Yum soup in rustic bowls with chile peppers, vegetables, and limes.
      Thai Shrimp Soup

      When the days are chilly, gray, or just plain dreary, there's nothing like a bowl of something warm and fragrant. I first fell in love with this soup in culinary school, training with a Singaporean chef who taught me how simple ingredients-lemongrass, ginger, lime, chiles-can create incredible depth of flavor without feeling heavy. This version keeps all of that freshness and lightness, but is streamlined for home cooks: healthy, naturally gluten-free, and easy enough to make on a weeknight.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Shrimp Tom Yum Soup Highlights

      • Light but full of flavor - Bright lemongrass, ginger, lime, and a little chile heat give you big flavor.
      • Quick and weeknight-friendly - Ready in about 30 minutes, so it fits into a busy day.
      • Fresh and healthy - Naturally gluten-free, broth-based, and packed with lean protein and vegetables.
      • Easy to customize - Make it mild or spicy and add extra veggies if you like-very forgiving and flexible.

      If you enjoy these flavors, you might also like my lemongrass chicken recipe.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      • Coconut oil - pairs well with Thai flavors, use cold pressed virgin coconut oil.
      • Lemongrass - Perfumes the soup with bright, citrusy aroma.
      • Garlic - Builds a savory backbone and deepens the flavor.
      • Ginger - Grated fresh ginger adds warm, peppery zing and lifts the whole soup.
      • Jalapeño - Seeded and finely chopped for gentle, adjustable heat.
      • Broth - Chicken or vegetable broth, good-quality or homemade broth makes a big difference.
      • Shrimp - Medium shrimp, cleaned and deveined, add lean protein. If frozen, thaw fully and pat dry.
      • Mushrooms - Shiitakes, for umami depth and a tender, "meaty" texture.
      • Roma tomatoes - Seeded and chopped small to add gentle acidity, sweetness, and color.
      • Snow peas - Add fresh green crunch.
      • Limes - Zested and juiced; perfumes the broth and provides the classic sour note of Tom Yum.
      • Fish sauce - Optional but recommended for salty, savory Thai-style umami and depth.
      • Cilantro - Chopped fresh leaves stirred in at the end for herbal brightness and color.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • No shitake mushrooms - Use white or brown (cremini) mushrooms.
      • Spicier - Use hotter peppers such as serrano or of course, Thai chilies.
      • Milder soup - Use half a jalapeño (or skip it).

      Chef's Tip - How to Work With Lemongrass
      Lemongrass is a pale green stalk used a lot in Thai and Vietnamese cooking. It has an exotic, lemony scent with a hint of ginger, like nothing else. You'll usually find it in the produce section near the herbs, or in Asian markets. To use it, trim off the root end and any tough outer layers (if not pre-trimmed), then use the tender inner part. For this soup, the easiest method is to grate it on a Microplane so it almost melts into the broth-no fibrous pieces, just fragrant, citrusy flavor in every spoonful.

      How to Make Shrimp Tom Yum Soup

      1. Sauté aromatics - Warm coconut oil in a pot, then gently cook the lemongrass, garlic, ginger, and jalapeño until fragrant.
      2. Simmer the broth - Add the chicken or vegetable broth, bring to a simmer, and let the flavors infuse for a few minutes.
      3. Add shrimp and veggies - Stir in the shrimp, mushrooms, tomatoes, and snow peas and cook just until the shrimp turn pink and the vegetables are tender.
      4. Finish the soup - Remove from the heat and add lime zest and juice, fish sauce (if using), and cilantro.
      5. Taste and serve - Adjust lime and heat to your liking, then ladle into bowls and serve with extra lime on the side.
      Thai shrimp soup called Tom Yum in bowls with shrimp, jalapenos, cilantro, and limes.
      Thai Shrimp Soup

      Chef's Tip - Buying and Using Fish Sauce
      If you've never cooked with fish sauce, it can be a little foreign to a Western palate. It smells a bit strong and "fishy" in the bottle, but in the soup it adds salty, savory umami and a deep, rounded flavor you can't quite get any other way. Start with a small splash, taste, and add more only if you like. Use a good-quality Vietnamese fish sauce (the best brand is Red Boat) made with just anchovies and salt, found in the Asian foods aisle.

      Serving Tom Yum

      Serve Shrimp Tom Yum Soup hot in low, wide bowls so you get a little of everything in each spoonful-broth, shrimp, mushrooms, and veggies. I like to garnish with extra cilantro and lime wedges at the table so everyone can adjust the sourness to their taste. For a more filling meal, serve it with a side of steamed jasmine rice or a simple green salad.

      Storing and Re-Heating

      This soup is best enjoyed freshly made because shrimp can easily overcook when reheated. If you do have leftovers, refrigerate them in an airtight container for up to 1 day and reheat very gently over low heat just until the shrimp are warmed through-do not boil. I don't recommend freezing this soup, as the shrimp and vegetables lose their texture.

      If you know ahead of time that you'll want leftovers, you can cook the broth and vegetables first, then add the shrimp only to the portions you're serving and keep the extra broth separate in the fridge. Add fresh shrimp and simmer just a few minutes when you reheat.

      Two bowls of Thai shrimp soup on a wooden table with a small bowl of lime wedges.
      Thai Shrimp Soup

      Recipe FAQs

      Can I use frozen shrimp?

      Yes. Frozen shrimp work well here-just thaw them completely in the refrigerator and pat them dry before adding to the soup. They'll cook quickly in the hot broth.

      Can I make this soup ahead?

      You can make the broth and vegetables a day ahead, then cool and refrigerate. For the best texture, add the shrimp and snow peas when you reheat the soup just before serving so they don't overcook.

      What can I use instead of fish sauce?

      If you don't want to use fish sauce, you can add a splash of tamari or coconut aminos for a gentler umami flavor, then adjust the salt to taste. The soup will still be delicious-just a little less "classic" in its Thai flavor profile.

      If You Make This Soup

      Please leave me a comment, I love hearing from you and how you enjoyed Tom Yum. Your comments help other readers too. Thanks for supporting my site!

      📖 Recipe

      Tom Yum Thai Soup With Shrimp

      Sally Cameron
      Yum is what you will say and when make this easy Thai-inspired soup called Tom Yum. Colorful, flavorful, easy and healthy, it's a light soup, nice for lunch or dinner. This recipe doubles easily. 
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Cook Time 10 minutes mins
      Total Time 20 minutes mins
      Course Soup
      Cuisine Asian, Thai
      Servings 4
      Calories 302 kcal

      Equipment

      • A large pot for the soup

      Ingredients
        

      • 1 tablespoon unrefined coconut oil
      • 2 tablespoons finely grated lemongrass use a microplane
      • 3-4 large garlic cloves finely chopped
      • 2 tablespoons finely grated ginger
      • 1 jalapeño pepper seeded and chopped fine
      • 2 quarts chicken or vegetable broth 8 cups, preferably homemade
      • 1 pound medium shrimp cleaned and deveined
      • 8 ounces shitake mushrooms white or brown will work, thinly sliced
      • 2 large Roma tomatoes seeded and chopped small
      • 8 ounces snow peas quarter pound, sliced thin crosswise
      • 2 limes zested and juiced
      • 2-3 teaspoons fish sauce optional
      • 1 tablespoon chopped cilantro leaves

      Instructions
       

      • Heat oil in a medium pot over medium low heat.  And add lemongrass, garlic, ginger and chili pepper. Cook until softened and fragrant,  about 2 minutes.
      • Add broth and bring to a boil. Turn broth down to low (simmer) and add shrimp, mushrooms, tomatoes, and snow peas. Simmer until shrimp turn pink and vegetables are tender, just a few minutes. Add lime juice and zest, fish sauce and cilantro. Serve in low wide bowls.

      Notes

      • If you are heat sensitive use half the chili and serve some fresh to be added if you want more heat.
      • If you are a chili head and love heat, buy fresh Thai chiles instead of jalapeños, but be careful!
      • To make this a heartier soup, add cooked brown rice or udon noodles in the bottom of the bowl and pour broth, shrimp and vegetables over the top.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 302kcalCarbohydrates: 23gProtein: 37gFat: 9gSaturated Fat: 5gCholesterol: 286mgSodium: 1506mgPotassium: 1043mgFiber: 5gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 1226IUVitamin C: 66mgCalcium: 237mgIron: 6mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Ham and Cheese Frittata

      12/23/2025 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      A golden cheesy frittata in a cast iron skillet sprinkled with parmesan and chopped parsley.

      This ham and cheese frittata is an easy, oven-baked frittata that comes together in minutes and bakes up golden and full of flavor. Naturally gluten-free and protein-packed, it's perfect for brunch, weekend guests, meal prep, or a fast dinner. One bowl, one skillet, zero fuss-and you can easily customize the cheese and fillings.

      A golden puffed ham and cheese frittata in a cast iron skillet with parmesan on the side.

      Because my husband's favorite omelet is ham and cheese, I created this easy ham and cheese frittata recipe to take those same classic flavors and turn them into something shareable, sliceable, and effortless. Whisk everything together, pour it into a cast-iron skillet, and let the oven do the work. It's the perfect answer when you want the comfort of an omelet but need to feed more than one person-especially on busy mornings or holiday weekends.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Ham and Cheese Frittata Highlights

      • Prep-ahead friendly - Dice the ham, grate the cheese, and cook any vegetables ahead so all you have to do is whisk, assemble, and bake.
      • One-pan convenience - Cook, bake, and serve from the same oven-safe skillet for easy cleanup.
      • Crowd-pleasing - Familiar flavors, pretty presentation, and satisfying protein make it a hit with family or guests.

      What You'll Need

      Ham and cheese frittata ingredients in prep bowls on a counter.
      • Eggs - The base of all frittatas for a tender, custardy structure.
      • Half-and-half - Adds richness and keeps the eggs soft and creamy. Whole milk works too. Skip low fat to avoid a rubbery or watery frittata.
      • Olive oil or unsalted butter - Used for sautéing the aromatics and preventing sticking; butter adds richness, olive oil keeps it lighter.
      • Leek - Mild, sweet onion flavor that enhances the eggs without overpowering the ham and cheese. Shallot works too, or finely chopped white onion.
      • Ham - Savory, salty bites throughout the frittata; ideal for using leftover holiday ham or a good-quality ham steak. Check it's GF if needed.
      • Cheddar cheese - Classic melty flavor that pairs perfectly with ham. Buy a block and grate it yourself.
      • Gruyère cheese - Adds nutty depth, great melt, and keeps the flavor rich.
      • Fresh herbs - Parsley adds color and freshness in the filling.

      Please see thee recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Cheese - Try Fontina or goat cheese for a tangy twist.
      • Meat swaps- Change up the flavor with chopped cooked chicken sausage, turkey sausage, or even crumbled cooked bacon.
      • Add veggies - Add a cup of chopped broccoli, broccolini, or asparagus, cooked or blanched first, not raw.

      Chef's Tip - Choose the Right Pan for a Tender Frittata
      Use a 10-12 inch cast-iron (I use a 10"), non-stick, or ceramic-coated skillet for the most reliable results. Stainless steel sticks easily-even with butter-so it's not ideal for frittatas. A smaller pan yields a thicker frittata with a slightly longer bake time; a larger pan produces a thinner one that cooks more quickly.

      How to a Make a Ham and Cheese Frittata

      Cast iron skillet with chopped leeks cooking in butter on thte stovetop.
      1. Saute thinly sliced leek in butter until soft, 2-3 minutes. Do not brown them.
      Pink diced ham steak aded to a skillet of sauteing leeks for a frittata.

      2. Add the diced ham and stir.

      Building layers of a frittata vegetables base now adding green chopped parsley.

      3. Add the chopped parsley.

      Cast iron pan showing orange and white grated cheese layer for a frittata.

      4. Layer on the cheddar and gruyere cheese.

      A glass bowl of eggs white and yolks with a whisk on a marble counter.

      5. Whisk the eggs until smooth.

      Whisking together eggs and half and half for a custard in a glass bowl with silver whisk.

      6. Add the half and half.

      Pouring whisked eggs over vegetables and cheese in a black fry pan.

      7. Pour the egg mixture over the vegetables, ham, and cheese.

      A golden frittata in a cast iron skillet going into the oven topped with parmesan cheese.

      8. Sprinkle the top with parmesan cheese and place in the oven to bake.

      Ham and cheese frittata in a cast iron skillet on the stovetop.

      9. Bake until golden and puffed, 35-40 minutes at 350°F.

      Chef's Tip - How to Tell When a Frittata Is Done
      A frittata is done when the center is just set but still looks moist-not wet or jiggly. The edges will be lightly golden and slightly puffed, and the top will no longer appear shiny. If you gently nudge the pan, the middle should move as one soft piece rather than wobbling like liquid. Remember, it will continue to firm as it rests, so avoid over-baking or the eggs can turn rubbery. If you prefer a creamier texture or plan to make the frittata ahead and re-heat, bake on the lower end of the time range so it stays more custardy after reheating.

      Make Ahead Frittata Prep

      Make your morning easier by prepping the components up to 2 days ahead of time.

      • Dice the ham steak.
      • Grate the cheeses.
      • Clean and chop the leek.
      • Blanch and chop any veggies if using.

      Store each ingredient separately in airtight containers in the refrigerator, then assemble and bake just before serving for the best texture and lift. When ready to bake, simply sauté the leek, add the broccolini and sausage, sprinkle on the cheese, pour in the custard, and bake.

      A slice of ham and cheese frittata on a plate with orange wedges and salad.

      Serving Suggestions

      Ham and cheese frittata is satisfying on its own, but it pairs beautifully with:

      • Roasted red potatoes or Dutch baby yellow potatoes.
      • A simple green salad with a light vinaigrette.
      • Fresh berries, melon, or citrus, or a combination fruit salad.
      • Toast or carrot cake muffins.

      Storage and Leftovers

      Cool frittata completely, then store slices in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

      Recipe FAQs

      Can I use pre-shredded cheese?

      You can, but freshly grated cheese melts more smoothly and gives the frittata a creamier texture. Pre-shredded cheeses often contain anti-caking starches that may keep the cheese from melting evenly.

      What kind of ham works best?

      Any fully cooked ham is fine: leftover holiday ham and a ham steak, diced work great. Thicker deli slices can work too. Avoid honey-glazed varieties as they tend to be sweet.

      Can I add vegetables?

      Absolutely. Sauté any vegetables first to remove excess moisture - great options include bell peppers, spinach, onions, mushrooms, or asparagus. Add them to the pan before the egg mixture.

      Can I make this ahead of time?

      Yes. A ham and cheese frittata is great for making ahead. Let it cool, then cover and refrigerate for up to 3 days. You can reheat individual slices in the microwave on low power, or warm larger portions in a 300°F oven until just heated through. It's also delicious at room temperature, which makes it perfect for holiday brunches, meal prep, or busy weekday mornings.

      How to reheat a frittata?

      To reheat the frittata, place in a 300°F oven until warmed through. If your frittata was baked until fully firm and golden on top, it may reheat a bit drier. Covering it with foil helps preserve moisture.

      More Breakfast Recipes

      From puffy dutch baby pancakes, to crispy light waffles, irresistible muffins, and an easy breakfast casserole, there are breakfast recipes to make your mornings worth getting up!

      • Dutch baby oven pancakes
        Gluten-Free Dutch Baby (German Pancakes)
      • Close up of crispy golden waffles with blueberries, raspberries, strawberries.
        Gluten Free Waffles
      • carrot cake muffins
        Gluten-Free Carrot Cake Muffins (dairy-free)
      • A piece of golden baked breakfast casserole with eggs on a plate with a fork and dollop of sour cream on top.
        Gluten Free Breakfast Casserole Recipe

      If You Make This Recipe

      If you enjoy this ham and cheese frittata, please comment and let me know. I love to hear from you. Did you make your own variation? Tell me about it, and it helps other readers too. And please give it a ⭐. Thanks for supporting my site.

      📖 Recipe

      A golden cheesy frittata in a cast iron skillet sprinkled with parmesan and chopped parsley.

      Ham and Cheese Frittata

      Sally Cameron
      This ham and cheese frittata is a flavorful, protein-packed dish. It's easy to make ahead and perfect for breakfast, brunch, or a light dinner, and easily prepped ahead. Leftovers reheat well. Serve it up with fruit and muffins for a terrific start to the day.
      No ratings yet
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 15 minutes mins
      Cook Time 35 minutes mins
      Total Time 50 minutes mins
      Course Breakfast, Brunch, Dinner, lunch
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6
      Calories 335 kcal

      Equipment

      • 10 ½" Cast iron skillet well seasoned

      Ingredients
        

      • 1 cup thinly sliced leek or ½ cup chopped shallot or white onion
      • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter
      • 4 - 6 ounces cooked ham, diced small ham steak or leftover holiday ham
      • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped Italian parsley
      • 1 cup grated cheddar buy a block, grate yourself
      • ½ cup grated gruyere cheese
      • 10 large eggs
      • ½ cup half and half
      • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
      • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
      • ¼ cup grated parmesan cheese 1 ounce, to top frittata

      Instructions
       

      • Pre-heat the oven to 350°F.

      Prep the leek

      • Slice the dark green tops off the leek and discard, use only the light green and white part. Slice in half lengthwise and run under cold water to remove and grit or sand. Lay flat on a cutting board and chop into thin pieces.

      Grate the cheese

      • With a hand grater or food processor, grate the cheeses.

      Cook the leeks

      • In a 10-12 inch well-seasoned cast iron skillet or oven-safe sauté pan, melt the butter over medium to medium-low heat. Add the leek and cook 3-4 minutes until softened. Don't brown it. Turn heat down if needed.

      Make the frittata

      • Add the chopped ham to the skillet, stirring to combine and warm through. Sprinkle the Cheddar and Gruyère evenly over the top, then the parsley.
      • In a medium bowl, whisk the eggs, half-and-half, salt, and pepper until smooth. Pour the custard evenly over the filling. Top with Parmesan for a golden crust after baking.
      • Transfer the skillet to the oven and bake 30-40 minutes, until the center is just set and the top is lightly browned. Let the frittata rest 5-10 minutes before slicing. Serve warm or at room temperature.

      Notes

      Grating your own cheddar cheese is the best option, as pre-grated cheese has anti-caking agents but do what works best for you. 
      Substitutions and Variations
      • Cheese - Try Fontina or goat cheese for a tangy twist.
      • Meat swaps- Change up the flavor with chopped cooked chicken sausage, turkey sausage, or even crumbled cooked bacon.
      • Add veggies - Add a cup of chopped broccoli, broccolini, or asparagus, cooked or blanched first, not raw.
      Leftovers and Storing
      Cool frittata completely, then store slices in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat gently in a 300°F oven until warmed through. 

      Nutrition

      Calories: 335kcalCarbohydrates: 5gProtein: 24gFat: 24gSaturated Fat: 12gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 365mgSodium: 939mgPotassium: 266mgFiber: 0.3gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 1213IUVitamin C: 9mgCalcium: 361mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Creamy Lemon Tahini Salad Dressing

      01/08/2026 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

      creamy tahini salad dressing

      Sturdier salad greens need creamy dressings that cling-and that's exactly why I created this creamy lemon tahini salad dressing. It's especially good on hearty greens like kale and romaine, and it also doubles as a simple tahini sauce for fish, chicken, or shrimp. Make a batch on Sunday and you're halfway to a fast, terrific salad all week.

      Creamy tahini dressing being poured.

      I originally created this lemon tahini salad dressing for a curly kale and chickpea salad, and quickly realized it deserved its own spotlight. This creamy tahini dressing works on almost any hearty greens-kale, romaine, shredded Brussels sprouts-and it doubles as a silky lemon tahini sauce for chicken, fish, or roasted vegetables. It's a delicious change from the simple French vinaigrette I often make.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Enjoy Lemon Tahini Dressing

      • Creamy and bright - Nutty tahini balanced with tangy fresh lemon juice.
      • Clings to sturdy greens - Perfect for kale, romaine, and hearty chopped salads.
      • Multi-purpose - Works as a salad dressing and a simple tahini sauce for chicken, fish, or shrimp.
      • Make-ahead friendly - Mix a batch and you're set for quick lunches and easy dinners all week.
      • Simple pantry ingredients - Tahini, lemon, garlic, and olive oil-nothing fancy, big flavor.

      Chef's Tip - What Is Tahini?
      Tahini is sesame seed paste, made similar to how peanuts are made into peanut butter. You may know it as an ingredient in Mediterranean hummus, but it's also excellent in dressings and sauces. Tahini has a mild, nutty flavor. I prefer raw, untoasted tahini. If the oil separates and rises to the top (totally normal), stir it back together with a sturdy spoon or table knife until smooth. Viscosity varies by brand.

      Ingredients You'l Need

      Lemon tahini dressing ingredients in prep bowls on a marble counter.
      • Extra-virgin olive oil - The base of the dressing, adding richness and a silky texture.
      • Tahini - Sesame seed paste that gives this lemon tahini dressing its creamy body and nutty, toasty flavor.
      • Lemon juice - Freshly squeezed for bright acidity and a clean citrus lift.
      • Unseasoned rice vinegar - Mild, slightly sweet vinegar that adds gentle acidity without overpowering; use all lemon juice instead if you prefer.
      • Tamari or soy sauce - Adds saltiness and savory depth; use tamari or coconut aminos to keep the dressing gluten-free.
      • Balsamic vinegar - Just enough for a subtle sweetness and extra depth of flavor.
      • Sweetener - 2-3 teaspoons maple syrup, honey, or no-sugar honey to balance the tanginess; adjust to taste or omit for a less sweet dressing.
      • Garlic - One large clove, finely chopped and smeared or microplaned, for sharp, aromatic backbone.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • No rice vinegar - If you don't have unseasoned rice vinegar, substitute white wine vinegar or champagne vinegar.
      • No soy - Swap coconut aminos for the tamari, or use the San-J No-Soy Tamari (it's delicious).

      Chef's tip - Adjusting Tahini Dressing Thickness
      Tahini can vary widely in thickness and color depending on the brand and how finely the sesame seeds are ground. I prefer thicker tahini, which yields a creamier, more substantial dressing. Some brands are more fluid, resulting in a thinner consistency. To thicken, try more tahini paste, a starch like cornstarch, arrowroot starch, or tapioca starch, a spoonful of nut butter, or a thickener like mashed chick peas or a spoonful or greek yogurt. Dijon helps emulsify but it will also change the flavor a bit. Another option, just a ¼ teaspoon xanthan gum. To thin, add a little more lemon juice or water.

      How to Make Lemon Tahini Dressing

      Dressing in a small blender.
      1. Blend the base: Add tahini, olive oil, lemon juice, rice vinegar, balsamic, soy sauce or tamari, garlic, and optional sweetener to a blender and blend smooth.
      2. Thin and season: If too thick, add a little water or lemon juice, a teaspoon or two at a time, until the lemon tahini dressing is pourable and creamy. Taste and adjust salt (or more soy sauce), or sweetness.
      3. Chill: Transfer to a jar and refrigerate. The dressing will thicken as it chills; whisk in a splash of water if needed to loosen before serving.

      Chef's tip - To make the garlic blend in smoothly, chop the cloves as finely as possible and then using the back of your knife, smear it into a smooth paste (photo below), or use a microplane zester.

      Smearing chopped garlic into a paste on a cutting board.

      Serving Suggestions

      I created this creamy lemon tahini dressing for salads, but it's also a terrific tahini sauce drizzled over grilled or roasted chicken, fish, or roasted vegetables like cauliflower, carrots, or broccoli. It's really versatile and so easy. And it doubles easily to make more for a crowd.

      For an other recipe using tahini, try this roasted red bell pepper hummus recipe. Great for snacks and entertaining.

      Storage

      Store creamy tahini dressing in a glass jar or airtight container in the refrigerator for to 5-7 days. It will thicken as it chills, so whisk in a teaspoon or two of cold water (or extra lemon juice) until it's pourable again.

      If it separates, just shake or whisk to re-emulsify. Because this dressing is made with fresh lemon juice and garlic, I don't recommend freezing it-the texture turns grainy and the flavor isn't as fresh.

      A curly kale salad with chickpeas and creamy tahini dressing.

      Recipe FAQs

      Can I make lemon tahini dressing ahead of time?

      Yes. Lemon tahini dressing can be made ahead and stored in the refrigerator for 3-5 days in an airtight container.

      Is this dressing gluten-free?

      Yes, as long as you use tamari or gluten-free soy sauce.

      Will the dressing thicken as it sits?

      It may thicken slightly as it chills, but consistency mostly depends on the tahini used.

      More Dressing Recipes

      If you enjoy homemade dressings, here are a few more easy, flavorful recipes to try next, from a simple basic vinaigrette, to creamy

      • A small glass pitcher of buffalo ranch dressing ready to pour over salad greens.
        Buffalo Ranch - Homemade Dip and Dressing
      • Small glass jar on a kitchen counter of French vinaigrette with salad behind.
        French Vinaigrette (Classic Homemade Dressing Recipe)
      • A bowl of homemade caesar dressing with spoon.
        Caesar Salad Dressing Without Anchovies
      • Easy Green Goddess Dip (and dressing)


      If You Make This Recipe

      Please leave a comment! I love to hear from youa dn your comments help other readers too. A star rating is helpful as well. Thanks for supporting my site.

      📖 Recipe

      creamy tahini dressing pouring onto salad | AFoodCentricLife.com

      Creamy Lemon Tahini Salad Dressing

      Sally Cameron
      A rich and creamy salad dressing made with sesame seed paste, called Tahini. Shake it in a jar or use a blender. It will last a week in the fridge. Great over study greens like kale and romaine. Recipe doubles easily.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 5 minutes mins
      Total Time 5 minutes mins
      Course condiment, Dressing
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6 Yield ¾ cup
      Calories 182 kcal

      Equipment

      • Regular or small blender or use a jar and a tight fitting lid

      Ingredients
        

      • 6 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
      • 3 tablespoons tahini
      • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
      • 1 tablespoon unseasoned rice vinegar or use lemon juice
      • 1 tablespoon low sodium tamari or soy sauce sub coconut aminos
      • 1 tablespoon Balsamic vinegar
      • 2-3 teaspoons maple syrup or honey or no-sugar honey
      • 1 large garlic clove finely chopped and smeared or microplaned

      Instructions
       

      • Place all ingredients in a jar with a tight-fitting lid and shake well until smooth and creamy. Alternatively, blend on low speed until emulsified. If the dressing is too thick, whisk or blend in cool water or more lemon juice, 1 teaspoon at a time, until it reaches your desired consistency.

      Notes

      The thickness of the final dressing will vary depending on the brand of tahini; some are very thick and others more pourable.
      Lemon tahini dressing keeps for 5–7 days in the refrigerator in an airtight container. Stir or shake before using, as it may thicken or separate slightly as it sits.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 2tablespoonsCalories: 182kcalCarbohydrates: 5gProtein: 2gFat: 18gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 12gSodium: 100mgPotassium: 58mgFiber: 0.4gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 6IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 14mgIron: 0.5mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Italian Pot Roast (Stracotto)

      01/01/2026 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      Rich red sauce with pot roast nestled into the vegetables and herbs on a gray plate.

      Italian pot roast-known in Italy as stracotto (or brasato)-is a slow-braised beef dish that takes everything you love about pot roast and makes it deeper, richer, and more aromatic. If cozy American pot roast is your comfort zone, this Italian version is the next step: beef gently braised in red wine, tomatoes, and herbs until it's fall apart tender and full of flavor. I'll show you how to make stracotto step by step. It's also an excellent make-ahead dinner for weekends or company.

      Italian pot roast, called stracotto, with chunks of meat and red sauce on a gray platter.

      Serve stracotto over creamy polenta, mashed potatoes, buttered fettuccine, or with crusty bread to catch every drop of sauce-Italian comfort food at its best. Stracotto means "overcooked," in the best possible way: slow-braised until melt-in-your-mouth tender. This Italian pot roast gently simmers in red wine, tomatoes, and aromatics, becoming deeply flavored-and even better the next day.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why Make Italian Pot Roast

      • Big flavor, low effort - Quick prep, then the Dutch oven and low heat do the work.
      • Melt-in-your-mouth beef - Long, slow braising turns a tough cut tender and juicy.
      • Comfort food with Italian flair - A pot roast recipe with red wine, tomatoes, garlic, and herbs.
      • Great for make-ahead - Stracotto tastes even better the next day and freezes well.

      For another long-braised meaty dish, try my red-wine braised short ribs.

      What is Stracotto?

      Stracotto is a traditional Italian braised beef recipe cooked slowly at a low temperature until tender and richly flavored. While similar in technique to American pot roast, stracotto is defined by Italian ingredients like red wine, tomatoes, garlic, and herbs, which give it a more aromatic, savory profile. American pot roast often leans toward a gravy-and-vegetable braise with potatoes. It's a rustic, comforting dish designed to be cooked patiently, tasting even better the next day.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Ingredients for Italian stracotto (pot roast) in prep bowls on the kitchen counter.
      • Beef - Boneless chuck roast is my first choice for stracotto because it becomes tender and flavorful with slow braising. (See options below.)
      • Carrots - Add natural sweetness and tender texture.
      • Onions - A key aromatic that builds a deep, savory base for the braise.
      • Celery - Rounds out the soffritto (veggie base) and adds earthy flavor.
      • Herbs - Rosemary, thyme, and bay leaves are classic in Italian braises.
      • Tomatoes - Use good-quality canned Italian tomatoes, preferably San Marzano, for bright flavor and gentle acidity to balance the richness of the beef.
      • Tomato paste - Deepens the color, flavor, and adds umami richness.
      • Wine - A dry Italian red such as Chianti, Sangiovese, or Barolo gives the braising liquid its signature depth. Buy a decent bottle you can drink, and freeze the rest for making it again or with red wine braised short ribs. Freezing works great.
      • Broth - Choose a good beef broth (refrigerated or frozen) for clean, rich flavor. Avoid overly salty bouillon cubes and pastes with poor quality ingredients.
      • Garlic - Essential in Italian cooking and adds deep, aromatic flavor to the braise.
      • Olive oil - For searing the beef and sautéing the vegetables.
      • Red pepper (optional) - A pinch of crushed red pepper flakes adds subtle warmth.
      • Parsley - Fresh chopped parsley to sprinkle on before serving.
      • Balsamic vinegar - A splash of the good stuff adds richness and depth at the end.

      Please see recipe card for measurement, salt and pepper.

      For a fast and easy Italian dinner, try this one-pan Italian chicken thighs recipes.

      Chef's Tip - Best cuts of beef for Stracotto
      Pot roast can be made with several cuts of beef. For a leaner pot roast, choose brisket or round, including rump roast, bottom round, or eye-of-round. Some may not shred and will be better sliced. But the classic-and my favorite choice-is a well-marbled chuck roast. It has just the right balance of fat and connective tissue to become incredibly tender with long, slow braising.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • No wine version - Use the same amount of beef broth plus 1 to 2 tablespoons of balsamic vinegar or red wine vinegar per cup of wine, and a little worcestershire sauce. This helps mimic the richness of wine without alcohol.
      • Mushroom - For extra depth, add sautéed cremini mushrooms for meaty texture, or a small handful of rehydrated dried porcini for woodsy richness.
      • Parmesan rind trick - Toss a used Parmesan rind into the pot while braising for an extra layer of umami. Freeze rinds and save for dishes like stracotto, soups, and sauces.

      For a rich, meaty ragu for pasta, make this braised beef short rib ragu recipe, fantastic over pasta. Leftovers freeze great.

      Chef's Tip - Why You Should Tie a Pot Roast: If your chuck roast is uneven or has loose flaps, tie it with kitchen twine before searing. A neatly shaped roast browns more evenly, turns easily in the pot, and braises more uniformly. It also helps the meat stay intact for slicing-even though it will still be fall-apart tender when finished.

      How to Make Italian Pot Roast

      Pre-heat the oven to 325°F.

      a raw red chuck roast on a plate on the counter.
      1. After unwrapping the roast, take a good look at it and assess if it needs tying. This one does, most do.
      A tied raw chuck roast ready for seasoning and cooking.
      1. Tie the roast with kitchen twine to main shape during cooking and season wel with salt and pepper on all sides.
      Searing a chuck roast until brown on all sides in a dutch oven.
      1. In A dutch oven or other heavy pot, sear the pot roast until nicely browned on all sides.
      A nicely browned roast of beef on a plate waiting for next steps in the process.
      1. Remove the seared roast to a plate, and continue the recipe.
      Chopped onion sautéing in a pot in olive oil.
      1. Saute the onion in olive oil until soft about 3 minutes on medium low heat. Then add garlic and cook 1 minute longer.
      Cooking Italian sofritto, carrots, onion and celery for a pot roast.
      1. Add the carrot and celery and cook until softened, another 3-4 minutes, stirring.
      Red wine reducing in a large pot with vegetables to create a braising base.
      1. Add the red wine and cook until reduced by half the volume.
      Pot roast added to a pot of broth, reduce wine and vegetables for cooking.
      1. Add the pot roast back to the pot and add enough beef broth to come up ½ way to ⅔ the way up the roast. Add the herbs and cover with a lid. Braise the roast for 2 ½ - 3 hours turning over at the halfway point. When done a fork will easily go into the roast. Taste and season with salt and pepper if needed.
      Rich red sauce with pot roast nestled into the vegetables and herbs on a gray plate.

      When the Italian pot roast is done, remove to a plate, cut the strings, then pull the meat apart into chunks (for chuck roast). Remove any bits of connective tissue. If using another cut of beef, you might be able to slice it. Arrange on a platter and cover with sauce. Discard herb stems.

      Serving and Storing Stracotto

      Every chuck roast cooks a little differently depending on its shape and marbling. Some will yield very clean chunks of meat, while others have natural seams of connective tissue that you simply remove as you go. All are delicious.

      To serve, spoon the sauce into shallow, wide bowls, add chunks or slices of the beef, and finish with a sprinkle of chopped fresh parsley for color and fresh, garden flavor.

      Italian pot roast is wonderful over wide pasta noodles, creamy Parmesan polenta, or riced mashed potatoes, with extra sauce spooned over the top. A side of simply cooked greens or a crisp salad balances the richness nicely.

      • To refrigerate - Cool completely, then store the meat and sauce together in an airtight container for up to 4 days.
      • For freezing - Freeze in portions with plenty of sauce for up to 3 months. I like to freeze in individual or dinner-sized portions for easier reheating.
      • For reheating - Warm gently on the stovetop over low heat in a Dutch oven or other heavy pot, or in a 325°F oven, until heated through to 165°F. Add a splash of broth or water if needed to loosen the sauce.

      About the Extra Sauce (It's a Bonus!)

      This recipe makes more sauce than you'll need for four servings of meat, as that is part of braising. Italian braises are known for their deeply flavored, abundant sauces. Save every drop. The leftover sauce is incredible:

      • Tossed with pappardelle or rigatoni for a next-day pasta.
      • Used as a base to braise chicken thighs.
      • Blended smooth for a rustic, rich tomato-wine pasta sauce.

      Don't think of it as "extra." Think of it as your next meal already made.

      Recipe FAQs

      What cut of beef is best for pot roast?

      The best cut is chuck roast because it has great marbling and becomes tender after slow braising. Brisket, short ribs, or bottom round also work, but chuck roast is the most traditional and foolproof option.

      How long should I braise stracotto?

      Stracotto (Italian pot roast) is best when braised low and slow for 2 ½ - 3/12 hours depending on the size of the piece, until the beef is fall-apart tender.

      Should I cut the beef before cooking?

      No, for the best texture, sear the whole chuck roast first (tie if needed to maintain shape), then braise it whole. Once it's fall-apart tender, pull it into large chunks for serving instead of shredding. This keeps the meat juicy and satisfying while soaking up the rich sauce.

      Can I make Italian Pot Roast in a slow cooker?

      Yes. Sear the beef first as usual, then cook on low for 8-10 hours or high for 5-6 hours until the beef is fall apart tender.

      Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you try this Italian pot roast recipe, I'd love to hear from you! Leave a comment below and let me know how it turned out. If you enjoyed it, a 5-star rating helps others find and love this recipe too. Your feedback is always appreciated!

      📖 Recipe

      Rich red sauce with pot roast nestled into the vegetables and herbs on a gray plate.

      Italian Pot Roast (Stracotto) Recipe

      Sally Cameron
      A tender, slow-braised Italian pot roast cooked with red wine, tomatoes, herbs, and classic soffritto mix. This rustic, deeply flavorful dish becomes melt-in-your-mouth tender after a long, gentle braise. Serve with polenta, mashed potatoes, or buttered pasta to soak up the savory sauce.
      No ratings yet
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 30 minutes mins
      Cook Time 3 hours hrs
      Total Time 3 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
      Course Dinner, Entree, Main Course
      Cuisine Italian
      Servings 4 to 6 servings
      Calories 527 kcal

      Equipment

      • Large dutch oven I use a 5 ½ quart

      Ingredients
        

      • 2 ½ pounds boneless chuck roast
      • 1 teaspoon sea salt
      • ¾ teaspoon ground black pepper
      • 1 ½ tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
      • 1 ½ cup chopped onion 1 medium onion
      • ¾ cup chopped celery 2-3 ribs
      • ¾ cup chopped carrots 2-3
      • 1 28-ounce can whole peeled San Marzano tomatoes crushed with your hands
      • 1 ½ cups dry red wine preferably Italian such as Barolo, Chianti, or Sangiovese.
      • 1 cup beef broth
      • 3 large fresh garlic cloves
      • 2 bay leaves fresh or dried
      • 3 sprigs fresh thyme
      • 3 sprigs fresh rosemary

      Optional ingredients

      • 2 teaspoon balsamic vinegar
      • 1 small parmesan rind
      • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped Italian parsley

      Instructions
       

      Season and sear the beef

      • If your chuck roast has loose flaps or an irregular shape (very common with this cut), tie it with kitchen twine in 3-5 places to create a more uniform shape This helps the meat sear evenly, hold together during the long braise, and cook at the same rate. Don't worry about making it perfect - just a few snug loops are enough to keep the roast compact.
      • Pat the beef dry with paper towels. Season generously on all sides with salt and pepper. Heat a large Dutch oven over medium-high heat and add olive oil to lightly coat the bottom. When hot, add the roast and sear until deeply browned on all sides, 3-4 minutes per side. Transfer the beef to a plate.

      Sauté the aromatics

      • Reduce the heat to medium. Add a little more olive oil if the pot looks dry. Add the onions and sauté until softened and starting to turn golden, 5-7 minutes, scraping up any browned bits. Add the carrots and celery and cook a few more minutes until slightly tender. Stir in the garlic and cook just until fragrant, about 30 seconds.

      Caramelize the tomato paste

      • Stir in the tomato paste, coating the vegetables. Cook 2-3 minutes, stirring often, until the paste darkens slightly and smells sweet and caramelized. This builds depth of flavor in the sauce.

      Deglaze with wine

      • Pour in the red wine and stir, scraping up all the browned bits from the bottom of the pot. Let the wine simmer and reduce by half, 3-5 minutes.

      Add tomatoes, broth, and herbs

      • Add the crushed tomatoes, beef broth, rosemary, thyme, and bay leaves. Tie the herbs together with a string if you'd like for easier removal. Stir to combine and bring the mixture just up to a simmer. Taste the liquid and adjust the seasoning with a little more salt and pepper if needed-it should be well seasoned but not too salty.

      Return the beef to the pot

      • Nestle the seared beef (and any juices on the plate) back into the pot, turning it once so it's coated in the sauce. The liquid should come half way or two thirds up the sides of the roast.

      Braise in the oven

      • Cover the Dutch oven with a tight-fitting lid and transfer to a 325°F oven. Braise for 2½ to 3 hours, turning the roast once halfway through, until the meat is very tender and a fork slides in easily. Start checking around the 2½-hour mark.

      Reduce the sauce if needed

      • Transfer the beef to a plate and tent with foil. Remove the herb stems and bay leaves. If your sauce looks thin, place the pot over medium heat and gently simmer 5-10 minutes to reduce. If it's already glossy and thick enough, no reduction is needed. Taste and adjust seasoning, and add a splash of good balsamic vinegar if you'd like to brighten the sauce and sprinkle with fresh chopped Italian parsley.

      Slice and serve

      • Once the meat is tender, it naturally separates into sections. You may see a few thin, stringy seams of connective tissue-simply pull them out as you chunk the roast. This is normal with chuck and ensures the meat stays beautifully tender.
        Return pieces to the pot or arrange on a warm platter and spoon the sauce and vegetables over the top.
      • Serve with creamy polenta, mashed potatoes, buttered fettuccine, or with crusty bread for soaking up the sauce.

      Notes

      Yield - Chuck roast loses about 25%-35% of its weight during cooking due to fat rendering and moisture loss. A 2 ½-pound raw chuck roast will yield approximately 1.75 pounds of cooked beef, serving 4-5.
      Note on broth: The amount of broth you need will depend on the size and depth of your Dutch oven. The goal is for the braising liquid to come halfway to two-thirds up the side of the roast. I use a 5½-quart Le Creuset, which typically requires about 1 cup broth for a 2½-pound roast. Larger Dutch ovens (such as a 7-quart) may need more liquid, while smaller pots, such as the 4 ½-quart may need less. Adjust as needed to reach the correct level.
      About chuck roasts: Chuck can look very different from one roast to another. Some pieces are neatly uniform and well-trimmed, others are irregular with loose flaps or more external fat. Both types work. If your roast has loose sections, tie it with kitchen twine so it holds together evenly during searing and braising.
      If there are large exterior fat caps, trim them lightly, but leave the internal marbling and connective seams—those melt during the long braise and make the beef tender and flavorful.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 527kcalCarbohydrates: 13gProtein: 40gFat: 28gSaturated Fat: 11gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 15gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 137mgSodium: 1002mgPotassium: 933mgFiber: 2gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 4249IUVitamin C: 10mgCalcium: 79mgIron: 5mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Antipasto Skewers (Easy Italian Appetizer)

      12/18/2025 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      A platter of antipasto skewers with olives, cheese, salami, and artichoke heart for appetizers.

      Who doesn't love food on sticks and skewers? They're fun to make, fun to serve, and perfect for year-round entertaining as party appetizers. These antipasto skewers deliver all the best flavors of a classic antipasto platter in one easy-to-eat bite-rich salami, creamy mozzarella, bright tomatoes, savory olives, and tangy artichoke hearts. Finished with a drizzle of dressing, they're impossible to resist.

      Colorful antipasto skewers on fancy star-topped picks drizzled with Italian dressing.

      Antipasto skewers are perfect for a casual wine night or for a holiday appetizer spread, when you don't have time to build a fancy board. These skewers also travel well for picnics and potlucks, and they're one of my favorite answers to the always-stressful question, "What should I bring to a party?" Easy to assemble, easy to transport, and guaranteed to disappear fast.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Like Antipasto Skewers

      • Make-ahead appetizer - No cooking, just simple assembly.
      • Perfect for parties & potlucks - Portable, mess-free, and always a hit.
      • Fresh, bold flavor in every bite - Creamy, savory, briny, and bright.
      • Customizable for any crowd - Swap meats, cheeses, or veggies with ease.
      • Works year-round - For holidays, wine nights, game days, and summer gatherings.

      For another fun appetizer on a stick, make these simple Caprese Skewers with a basil pesto vinaigrette.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Ingredients for antipasto skewers in prep bowls ready for assembly.
      Ingredients for homemade Italian dressing ready to be combined and shaken.
      • Meat - Thinly sliced dry Italian salami (so they can be folded).
      • Cheese - Mozzarella balls, get the small bite-size called ciliegene.
      • Green olives - Buy pitted castelvestrano olives, they are delicious.
      • Black olives - Buy pitted Kalamata olives.
      • Tomatoes - Use small grape or cherry tomatoes.
      • Artichoke hearts - Buy whole and cut yourself or buy quarters. Use water-packed and dress at serving (and some of the marinated ones don't taste good).
      • Tear drop peppers (optional) - These tiny sweet and tangy peppers add a nice pop of color and flavor to antipasto skewers. Sometimes called Sweetie Drops.
      • Parsley (optional) - Fresh chopped parsley to garnish the platter for more color.
      • Dressing - Use bottled or homemade Italian dressing. See photo above or recipe card.

      Picks - Get fun, 5" holiday themed food picks on Amazon and at party stores.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Make it meatless: Swap marinated sun-dried tomatoes or roasted peppers for the salami for a bold, savory vegetarian option.
      • Switch up the protein: Use another Italian meat such as coppa or prosciutto for a lighter, more delicate skewer.
      • Change the cheese: Try cubes of Monterey Jack, white cheddar, or provolone for a different flavor profile.
      • Add herbs - A fold fresh basil leaf looks and tastes great (but they can wilt).

      For a refreshing summer skewer, make these melon skewers or fruit kabobs.

      How to Make Antipasto Skewers

      A tray set up to assemble antipasto skewers with fancy picks and all ingredients.
      1. Prep the ingredients - Drain the mozzarella balls, olives, artichoke hearts well so the skewers don't become slippery or watery. Wash tomatoes. Quarter artichoke hearts if needed.
      2. Assemble the skewers - Thread the ingredients onto each pick in this order for balance and visual appeal: Olive > artichoke heart > folded salami > tomato > mozzarella > olive. Add a tear drop pepper at the end or a basil leaf if using (somewhere in the middle, folded). Build them as you prefer.
      3. Repeat with remaining ingredients - Arrange the finished skewers on a serving platter in a single layer or in neat rows.
      4. Chill until ready to serve - Cover and refrigerate for up to 24 hours then drizzle or brush with the Italian dressing and serve. Chopped parsley adds a nice touch.
      5. Italian dressing - Place all ingredients in a jar and shake well. Refrigerate until using.
      Golden Italian salad dressing in a jar with a silver whisk.

      Serving Suggestions

      • Serve chilled to cool-room temperature.
      • Drizzle lightly with Italian dressing or pesto vinaigrette just before serving. For the pesto vinaigrette, simple dilute basil pesto with a little olive oil and maybe some lemon juice until fluid enough to drizzle. Use homemade basil pesto or purchased.
      • Arrange on a platter in neat rows, singly or stacked, or fanned for easy grabbing.
      A small plate stacked with antipasto skewers with star tops and dressing.

      Make-Ahead & Storage

      • Assemble up to 24 hours ahead.
      • Store covered and refrigerated.
      • Drizzle the dressing just before serving.
      • Best served chilled to cool room temperature.

      Leftovers: Antipasto skewers keep well refrigerated for up to 2 days. For best texture, store covered and undressed, then add dressing just before serving.

      Recipe FAQs

      How far ahead can I make antipasto skewers?

      You can assemble them up to 24 hours in advance. Store covered in the refrigerator and drizzle with dressing just before serving.

      Should I dress the skewers ahead of time?

      No - for the best texture and appearance, wait to drizzle the dressing until just before serving. This keeps the mozzarella and tomatoes from becoming watery.

      How many antipasto skewers should I plan per person?

      Plan on 2-3 skewers per person for a party with other appetizers, and 4-5 per person if they're part of a light meal.

      Are antipasto skewers gluten-free?

      Yes, as written these skewers are naturally gluten-free. Just double-check your meats and marinated ingredients to be sure.

      Did You Make Antipasto Skewers?

      If you made these for a party or gathering, tell me about it! Please leave a comment and a ⭐ rating. Thanks for supporting my website.

      More Easy Appetizers

      Antipasto skewers are a natural addition to any appetizer board and pair beautifully with a mix of creamy, savory dips and spreads for effortless entertaining.

      • A bowl of whipped ricotta cheese dip with endive leaf in for scooping.
        Whipped Ricotta Cheese (Dip or Spread)
      • Closeup of mushroom pate in a white ramekin with a spoon.
        Classic French Mushroom Duxelle
      • A white bowl of roasted red pepper hummus to serve as an appetizer.
        Roasted Red Bell Pepper Hummus Recipe

      Please Leave a Comment

      If you make these antipasto skewers, please tell me about it! Did you make them for a party? I love to hear from you and your comments help other readers too. Thanks for supporting my site.

      📖 Recipe

      A platter of antipasto skewers with olives, cheese, salami, and artichoke heart for appetizers.

      Antipasto Skewers

      Sally Cameron
      These antipasto skewers are an easy, no-cook Italian appetizer made with salami, mozzarella, tomatoes, olives, and marinated artichokes-perfect for entertaining year-round. Sued bottled Italian dressing or homemade, recipe included.
      No ratings yet
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Cook Time 0 minutes mins
      Total Time 10 minutes mins
      Course Appetizer
      Cuisine Italian
      Servings 6 yield 12 - 2 per person
      Calories 246 kcal

      Equipment

      • 12 Fancy food picks

      Ingredients
        

      Antipasto skewers

      • 4 ounces thin dry salami 24 slices
      • 12 small cherry or grape tomatoes
      • 12 mini mozzarella balls ciliegene are the perfect size
      • 12 green pitted olives castelvestrano are the best
      • 12 pitted black olives kalamata
      • 6 artichoke hearts water packed or marinated, halved
      • ¼ cup Italian dressing bottled or homemade

      Homemade Italian dressing (makes ½ cup)

      • ⅓ cup extra virgin olive oil
      • 1 ½ tqblespoons vinegar white wine, champagne, or apple cider
      • ½ tablespoon finely grated Parmesan cheese
      • ½ teaspoon Dijon mustard
      • ½ teaspoon dried Italian seasoning blend
      • ⅛ teaspoon garlic powder
      • ⅛ teaspoon onion powder
      • 1 pinch sea salt
      • 1 pinch ground black pepper
      • 1 pinch sugar or monk fruit honey or agave syrup
      • 1 pinch red chili flakes piza pepper

      Instructions
       

      Prep ingredients

      • Drain enough mozzarella balls for the number you are making (leave the rest stored in the brine). Same for olives and artichoke hearts so the skewers don't become slippery or watery. Wash tomatoes. Quarter artichoke hearts if needed.

      Assemble the skewers

      • Thread the ingredients onto each pick in this order for balance and visual appeal: Olive > artichoke heart > folded salami > tomato > mozzarella > olive. Add a tear drop pepper at the end or a basil leaf if using (somewhere in the middle, folded). Build them as you prefer.

      Arrange on platter and chill

      • Cover and refrigerate for up to 24 hours then drizzle or brush with Italian dressing and serve. Chopped parsley adds a nice touch.

      For the Italian dressing

      • Place all ingredients in a jar and shake well. Refrigerate until using.

      Notes

      The Italian dressing, whether homemade or bottled, is not included in the nutritional calculation as what you use can vary.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 2Calories: 246kcalCarbohydrates: 2gProtein: 15gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gCholesterol: 35mgSodium: 722mgPotassium: 159mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 346IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 214mgIron: 0.4mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Soft & Chewy Gluten-Free Ginger Cookies

      12/16/2025 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

      A plate of golden sugar sprinkled ginger cookies with more cooling on a wire rack.

      If you love big ginger flavor and soft, chewy cookies, you'll love these gluten-free ginger cookies. They're everything a classic ginger cookie should be: light and tender when you bite in, perfectly chewy, with warm spices, deep molasses, and crackled tops-and no one will guess they are gluten-free. There's an easy dairy-free option too.

      A plate of freshly bake crackly ginger cookies with sparking sugar with milk.

      These gluten-free ginger cookies are soft, tender, melt-in-your-mouth spice cookies with delicate crackled tops and a classic flavor that's pure nostalgia. They're a natural fit for holiday cookie baking, but simple enough to enjoy year-round. The dough comes together quickly with basic pantry ingredients, chills briefly, then bakes into soft, crackly-topped drop cookies-no rolling or cutting required. Easy enough for a weeknight and special enough for holiday gifting.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      What Makes These Ginger Cookies So Good

      • Soft, chewy texture - Tender centers with lightly crisp, crinkled tops, like classic bakery ginger cookies.
      • Easy drop-cookie dough - No cutting. Just mix, scoop, roll in sugar, and bake.
      • Warm ginger-molasses flavor - Bold ginger, warm spices, and deep molasses sweetness in every bite.
      • Gluten-free (and no one will know) - The texture is so good that most people won't believe these are gluten-free.
      • Perfect for holidays and beyond - Great for gluten-free Christmas cookie trays and gifting, but simple enough to bake any time you're craving a cozy cookie.

      For another absolutely terrific and easy cookie recipe, try these almond flour chocolate cookies.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Flour, sugar, molasses, spices, and more ingredients to make ginger cookies.
      • Unsalted butter - Provides richness and that soft, chewy cookie texture. DF option below.
      • Light brown sugar - Adds moisture and caramel notes that pair great with ginger.
      • Granulated sugar - For the classic crinkly tops and encourages gentle spreading.
      • Molasses - The heart of ginger cookie flavor, brings warmth, color, and chew. Use unsulfured molasses. Most stores only carry blackstrap, it works fine and gives a strong bold flavor vs. a milder molasses. Both work.
      • Egg - Binds and gives structure to the dough.
      • Vanilla extract - Softens and rounds out the spice.
      • Gluten-free all-purpose flour - A 1:1 blend, I bake with King Arthur GF M4M.
      • Baking soda - For proper spread and the signature crackle.
      • Baking powder - Just a touch of lift for lighter centers.
      • Spices - Ground ginger, cinnamon, nutmeg, and a pinch of clove.
      • Coarse sugar (optional) - For rolling cookie balls before baking for a crinkly, sparkly finish, try turbinado sugar, demarara sugar, or a coarse sugar.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, and salt.

      Chef's Tip - How Soft Should Butter Be for Cookies
      For the best creaming and cookie texture, your butter should be truly soft, not just slightly cool. It should press easily with a fingertip and look smooth and pliable. I often set the butter out the night before so it's ready to cream properly with the sugar in the morning. Too-firm butter won't aerate well and can lead to thicker, less crinkly cookies. Avoid softening butter in the microwave, as it can melt unevenly and ruin the texture.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • For dairy-free ginger cookies - Use stick-style plant butter, not soft tub spreads. Earth Balance Buttery Sticks, Country Crock Plant Butter, Violife Plant Butter, Trader Joe's Vegan Butter, and Miyoko's all bake with good flavor and reliable structure.

      Chef's Tip - Why Creaming Butter & Sugar Matters
      Creaming butter and sugar properly whips tiny air pockets into the dough, which helps cookies bake up lighter with better spread and texture. Beat for 2-3 minutes, until the mixture looks pale, fluffy, and slightly increased in volume-not just blended. Under-creamed dough leads to denser cookies with less crinkle.

      How to Bake Gluten-Free Ginger Cookies

      Cookie tips - For rolling the dough into balls before coating in sugar, wear food-safe gloves, then roll right after chilling. The warmth from your hands softens the dough quickly, making it harder to handle. Gloves keep the dough cooler and much easier to work with, and keep your hands cleaner. For even portioning and cookies size, use a #40 cookie scoop or a #50 cookie scoop (about 1 ½ tablespoons).

      Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.

      Creaming brown sugar and butter until light and fluffy in a glass bowl.
      1. With an electric hand mixer, cream the butter and brown sugars and granulated sugar until light and fluffy, 3 minutes.
      Adding molasses, egg, and vanilla to gluten-free ginger cookie batter.
      1. Add the molasses, egg, and vanilla, until smooth and creamy.
      Beating batter for ginger cookies until smooth.
      1. Whip the creamed butter and sugar now with molasses and egg until fluffy and smooth.
      Adding flour and spices to cookie batter for Christmas cookies.
      1. Add the flour, baking soda, and powder, spices, and salt.
      Finished gluten-free ginger cookie dough in a glass bowl ready to chill.
      1. Blend the batter until well combined and smooth on medium speed. Dough is ready to chill, covered, for 30-45 minutes in the refrigerator.
      Balls of ginger cookie dough on a parchment lined baking sheet.
      1. Portion cookie dough, roll into balls then roll in sugar. Place balls on the cookies sheet. Bake at 350°F for 12-13 minutes. They will still be a bit soft.
      A tray of golden baked ginger cookies cooling on the counter.

      Chef's Tip - The Best Liner for Baking Ginger Cookies: Parchment vs. Silpat:
      For the best spread and browning, bake ginger cookies on parchment-lined baking sheets, not silicone baking mats. Parchment allows the dough to spread naturally and crisp at the edges, while Silpat tends to limit spread and produces thicker, softer cookies (unless that is what you want). Grab a pack of the pre-cut sheets and you'll never know how you lived without them!

      A plate of gold gluten-free ginger cookies with cracked tops and sparkling sugar sprinkles.

      How to Store & Freeze Ginger Cookies

      • Room Temperature - Store baked cookies in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 4 days. They stay soft and chewy.
      • Freeze Baked Cookies - Freeze fully cooled cookies in a freezer-safe container with parchment between layers for up to 2 months. Thaw at room temperature.

      Freeze the Dough - Scoop the chilled dough into balls, freeze solid, then store in a freezer bag for up to 2 months. Bake from frozen, adding 1-2 extra minutes to the bake time.

      Recipes FAQs

      Can I make these cookies ahead of time?

      Yes. The dough can be made up to 2 days ahead and kept refrigerated. Scoop and bake straight from the fridge, adding an extra minute if needed.

      Can I freeze the cookie dough?

      Absolutely. Scoop the ginger cookie dough into balls, freeze until firm, then store in a freezer bag for up to 2 months. Bake from frozen and add 1-2 minutes to the bake time. Another option for freezing, use a silicone cookie dough freezer tray.

      Why didn't my cookies spread?

      This usually means the butter was too cold, the dough was over-chilled, or the flour was slightly over-measured. Let the dough warm for 5-10 minutes and try again. Baking on parchment (not Silpat) also helps.

      How do you keep gluten-free cookies soft?

      The key to soft gluten-free cookies is balancing moisture and bake time. This recipe uses a mix of brown sugar and molasses, which both help the cookies stay tender. Avoid overbaking-pull the cookies from the oven when the centers still look slightly soft, as they'll finish setting on the baking sheet. Storing them in an airtight container once cooled also helps maintain their chewy texture.

      More Cookie & Treat Recipes

      Crispy, chewy, crackly, or chocolatey, pick your favorite and give some of these cookie recipes a try.

      • A stack of crunchy cookies on a counter with a glass of milk and cookies cooling behind.
        Cranberry Oatmeal Cookies Recipe (gluten-free)
      • A round white plate piled with chocolate chip meringue cookies.
        Forgotten Cookies (chocolate chip meringues)
      • sand tart cookies
        Old Fashioned Sand Tarts Cookie Recipe
      • Bark bites on a round display plate for serving.
        Chocolate Bark Recipe (bark bites)

      If You Make These Cookies

      Please leave a comment and let me know how they came out! I love hearing from you and your comments help other readers too. And please leave a ⭐ rating. Thanks for supporting my site!

      📖 Recipe

      A plate of golden sugar sprinkled ginger cookies with more cooling on a wire rack.

      Gluten-Free Ginger Cookies

      Sally Cameron
      Soft, chewy, tender ginger cookies with bold flavor that happen to be gluten-free, and you'd never guess. With that classic ginger and molasses flavor and texture that's irresistible.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Course Cookies, Dessert
      Cuisine American
      Servings 12 Yield about 24 cookies
      Calories 220 kcal

      Equipment

      • Half sheet baking tray
      • Parchment paper
      • Hand mixer
      • #40 disher/cookie scoop optional but super handy
      • Food handle gloves

      Ingredients
        

      • ½ cup unsalted butter **at room temperature
      • ½ cup light brown sugar
      • 2 tablespoons granulated sugar
      • ¼ cup molasses mild, medium, or blackstrap
      • 1 large egg
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
      • 1 ⅔ cups GF flour blend I use King Arthur M4M
      • ½ teaspoon baking powder
      • ¼ teaspoon baking soda
      • 1 teaspoon ground ginger
      • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
      • ⅛ teaspoon nutmeg
      • ¼ teaspoon salt

      Instructions
       

      Cream butter and sugar

      • With a hand mixer, beat the room temperature butter and sugar until light and fluffy, 2-3 minutes on high speed. Add the molasses, egg, and vanilla, and beat another minute.

      Add dry ingredients

      • Add the flour, baking powder, baking soda, spices, and salt, and mix on medium speed just combined, 1-2 minutes. Dough will be stiff. Refrigerate dough for 30-45 minutes (not overnight).

      Bake cookies

      • Pre-heat the oven to 350° (standard bake). Line a half sheet baking pan with parchment.
      • With food handler gloves and using a #40-#50 cookie scoop (1 ½ tablespoons), portion the cookie dough, the. with your hands, gently roll the portion into a ball, then into a small bowl of sugar to coat the outside.
      • Place the sugared cookie balls on the baking sheet and bake for 12 minutes, until the edge are set, the center is still a bit soft. They will set further upon cooling. Allow to cool 5-10 minutes on the cookie sheet then remove to cool fully on a wire rack.

      Notes

      For dairy-free ginger cookies - Use stick-style plant butter, not soft tub spreads. Earth Balance Buttery Sticks, Country Crock Plant Butter, Violife Plant Butter, Trader Joe's Vegan Butter, and Miyoko's all bake with good flavor and reliable structure.
      Storing Cookies - Store baked cookies in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 4 days. They stay soft and chewy.
      Freezing Baked Cookies – Freeze fully cooled cookies in a freezer-safe container with parchment between layers for up to 2 months. Thaw at room temperature.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 220kcalCarbohydrates: 34gProtein: 2gFat: 8gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.5gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 36mgSodium: 101mgPotassium: 143mgFiber: 1gSugar: 16gVitamin A: 259IUVitamin C: 0.01mgCalcium: 40mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Chocolate Panna Cotta

      12/11/2025 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

      Glass cup of dark chocolate panna cotta with whipped cream and chocolate shavings.

      Chocolate panna cotta proves that dessert doesn't need to be complicated or difficult to be luxurious. A handful of ingredients come together into something silky and deeply chocolatey, with a melt-in-your-mouth texture that feels special even in a small portion. It's a modern take on a classic Italian panna cotta-no eggs, no baking, and no fuss. Just gently warm the dairy, melt the chocolate, bloom the gelatin, and let the refrigerator do the rest. Dairy-free option too!

      A spoonful of silky chocolate panna cotta with whipped cream on a silver spoon with chocolate sprinkles.

      This chocolate panna cotta recipe is an ideal make-ahead dessert for entertaining. Each guest gets their own individual serving, it looks elegant on the table, and it requires absolutely no last-minute attention (aside from a dollop of whipped cream). It's perfect for Christmas, Easter, Valentine's Day, birthdays, or any dinner party when you want something rich, silky, and indulgent without spending the entire evening in the kitchen.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]


      Why You'll Love Chocolate Panna Cotta

      • Silky, luxurious texture - Softly set and velvety, it melts on your tongue instead of feeling heavy or dense.
      • Simple, few ingredients - Just basic pantry and fridge staples (plus good chocolate) come together in a surprisingly easy dessert.
      • Make-ahead friendly - You can prepare it a day or two in advance, so dessert is completely done before guests arrive.

      And if you love panna cotta, try my vanilla panna cotta recipe, topped with berries.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Heavy cream, chocolate, milk, vanilla, and sugar for making chocolate panna cotta.
      • Heavy cream - The foundation of panna cotta. It creates that silky, luxurious texture and gives the dessert its rich mouthfeel. Same as heavy whipping cream.
      • Whole milk - Lightens the cream so the panna cotta isn't heavy. It softens the richness while keeping a smooth, delicate set.
      • Good chocolate - Choose 60-72% cacao for a balanced, deeply chocolatey flavor. Lower percentages taste sweeter; higher percentages can get too intense and mute the dessert's silkiness.
      • Sugar - Just enough to balance the chocolate's bitterness. You're not making chocolate pudding-this dessert should taste cocoa-forward, not overly sweet.
      • Gelatin - The key to that soft texture. I prefer leaf gelatin for clarity and a smoother set (see notes below), but powdered gelatin works perfectly fine.
      • Vanilla - A touch rounds out the chocolate and adds warmth without competing with it.
      • Espresso powder (optional) - Intensifies chocolate flavor and adds depth. It won't taste like coffee; it simply makes the chocolate taste more chocolate.

      Chef's Note: Leaf Gelatin vs Powdered Gelatin
      Leaf gelatin (also called sheet gelatin) and powdered gelatin both set panna cotta; they're just used a little differently. Leaf gelatin dissolves very cleanly and gives a silky, restaurant-style set, which is why many chefs prefer it (as do I). To use it, soften the sheets in cold water for 5 minutes, gently squeeze out the water, then melt them into the warm dairy. Powdered gelatin is more widely available and easy to measure-sprinkle it over cold water to bloom before adding it to warm liquids. For this recipe, you can use either (but try the leaf!).

      Substitutions and Variations

      To change up this recipe for chocolate panna cotta, try:

      • No sugar - replace the sugar with granulated monk fruit/allulose blend. Works great.
      • Dairy-free option - Replace the heavy cream with full-fat canned coconut milk and the whole milk with unsweetened almond or cashew milk. The gelatin still sets the panna cotta beautifully.
      • For 4 servings - See the scaled recipe for lower volume in the recipe notes. Method is the same.

      Chocolate for breakfast works too, in this chocolate banana smoothie.

      Chef's Tip For the Silkiest Texture
      Heat the cream just until steaming, not boiling. Boiling damages the gelatin's setting power and dull the chocolate's flavor.

      How to Make Chocolate Panna Cotta

      Forms of dark chocolate on a white cutting board.
      1. Whatever form of chocolate you have, chop it into small pieces unless it is already in a small shape.
      melting dark chocolate in a stainless steel bowl with a red spatula.
      1. Over a double boiler of simmering water, slowly melt chocolate until smooth.
      Pouring sugar into a small pot of heavy cream and milk for panna cotta.
      1. Add cream and milk to a small pot with the sugar, over medium low heat, stir until sugar is melted. heat to steaming but NOT boiling.
      Soaking leaf gelatin in cold water to soften.
      1. Add leaf gelatin to cold water to cover, soak 5 minutes. If using powder gelatin, sprinkle over cold water to bloom, 5-10 minutes until spongy, then it will dissolve in the hot cream.
      Adding softened gelatin to warm cream in a pot.
      1. Squeeze water out of leaf gelatin, add to hot cream and stir to fully blend until smooth. For powdered gelatin, add the sponge to the cream and stir smooth.
      1. Stir in melted chocolate until smooth, then pour through a fine sieve into a pouring container.
      Glass ramekins of chocolate
 panna cotta on a small sheet tray to set up.

      7. Allow to cool a few minutes, then pour into ramekins or other vessels. Place on a sheet tray and refrigerate until chilled and set, a few hours to overnight.

      A glass ramekin of chocolate panna cotta with whipped cream and chocolate shavings.

      Serving Suggestions

      Serve chocolate panna cotta simply with whipped cream on top and some chocolate shavings or sprinkles. Use a fine grater or a microplane zester to get the fine shavings, or use a vegetable peeler.

      How long does chocolate panna cotta last in the refrigerator? It keeps well for up to 3 days, tightly covered.

      And for another chocolate dessert idea, try this spiked hot chocolate on a cold night.

      Recipe FAQs

      Why didn't my panna cotta set?

      This usually happens if the gelatin wasn't properly bloomed, if the dairy mixture was too hot when the gelatin was added, or if too little gelatin was used. Chocolate also slightly softens the set, so correct gelatin ratio matters.

      Is panna cotta the same as chocolate mousse?

      No-panna cotta is gelatin-set, has no eggs, and traditionally is unmolded but can be prepared to not be unmolded (easier), while chocolate mousse is aerated and lighter due to whipped cream or egg foam.

      How long does panna cotta take to set?

      Depending on the gelatin ratio you're using, if following my recipe, panna cotta sets in about 4-5 hours. Chilling overnight chilling is best.

      Can I unmold this panna cotta?

      This recipe is intentionally designed to be served in cups or glasses, not unmolded. It has a soft, spoonable texture, which is what makes it so luxurious. If you want to unmold panna cotta onto a plate, you would need to increase the gelatin - but that produces a firmer, more gelatin-forward texture. For best flavor and mouthfeel, I recommend serving this one right in the dish.

      More Recipes With Chocolate

      If you love chocolate, here are a few more recipes to try, from bit-sized chocolate bark that's fun to make, to a decadent chocoalte tart, spiked hot chocolate (and a kids version too), or classic chocolate brownies.

      • Bark bites on a round display plate for serving.
        Chocolate Bark Recipe (bark bites)
      • Chocolate Tart With Hazelnut Crust
        Decadent Chocolate Ganache Tart
      • Glass mug of hot chocolate with whipped cream.
        Easy Spiked Hot Chocolate
      • Gluten-free brownies with melted chocolate in a square pan after baking.
        Fudgy Gluten-Free Chocolate Brownies

      Did You Make Chocolate Panna Cotta?

      If so, please let me a comment and let me know how you enjoyed it. I love hearing from you and comments help other readers as well. Thanks for supporting my site.

      📖 Recipe

      Glass cup of dark chocolate panna cotta with whipped cream and chocolate shavings.

      Chocolate Panna Cotta

      Sally Cameron
      Rich, silky, light textured and totally indulgent, chocolate panna cotta is super easy to make and is made ahead for the perfect dessert for chocolate lovers. To make just 4 servings, see scaled recipe volumes in notes at the end.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 18 minutes mins
      Cook Time 0 minutes mins
      Total Time 18 minutes mins
      Course Dessert
      Cuisine Italian
      Servings 6
      Calories 497 kcal

      Equipment

      • 6 6-ounce glass or ceramic ramekins, of glasses.

      Ingredients
        

      • 1 ¾ cups heavy whipping cream
      • ¾ cup whole milk
      • 2 ½ leaves silver leaf gelatin (170 bloom strength) or 2 ½ teaspoons gelatin powder
      • 5 ounces 60%-72% dark chocolate
      • ¼ - ⅓ cup sugar
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
      • ¼ teaspoon espresso powder optional

      Optional garnishes

      • ½ cup heavy whipping cream to top panna cottas
      • extra chocolate for chocolate shavings or use sprinkles
      • Fresh raspberries

      Instructions
       

      Bloom leaf Gelatin

      • Cut the gelatin sheets to fit in a small bowl and cover with cold water for 5-7 minutes until softened. Squeeze water out to use before adding to hot milk and cream, then stir in until smooth (it melts in).

      (or) Blooming powdered gelatin

      • Sprinkle the gelatin evenly over ¼ cup cold water. Let it stand 5-10 minutes until fully hydrated and spongy. Once bloomed, gently heat just until melted (a few seconds in the microwave or over very low heat), then whisk into your warm cream base.

      Melt Chocolate

      • Place chopped chocolate in a heatproof bowl. Melt slowly over a double boiler, or melt carefully on low power in a microwave.

      Heat Cream & Milk

      • In a medium saucepan, combine heavy cream, milk, and sugar. Warm over medium heat until sugar dissolves and mixture is steaming (do not boil). If using espresso powder, whisk it in now.

      Add Gelatin

      • Add the prepared gelatin to the hot cream mixture and stir until smooth. Turn off heat.

      Add chocolate and vanilla

      • Add the chocolate and stir until smooth, then add the vanilla.

      Strain & Pour

      • Strain mixture through a fine-mesh sieve into a measuring container, then divide evenly into 6 small ramekins, espresso cups, or dessert glasses (6 oz each).

      Chill

      • Cover lightly with plastic wrap and refrigerate at least 4 hours, preferably overnight, until set. Top with whipped cream if desired.

      Notes

      To make 4 servings:
      Reduce the recipe to 1 cup + 2 tablespoons cream, ½ cup milk, 1⅔ teaspoons powdered gelatin (or 1⅔ sheets), 3⅓ ounces chocolate, and 4 tablespoons sugar. The method remains the same.
      Serving suggestions:
      • Top with lightly sweetened whipped cream and chocolate shavings.
      • Add fresh berries for a burst of color and acidity.
      • Drizzle with salted caramel or raspberry coulis for extra indulgence.
      Chef's Note: Leaf Gelatin vs Powdered Gelatin - Leaf gelatin (also called sheet gelatin, buy online) and powdered gelatin both set panna cotta; they're just used a little differently.
      Leaf gelatin dissolves very cleanly and gives a silky, restaurant-style set, which is why many chefs prefer it (as do I). To use it, soften the sheets in cold water 5-7 minutes, gently squeeze out the excess, then add to the warm dairy (they melt in).
      Powdered gelatin is more widely available and easy to measure-sprinkle it over cold water to bloom before adding it to warm liquids.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 497kcalCarbohydrates: 23gProtein: 5gFat: 43gSaturated Fat: 27gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 11gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 105mgSodium: 41mgPotassium: 302mgFiber: 3gSugar: 18gVitamin A: 1371IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 114mgIron: 3mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Roast Beef Tenderloin (Center-Cut Chateaubriand)

      01/24/2011 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

      beef tenderloin on a plate.

      Roast beef tenderloin (center-cut chateaubriand) is the ultimate special-occasion centerpiece-buttery-tender, elegant, and surprisingly simple when you know the method. Choose one of two reliable approaches: a classic sear-then-roast for a steakhouse crust, or an easy slow-roast for an even rosy interior. Either way, you'll get clear pull temperatures, timing cues, and beautifully juicy slices-no guesswork required.

      Juicy slices of pink beef tenderloin on a plates with pan juices and peppercorns.

      A friend recently asked how to make roast beef tenderloin, and my answer surprised her: it's more of a method than a recipe. Start with the right cut (a center cut, often labeled chateaubriand), season simply, and cook to temperature. Once you do it this way, you'll feel confident making tenderloin for holidays and dinner parties with glowing praise from your guests and no stress.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love Roast Beef Tenderloin

      • Two methods, both great results- classic seared exterior or slow-roasted for even doneness.
      • No guesswork - you'll nail rare-to-medium every time, chart included.
      • Holiday-worthy, not complicated - looks fancy, cooks like a dream.
      • Sauce options if you want them - cognac-Dijon and horseradish cream are easy upgrades.

      For another fantastic and flavorful beef dish, make these red wine braised beef short ribs.

      Chef's Tip - What is Chateaubriand?
      Chateaubriand is the center cut of the beef tenderloin. It's the most evenly shaped, tender portion, making it perfect for roasting and slicing into beautiful, uniform pieces. When you ask your butcher for a center cut, you're essentially asking for a chateaubriand.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Ingredients for beef tenderloin with seasonings on the side.
      • Center-cut beef tenderloin (chateaubriand) - the evenly shaped middle section for uniform roasting and pretty slices.
      • Kosher salt + black pepper - essential seasoning; simple is best on a premium cut.
      • Olive oil - helps seasoning adhere and supports browning for the seared method.
      • Granulated garlic (slow-roast option) - adds savory depth when you're not building flavor through a hard sear.
      • Herb sprigs (optional) - Fresh sprigs of herbs such as tarragon, rosemary, and thyme are nice slipped under the ties of the slow-roasted beef tenderloin for added flavor.

      See the recipe card for exact amounts. Optional sauce ingredients (Cognac-Dijon or Horseradish Cream) are listed there as well.

      For another terrific tenderloin recipe (that's more budget friendly), try this roast pork tenderloin with a creamy Dijon mustard sauce.

      Choosing the Best Beef Tenderloin

      For a special occasion dinner, start with the best beef you can find. I buy mine from a trusted butcher or reputable market and am never disappointed with the quality. A good butcher will trim the roast (saving you work) and cut exactly the piece you want.

      • Ask for a center cut (chateaubriand) for even cooking and beautiful slices.
      • Plan on about 8 ounces of uncooked meat per person.
      • If any silver skin (the tough tendon) remains, have your butcher trim it, or remove it yourself at home with a sharp knife. It is not good to eat.
      • If you buy your meat at a warehouse store, look for an already trimmed center-cut beef tenderloin. Buying a whole tenderloin in cryovac packaging makes it hard to see the cut clearly, and breaking it down yourself takes time, skill, and results in quite a bit of waste (18%-30%). Unless you're comfortable working with a whole tenderloin, it's best to choose the trimmed version for ease and consistency.

      How to Roast Beef Tenderloin (Choose Your Method)

      You need kitchen twine, a heavy pan like a cast iron skillet, a rimmed baking sheet, wire rack, instant-read digital thermometer, and either aluminum foil or parchment.

      • Get the chill off - For either method, get the chill off that beautiful piece of beef for more even roasting and better results. Let it sit out on the counter for about an hour. Don't worry, it's a food safe practice.
      • Tie the beef - Tying helps the roast beef keep its shape and roast evenly. Tie it with individual pieces of butchers string or tie it with one long piece, whichever is easiest for you. After tying, rub sparingly with a little olive oil then season liberally with sea salt and freshly ground black pepper. Add a little granulated garlic powder for the slow-roasting method only.
      A tied and seasoned beef tenderloin just starting the searing process in a cast iron pan.

      Method #1: Sear First, Oven Finish (Steakhouse Style)

      Pre-heat the oven to 400 degrees. In preparation for roasting your tenderloin, cover a rimmed baking sheet with foil or parchment. Place a wire rack on top. Next, heat a pan like a cast iron skillet or other heavy pan over medium-high heat.

      Sear the Roast

      Sear the beef tenderloin by placing the beef in the hot pan, searing on all sides and briefly both ends, turning as a rich brown crust is achieved. Turn your ventilation system on as searing can create a lot of smoke and steam.

      Beef tenderloin searing in a cast iron pan on the stove getting a nice browned crust.

      Roasting and Finishing

      After the roast is seared, transfer the beef to the wire rack on the baking sheet and finish in the oven. This helps for fast, even roasting. If you don't have a wire rack, just place the beef on the pan.

      Roast to the temperature that you want, checking the chart below. Use a digital thermometer to cook to temperature. Wireless thermometers like a Meater work great, or if your oven comes with an internal probe use that.

      Method #2: Slow-Roasted Beef Tenderloin Only (No Sear)

      Pre-heat the oven to 325°F. The lower temperature is a gentler way of roasting. You get that even pink color all of the way through the beef tenderloin with no gray edge from searing. It takes longer, and timing can vary significantly depending on the size and shape of the tenderloin. For best results, cook by internal temperature, not time, and begin checking early.

      A tied beef tenderloin with added sprigs of fresh green tarragon before roasting.

      After tying the tenderloin, place fresh herb springs under the ties, then place the tied roast beef on the baking sheet and roast to temperature. With the lower temperature, figure it will rise 5°F while resting.

      Slicing a roasted beef tenderloin on a cutting board into perfect pinl portions.

      Internal Temperatures for Beef Tenderloin

      There are many factors involved in roasting timing, such as temperature, how long the meat was seared, and the thickness of the piece. Just watch it as you don't want to over cook this beautiful piece of meat.

      Beef tenderloin is very lean, with little marbling or fat to protect it from overcooking - which is why it's best served rare to medium and why careful temperature monitoring is so important.

      DonenessPull from Oven at…Final Temp After Resting
      Rare115–120°F125–130°F
      Medium-Rare120–125°F130–135°F
      Medium130–135°F135–145°F
      Medium-Well140–145°F145–150°F
      Well Done150°F+155°F+ (not recommended)

      Because of something called carry over cooking, your roast beef will continue to warm and the temperature rise a few more degrees after removing it from the oven. Here's a great article on steak temperatures.

      If you're going to make the cognac Dijon pan sauce, don't wash the pan! Set it aside until you're ready to make the sauce.

      Chef's Tip - Rest Beef Tenderloin Before Slicing
      The temperature of beef tenderloin continues to rise 5-10°F after you remove it from the oven. For best results, rest loosely covered with aluminum foil before slicing. This keeps the meat warm and helps redistribute juices for a more tender result, while the loose tent prevents the crust from getting soggy. If you slice without resting the juice may drain away leaving you with dry roast beef. Lastly, remove the twine, slice and enjoy.

      Optional Sauces for Roast Beef Tenderloin

      Cognac Dijon Sauce

      For a quick and easy pan sauce, start with cognac and creme fraiche or cream. The inspiration for the sauce recipe is from Chef Dorie Greenspan. I add a little fresh chopped tarragon and a little good Dijon mustard for my version of classic French bistro flavors. Use the pan in which you seared the beef tenderloin. Directions are in the recipe card.

      Creamy Horseradish Sauce

      Make a creamy horseradish sauce by whipping heavy cream and creme fraiche together and adding a however much horseradish you like. Season with salt and white pepper.

      • Combine ½ cup creme fraiche and ½ cup heavy whipping cream in a bowl and whip with a hand mixer on medium-low until it is thick and creamy.
      • Stir in 2-4 tablespoons horseradish, to your taste (drained if juicy before adding).
      • Add a little fresh lemon juice (½ teaspoon or so), salt, white pepper and either chopped chives or chopped fresh tarragon (optional).

      You know what else this sauce is terrific for? Salmon: steamed salmon, grilled, or pan seared salmon.

      Serving Suggestions

      Roast beef tenderloin is beautiful and impressive served on a platter with the slices slightly overlapping, allowing guests to choose their own pieces. Of course you can serve several slices on individual plates with side dishes if preferred.

      Leftovers work for breakfast with eggs or in a sandwich for lunch and will keep up to 4 days covered in an airtight container.

      Side Dishes

      What sides go well with beef tenderloin? Glad you asked. Try these easy side dishes for your beef masterpiece:

      • Riced mashed potatoes.
      • Cauliflower puree (low carb option).
      • Scalloped potatoes (aka potato gratin).
      • Green beans almandine.
      • Broccolini.
      • A terrific salad.
      • Steamed Brussels sprouts (with flavor options!)

      Beef Tenderloin FAQs

      Should you sear beef tenderloin before roasting?

      It depends on the style of the recipe. You can sear then roast, as in this recipe, or you can do a slow-roasted beef tenderloin with or without the sear. step. Both are terrific, just a bit different.

      What temperature should beef tenderloin be cooked to?

      Beef tenderloin is best served rare to medium for maximum tenderness and flavor. Pull it from the oven between 115-135°F, depending on your preferred doneness, then let it rest for 15-20 minutes. The temperature will rise another 5-10°F as it rests. See the doneness chart above for exact pull and final temperatures.

      Is beef tenderloin the same as chateaubriand?

      Not exactly. Beef tenderloin is the whole cut, while chateaubriand refers to the center cut portion - the most tender, evenly shaped part, perfect for roasting. For this recipe, I recommend using chateaubriand for the best presentation and even cooking.

      More Elegant Recipes

      When you want to switch it up and still serve a special main dish, try these delicious recipes.

      • A golden crusted pork rib roast on a gray platter with fresh green parsley.
        Pistachio Crusted Pork Rib Roast
      • Pork tenderloin with creamy mustard sauce close up with a serving fork.
        Roast Pork Tenderloin with Dijon Mustard Sauce
      • crispy seared duck breast
        Pan Seared Duck Breast
      • Wine braised beef short ribs with sauce and vegetables in a pan.
        Red Wine-Braised Short Ribs Recipe

      Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this center-cut roast beef tenderloin please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      beef tenderloin on a plate.

      Center-Cut Beef Tenderloin (Chateaubriand)

      Sally Cameron
      When purchasing beef tenderloin I always ask for a center cut, figuring 8 ounces per person of uncooked weight. Buy the best beef you can from a quality butcher and you won't be disappointed. And if you have leftovers, great for the next day.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 10 minutes mins
      Cook Time 20 minutes mins
      Total Time 30 minutes mins
      Course Main Course
      Cuisine American
      Servings 4
      Calories 270 kcal

      Equipment

      • Kitchen twine
      • Digital thermometer
      • Rimmed baking sheet
      • Cast iron skillet or other heavy similar pan large enough to comfortably fit the roast

      Ingredients
        

      Beef

      • 1 ½ pounds beef tenderloin preferably center cut, trimmed of all silverskin
      • ½ teaspoon Kosher or sea salt
      • ½ teaspoon Ground black pepper
      • 1 tablespoon Olive oil ghee, or avocado oil

      Cognac-Dijon Cream Sauce (optional)

      • ⅓ cup cognac or brandy
      • ½ cup creme fraiche
      • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
      • 2 teaspoons fresh chopped thyme or tarragon

      Instructions
       

      Pre-heat oven and prep

      • Remove the beef from the refrigerator and allow to stand on the counter for 45-60 minutes to get the chill off. You will get better roasting results. Tie the tenderloin with kitchen twine at about 1″ intervals to help maintain it's shape and roast evenly. Liberally sprinkle all sides with kosher salt and pepper. Rub with olive oil. Pre-heat oven to 400 degrees.

      Sear the beef

      • Cover a rimmed baking sheet with foil, top with a wire rack and set aside. Place a heavy skillet or fry pan over medium-high heat. When the pan is very hot, place the beef in the pan and sear on all sides, turning when a nice brown crust forms. After sides are seared, turn briefly on the ends to sear them as well. Place beef on the wire rack and set the pan aside. DO NOT WASH IT.

      Roast the beef

      • Place seared beef on the wire rack in the oven and roast until the beef reaches an internal temperature of 125 degrees for rare or 130-135 for medium-rare and 140-145 for medium with a digital thermometer. Test at about 18-20 minutes and roast longer if needed.
        When I do a 1 ½ pound piece in my convection oven it takes about 18 minutes. Timing will depend on how long you sear the meat and your oven.

      Resting time

      • Remove beef from the oven and allow to rest in a warm place for 15-20 minutes. This gives you time to make a sauce or finish up your side dishes. Remove the twine, slice and enjoy.

      Cognac-Dijon Cream Sauce (optional)

      • Using the pan in which you seared the beef tenderloin, return the pan to medium heat. Pour off any fat, leaving the browned bits of meat.
      • Off the heat, add the cognac then return pan to the heat and stir, scraping up the browned bits stuck to the bottom. This is called deglazing the pan. Allow the cognac to cook down for a minute or two, then whisk in creme fraiche. When it is smooth, add the Dijon and tarragon. Taste and adjust the flavors with salt and pepper if needed, but it may not need a thing.

      Notes

      For the alternative sauce (or do both!) here is the horseradish cream sauce recipe. 
      • Combine ½ cup creme fraiche and ½ cup heavy whipping cream in a bowl and whip with a hand mixer on medium-low until it is thick and creamy.
      • Stir in 2-4 tablespoons horseradish, to your taste.
      • Add a little fresh lemon juice (½ teaspoon or so), salt, white pepper and either chopped chives or chopped fresh tarragon (optional).
      Nutrition calculation does not include the optional sauces. 

      Nutrition

      Calories: 270kcalCarbohydrates: 0.2gProtein: 52gFat: 4gSaturated Fat: 0.5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gSodium: 291mgPotassium: 4mgFiber: 0.1gSugar: 0.003gVitamin A: 1IUCalcium: 1mgIron: 0.1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Simple Baked Shrimp With Lemon Garlic Marinade

      11/13/2013 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      A small appetizer plate of golden baked shrimp on wooden skewers with cocktail sauce.

      Welcome the simplicity and versatility of this baked shrimp to your recipe collection. America's most popular seafood, shrimp are a surefire crowd-pleaser. Serve them as a classic shrimp cocktail for a get together, tuck them into tacos, toss them with pasta and sauce, top a bowl of risotto or a salad, or simply serve with veggies. Baked shrimp is your go-to solution for busy weeknights and entertaining too. It's quick and easy, try these!

      A small plate of garlic baked shrimp on skewers with lemon wedges and cocktail sauce.

      I made this baked shrimp recipe for years when catering parties for clients and still do for dining at home. Baked shrimp has great flavor, is easy, and everyone always loves them. I often use them as an appetizer and serve with homemade cocktail sauce, but there is much more you can do with them.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll like This Recipe

      • It's fast and easy - not much work for a big return.
      • It's versatile for serving ideas.
      • Frozen thawed shrimp or pick up thawed shrimp at the market.

      If you love shrimp, try this easy oven baked shrimp scampi. It's one of our favorites.

      Recipe Ingredients

      • Shrimp: Wild shrimp are my choice over farmed. Use larger size shrimp, 13-15 size or 16-20 size, depending on your intended use. In a hurry, buy them peeled and deveined. To save money, buy them shell-on and peel them yourself. Frozen is fine, but thaw fully first.
      • Garlic: For that savory, pungent, aromatic punch of flavor.
      • Olive oil: Use a nice extra virgin, fruity olive oil. Flavored olives oils work too.
      • Lemon juice: Get fresh lemons and squeeze for fresh juice,
      • Paprika: Either smoked or regular paprika work for baked shrimp. The smoked paprika gives them a little smoky flavor. If you like it spicy, use sharp paprika.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper. For another seasoning option, toss shrimp with olive oil and my all-purpose homemade dry rub, then bake.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • For a south-of-the-border flavor, add a ½ teaspoon of ground cumin, a pinch or two of chipotle for some heat, and fresh squeezed lime juice in place of the lemon. Sometimes I'll splash in a little tequila.

      Recipe Instructions

      • Step 1: Mix the simple shrimp marinade.
      • Step 2: Marinate the shrimp for 20-30 minutes on the counter.
      • Step 3: Bake the shrimp on a foil covered baking tray.
      • Step 4: Ready to serve. If you wold like, skewer the shrimp so they are easier for guests to pick up and eat. Small bamboo picks work great.

      Chefs Tips for Buying Shrimp

      I generally use large shrimp, the 16-20 size, for this recipe, but you can use smaller shrimp, like the 21-25 size. The baking time will be faster and they are less expensive. Watch your baking time and don't over cook. Shrimp are pink and opaque when done and the raw gray color is gone.

      Most shrimp are frozen shortly after catch. Buy them thawed at the seafood counter or thaw yourself from the freezer. Thawing overnight in the refrigerator is best, but if you forgot, use the quick thaw method (below) to get them ready.

      Chef's Note: For a helpful guide on buying shrimp, please follow this link to Seafood Watch by the Monterey Bay Aquarium. Their guide will help you to make wise choices at the store or fish market.

      How to Quick Thaw Shrimp

      Submerge the airtight package in cold water (NOT warm water!) and change the water every 30 minutes. The shrimp thaw pretty fast, should be no more than an hour. If the package floats on top of the water, place a plate on top of the package to keep the package submerged.

      Raw marinated shrimp arranged on a foil covered baking tray.

      Chef's Tip: Marinating shrimp. When you have an acid such as lemon juice or lime juice in the shrimp marinade, you do not want to marinate them long, as the acidity begins to cook the shrimp (that's how ceviche is made). A short marinade of 20-30 minutes is all you need to add flavor.

      Serving Suggestions

      • Try them to top risotto , black rice, brown rice, or white rice.
      • Chill and use for a shrimp salad with avocado and raspberries.
      • Tucked into tortillas for easy shrimp tacos.
      • Use for a classic shrimp cocktail. For catering parties, I skewer them onto small bamboo picks and pile them on a platter so finger stay clean, served with homemade cocktail sauce or your favorite jarred cocktail sauce.
      • Try them with creamy guacamole, salsa or other sauces, depending on what you are in the mood for.
      • For an easy Italian dinner, toss with roasted tomato marinara or this quick tomato pasta sauce and serve over pasta, add big tossed green salad.
      • Serve over herbed cauliflower rice for a delicious low-carb dinner.
      A small appetizer plate of golden baked shrimp on wooden skewers with cocktail sauce.

      Recipe FAQs

      What is the best way to cook shrimp?

      Shrimp are so versatile and easy to cook, there is not one best way but many terrific ways. Shrimp can be boiled, baked, roasted, simmered in sauce, pan roasted, grilled, poached, sautéed, fried, or broiled all with great success. Just watch your timing and don't over-cook them.

      How do you know when shrimp is done baking?

      Shrimp are done when they turn pink and are just opaque. Timing depends on the size of the shrimp. Large shrimp take a little longer than smaller shrimp, but none of them take very long. One shrimp tip: don't walk away while they are cooking, as they cook quickly and you don't want them rubbery and over-done. For large shrimp, turn them over half way through the cooking process.

      What temperature and time should I bake shrimp at?

      Bake shrimp from 350°F to 425°F (which is more roasting than baking). For a grill, grill shrimp on medium heat. Which ever temperature you choose, the key is to watch the shrimp for doneness as they cook quickly. The higher the temperature, the faster the cooking time. Also the smaller the shrimp, the faster the cooking time. Most shrimp take only minutes to cook, from 5-10.

      How do I prevent baked shrimp from becoming overcooked and rubbery?

      Simple! Watch your timing. Don't walk away from shrimp or get distracted when they are cooking. Shrimp are done when they just turn pink and opaque, and that grayish raw color is gone. For most shrimp it helps to turn them after a few minutes to insure they are equally done on both sides. When done, remove the pan or dish from the heat source immediately.

      Baked garlic shrimp on a plate for serving as an appetizer.

      More Recipe Ideas With Shrimp

      For another tasty shrimp recipe, try these wrapped in Prosciutto and grilled. Make the either long for an entree or short for appetizers.

      • baked lemon shrimp scampi
        Easy Baked Shrimp Scampi
      • quick coconut curry shrimp
        Coconut Shrimp Curry (Quick Dinner)
      • Thai shrimp soup called Tom Yum in bowls with shrimp, jalapenos, cilantro, and limes.
        Shrimp Tom Yum Soup
      • shrimp fra diavolo
        Spicy Shrimp and Pasta (Shrimp Fra Diavolo)

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      A small appetizer plate of golden baked shrimp on wooden skewers with cocktail sauce.

      Baked Shrimp

      Sally Cameron
      Baked shrimp are easy and versatile. See servings ideas in the recipe notes below. For shrimp, I use the 16-20 size but you can use a smaller size. Your baking time will be faster the smaller they are. This serves about 6 as an appetizer or 3-4 if used as an entree.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 5 minutes mins
      Cook Time 7 minutes mins
      Marinate time 20 minutes mins
      Total Time 32 minutes mins
      Course Appetizer, Entree
      Cuisine American
      Servings 6 for appetizers, 4 for entree
      Calories 121 kcal

      Equipment

      • Microplane zester optional to finely zest garlic
      • Rimmed baking sheet

      Ingredients
        

      Lemon garlic marinade

      • 3 large garlic cloves and zested with a microplane
      • 3 tablespoons olive oil
      • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
      • 1 ½ teaspoons smoked paprika or regular paprika
      • ⅛ teaspoon sea salt
      • ⅛ teaspoon ground black pepper

      Shrimp

      • 1 pound large shrimp thawed if frozen, peeled and deveined

      Instructions
       

      Make marinade

      • To make marinade, chop the garlic very fine and smear it into a paste with the back of your knife. Another way is to use a microplane zester. Works like a charm. Add the garlic, olive oil, lemon, paprika, salt and pepper to a bowl and whisk until smooth or add to a jar and shake well.
      • Scrape the marinade into a bowl or zip bag, add shrimp, and turn to coat them well. Allow shrimp to marinate at room temperature for 20-30 minutes.
      • Pre-heat oven to 400°F. Place shrimp in a single layer on a foil lined baking sheet. Bake 5-7 minutes, depending on the size of your shrimp. Shrimp will turn pink and opaque when they are done. Turn them over at the halfway point, especially for larger shrimp. Don't over bake them!

      Notes

      Serving Ideas: 
      • Chill shrimp and use for an appetizer with cocktail (or other) sauce.
      • Serve warm over rice, risotto, or pasta.
      • Make a shrimp salad with fresh tossed greens and a vinaigrette.
      • Tuck into corn tortillas for tacos, add salsa, cheese, cabbage, squeeze lime over them.
      • If you are making this in volume for a party and doubling or tripling the recipe, make the marinade in the food processor. 

      Nutrition

      Calories: 121kcalCarbohydrates: 2gProtein: 10gFat: 8gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 95mgSodium: 477mgPotassium: 111mgFiber: 0.2gSugar: 0.3gVitamin A: 383IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 45mgIron: 0.3mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Gluten Free Lasagna (no boil noodles)

      12/09/2025 by Sally Cameron 10 Comments

      lasagna | AFoodCentricLife.com

      Gluten-free lasagna is pure comfort food, cheesy, hearty, and baked until golden and bubbling. This version uses gluten-free no-boil, oven-ready noodles (no precooking required) and a rich tomato sauce with ground chicken sausage for extra protein and flavor. It's cozy, family-friendly, and every bit as satisfying as the classic lasagna you remember-just without the gluten. And no one will know it's gluten-free.

      A big slice of lasagna with layers of cheese and sauce on a white plate.

      This recipe has been one of my tried-and-true favorites for more than 15 years. I first made it with wheat no-boil noodles, then set it aside after going gluten-free. When gluten-free no-boil noodles finally came to market, I brought back my easy lasagna just the way I loved it-this time fully gluten-free. This version is written and tested specifically for gluten-free no-boil noodles, with a slightly more fluid sauce and layering method that keeps the pasta tender and the slices beautifully structured.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll love Gluten-Free Lasagna

      • No-boil, lighter feel - Gluten-free oven-ready noodles require no precooking, and bake up a bit lighter than traditional boiled pasta. Easier too!
      • Saucy, cheesy comfort - Cozy layers of ricotta, mozzarella, and sausage tomato sauce baked until bubbly and golden.
      • Gluten-free that feels "normal" - Tender, satisfying texture that eats like classic lasagna.

      For another filled pasta recipe, try these stuffed pasta shells.

      Chef's Tips: Gluten-Free No-Boil Noodles Need More Sauce - Gluten-free no-boil lasagna noodles (aka oven-ready noodles) behave differently than wheat. They're more absorbent and hydrate faster as they bake, so more hydration is needed. If the sauce is too thick, the noodles will pull moisture from it and the lasagna can bake up dry or with stiff edges. For this recipe, the sauce will be a bit more fluid than you might expect for traditional lasagna. That extra moisture is what helps the gluten-free noodles bake up tender.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Ingredients for lasagna sauce with sausage, onions, tomatoes, herbs, garlic, and wine.
      Ingredients for gluten-free lasagna filling with ricotta, parmesan, egg, herbs, and noodles.

      Lasagna Sauce

      • Olive oil - Helps bloom the aromatics and soften onions without burning.
      • Onion + garlic - Aromatic foundation for depth.
      • Fennel seed (optional) - Echoes classic Italian sausage flavor.
      • Chicken sausage - Choose cooked Italian sausage, adding protein, richness, and savory depth.
      • Dry wine (optional) - Red or white, adds acidity and roundness; cooks down and disappears, leaving flavor.
      • Crushed tomatoes - The backbone of the sauce. Their texture hydrates no-boil noodles better than thick puree.
      • Strained tomatoes (passata) - Pure strained tomatoes that add extra moisture for the gluten-free no-boil noodles without diluting flavor. Look for boxed Pomi, or order passata online if your store doesn't carry it.
      • Herbs - Use dried Italian blend seasoning, or a blend of basil and oregano.
      • Red pepper flakes - for a little heat and subtle kick.
      • Bay leaf - Adds a savory depth of flavor.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, pepper.

      Chef's Tip: Passata vs American Tomato Sauce
      Passata (like boxed Pomi) is pure Italian strained tomatoes-smooth, with no skins, seeds, or added seasonings. It's looser than tomato sauce, so it adds the extra hydration gluten-free no-boil noodles need without watering down the flavor. Standard tomato sauce is cooked down, thicker, and often seasoned with salt, herbs, or sugar. Using passata keeps the sauce clean, balanced, and designed for no-boil noodles to cook beautifully.

      Filling, Noodles, Cheese

      • Ricotta - Creamy, mild, and perfect for building structure between layers.
      • Parmesan - Umami + salt; sharpens the ricotta's mildness.
      • Fresh herbs - Basil + oregano lift richness with brightness.
      • Egg - Binds the filling so slices hold.
      • Gluten-free no-boil lasagna noodles - I tested with Barilla Oven-Ready GF Noodles.
      • Mozzarella - Use low-moisture mozzarella in a block or log and grate it yourself. It melts smoothly without making the lasagna watery. Skip fresh mozzarella packed in brine-that style holds too much moisture for this recipe.
      • Parmesan - Finishes the lasagna with savory depth and gentle browning.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, black pepper, and red pepper.

      Chef's Tip - Why Freshly Grated Cheese Matters: Better Melt
      Pre-grated cheeses contain anti-caking additives that interfere with melting and can create a slightly gritty texture. For the best melt, clean flavor, and creamy layers, use freshly grated cheese instead. It does make a difference.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • If you can't find passata (Pomi):
        • Best option - Blend canned whole or crushed tomatoes until smooth, then press through a fine-mesh strainer to remove skins and seeds. This behaves much like passata.
        • Other alternative - Use plain canned tomato sauce with no added herbs or sugar. It will still give the gluten-free no-boil noodles the hydration they need.

      How to Make Gluten-Free Lasagna

      You'll need an 8"x8" or 9"x9" (2/1 2 - 3" deep) casserole dish. Get your sauce and ricotta mix done before starting to build the lasagna.

      Up Front Tip

      For gluten-free no-boil noodles, the sauce will be a little looser than you might be used to. As you layer, make sure every noodle has some sauce touching both sides, and keep the ricotta sandwiched between saucy layers instead of pressing it directly onto dry noodles. The lasagna may look slightly more fluid going into the oven, but the gluten-free noodles drink up that extra moisture as they bake, so you end up with a tender, saucy, gluten-free lasagna.

      Ground sausage in a food processor workbowl.
      1. Pulse chopped sausage in a food processor or chop fine by hand.
      Sautéing onions and herbs in a stainless steel pot.
      1. Cook onions in olive oil until soft, then add garlic, 1 minute, then seasonings and wine. Cook wine down by half.
      Cooking ground sausage and onions in a pot for lasagna sauce.
      1. Stir in ground sausage.
      Bright red lasagna sauce with tomatoes, sausage, onions, and herbs.
      1. Add both tomatoes, swirling a little water around in the can of tomatoes and adding. Simmer 30 minutes then cool sauce if making ahead.
      Ricotta cheese filling for lasagna in a glass bowl.
      1. Mix the ricotta, egg, herbs, and Parmesan, salt & pepper for filling.
      Building lasagna with sauce and noodles in a white square baking dish.
      1. Begin assemble of layers. Add ⅔ cup sauce to the baking baking dish. Add 2 noodles.
      Gluten free lasagna layer with oven ready noodles, and sauce, with ricotta cheese topping.
      1. Add a little more sauce to the noodles, then ⅓ of the filling mixture.
      More layering for making gluten-free lasagna with noodles, ricotta, and sauce in a white casserole.
      1. Spread the ricotta filling evenly, add a bit more sauce on top.
      Grate mozzarella cheese on top of noodles and sauce for lasagna.
      1. Add ⅓ of the mozzarella. Now repeat these steps for 4 layers ending with noodles on top.
      Top layer of a gluten-free lasagna dish ready for baking topped with parmesan cheese.
      1. Cover the last set of noodles with the remaining sauce and Parmesan cheese. See recipe card for bake ahead, and bake right away directions.

      Baking Gluten-Free Lasagna (Now or Make-Ahead)

      Bake Right After Assembly

      • Preheat oven to 375°F.
      • Cover dish tightly with foil and spray the underside with oil.
      • Place on a rimmed baking sheet if full to the edge.
      • Bake 45 minutes covered, then uncovered 15 minutes longer until bubbly and golden.
      • Test noodles with a paring knife in the center.
      • If still firm, bake another 10-15 minutes until fully tender.
      • Lasagna should reach 165°F, but tender noodles determine doneness with gluten-free.
      • Rest 20-30 minutes before slicing.

      Make-Ahead and Bake Later (Up to 24 Hours)

      Lasagna can be made 1-4 hours in advance and refrigerated to bake later or up to 24 hours ahead. Sauce must be cooled (70°F) before assembly.

      • Remove the dish from the refrigerator 1 hour ahead and unwrap.
      • When ready to bake, pre-heat the oven to 375°F.
      • Bake 45 minutes covered.
      • Uncover and bake 15-20 minutes more, until bubbly and golden.
      • If noodles feel firm when pierced with a paring knife or your thermometer, bake 10-15 minutes longer until they are tender.
      • Lasagna should reach 165°F, but tender noodles determine doneness with gluten-free.
      • Rest 20-30 minutes before slicing.

      Freezing Lasagna

      Many people like to freeze lasagna for make-ahead meals, and Barilla says it works on the box. However, I have not tested freezing this recipe.

      If you need freezer-friendly meals, you may freeze unbaked gluten-free lasagna at your discretion-just know that I am not 100% sure at the results.

      If you freeze it, thaw 24 hours in the refrigerator, then follow baking directions.

      The finished casserole.

      Serving Suggestions

      Gluten-free lasagna is a complete meal on its own. Pair it with a big tossed green salad and a simple balsamic vinaigrette. If you'd like to round it out further, add a batch of gluten-free garlic toast for the perfect comfort-food dinner.

      Storage

      Gluten-free lasagna will keep for up to 4 days in the refrigerator when tightly covered. Reheat in a 350°F oven, covered with foil, until the center reaches 165°F. Individual portions can also be reheated in the microwave until hot. It reheats great!

      Recipe FAQs

      Do gluten-free no-boil noodles really work?

      Yes! Today's gluten-free no-boil noodles bake up beautifully, just like the traditional wheat version, but they do require more hydration in the sauce. They keep the process faster and lighter with no precooking required. It's all I use!

      Can I make this recipe ahead of time?

      Absolutely. Assemble the lasagna in the morning, cover, and refrigerate until baking. Add a few extra minutes of oven time if it's going in cold from the fridge. If you can let it stand at room temperature for awhile before baking, that helps. Bake to 165°.

      Can I use regular tomato sauce instead of passata?

      Passata (or Pomi strained tomatoes) is my first choice because it's just smooth, pure, strained tomatoes and keeps the flavor of the sauce clean. If you can't find it, you can blend and strain canned tomatoes for a similar result. In a pinch, you can use plain canned tomato sauce with no added herbs or sugar.

      More Italian Inspired Recipes

      From stuffed shells, to a hearty classic Tuscan soup, or an easy one-pan chicken dinner, try some of these Italian-inspired dishes. And that ragu? Delicious.

      • Stuffed shells with kale and ricotta
        Pasta Shells Stuffed With Ricotta
      • Ribollita in a gray pot.
        Italian Ribollita Soup (Ribollita Toscana)
      • A round pan of golden chicken thighs in red sauce with rosemary on the side.
        One Pan Italian Chicken Thighs
      • A gray bowl of twirled pasta topped with a beef short rib ragu, parsley, and a little parmesan.
        Braised Beef Short Rib Ragu

      Did You Make This?

      If you make gluten-free lasagna, please let me know how it came out for you and how you enjoyed it. I love to hear from you and other readers appreciate it too. And consider leaving a star rating please. Any questions, I am here to help.

      📖 Recipe

      lasagna | AFoodCentricLife.com

      Gluten Free Lasagna

      Sally Cameron
      Gluten free lasagna is pure comfort food-cheesy, hearty, and baked until golden and bubbling. No-boil noodles make making lasagna easier, faster, and lighter to eat than heavier traditional pasta noodles.
      5 from 4 votes
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 30 minutes mins
      Cook Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
      Total Time 2 hours hrs
      Course Entree
      Cuisine Italian
      Servings 6
      Calories 455 kcal

      Equipment

      • 8"x8" or 9"x9" deep casserole dish 2 ½" - 3" deep, straight sides, ceramic or stoneware
      • 4-5 quart pot for sauce
      • Food Processor to grind sausage, or use a chefs knife and chop by hand

      Ingredients
        

      Sauce

      • 1 tablespoon olive oil
      • ½ medium onion chopped
      • 3 large garlic cloves chopped fine
      • ¾ teaspoon ground fennel seed or wild fennel pollen
      • 6 ounces pre-cooked chicken sausage usually 2 links
      • ⅓ cup dry wine, red or white optional
      • 1 bay leaf
      • 1 ½ teaspoon dried Italain seasoning blend or combo oregano and basil
      • 28 ounces crushed tomatoes preferably san marzano
      • ½ cup pure strained Italian tomatoes called passata or Pomi in the box (same)
      • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
      • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
      • 1 pinch red pepper flakes optional

      Filling

      • 15 ounces whole milk ricotta cheese
      • ⅓ cup freshly grated Parmesan cheese
      • ¼ cup fresh finely chopped basil leaves or 1 tablespoon dried
      • 2 tablespoons fresh finely chopped oregano leaves or ¾ tablespoon dried
      • 1 large egg
      • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
      • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

      Noodles and Cheese

      • 6 ounces gluten-free no-boil lasagna noodles (oven-ready) 8 noodles
      • 8 ounces grated low-moisture mozzarella block or log grate it yourself, skip pre-grated
      • ⅔ cup freshly grated Parmesan cheese to top the lasagna

      Instructions
       

      Sauce

      • Chop the sausage into chunks. In the bowl of a food processor, pulse the sausage chunks until fairly finely, about 12 pulses.
      • Heat olive oil in a large saucepan (4-5 quarts) over medium heat.  Add onion and cook until softened, stirring, about 3 minutes. Add garlic and cook 1 minute, then add the Italian seasoning blend, fennel, and wine. Simmer until the wine is reduced by half.
      • Add ground sausage, both tomatoes, salt and peppers. Swirl a little water in the crushed tomato can to wash it out and pour into the pan. Simmer for 30 minutes. Set aside and cool.
        Note - If making the lasagna ahead and refrigerating overnight, cool the sauce below 70°, then assemble the lasagna. The fastest way is using an ice bath in the sink as you would to cool chicken broth.

      Filling

      • In a large mixing bowl combine the ricotta, Parmesan, herbs, egg and seasoning.  Set aside.

      Layer the lasagna (4 layers)

      • If serving right away. Pre-heat the oven to 375°F degrees. 
      • Spread ⅔ cup of sauce in the bottom of the pan. Add 2 noodles, then top with ⅓ of the ricotta mixture, a little sauce, and ⅓ of the mozzarella. Repeat this layering two more times (noodles, ricotta, sauce, mozzarella). For the top layer, place the final 2 noodles, cover with the remaining sauce, and finish with Parmesan.

      To Bake Now

      • Spray a piece of foil with nonstick spray and cover the baking dish. Bake at 375°F for 45 minutes. Uncover and bake 15 minutes more, until the top is lightly golden and bubbly. Check the internal temperature-it should read 165-170°F.
        If the noodles still feel firm when pierced: loosely re-cover, lower the oven to 350°F, and bake 10–15 minutes more until tender.
        Rest: Let stand 20-30 minutes before slicing and serving for the cleanest cuts.

      To Bake for Later

      • Spray a piece of foil with nonstick spray and tightly cover the baking dish. Refrigerate for up to 24 hours.
        About 1 hour before baking, remove the dish from the refrigerator to take off the chill. Preheat the oven to 375°F and follow the same baking directions as above.

      Notes

      If you need a double batch, I highly recommend you bake it using 2 - 8x8 or 9x9 casseroles instead of one large batch. It is easier and you get nicer slices.
       

      Nutrition

      Calories: 455kcalCarbohydrates: 23gProtein: 29gFat: 28gSaturated Fat: 14gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gTrans Fat: 0.003gCholesterol: 125mgSodium: 1340mgPotassium: 827mgFiber: 7gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 1193IUVitamin C: 14mgCalcium: 729mgIron: 12mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Easy Salsa Verde Chicken (green salsa chicken)

      09/17/2018 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

      A gray platter of sals verde chicken breasts with tomatillo sauce, grated cheese and chopped cilantro.

      Get dinner on the table fast with this easy stovetop Salsa Verde Chicken! Tender boneless, skinless chicken breasts simmer in a bright, tangy tomatillo sauce. A sprinkle of Jack cheese, fresh cilantro or parsley, and toasted pumpkin seeds adds the perfect finishing touch. Ready in under 30 minutes, this dish is great for meal prep-serve it as-is, then shred the leftovers for incredible salsa verde chicken tacos.

      A cast iron pan filled with salsa verde chicken with pumpkin seeds and cilantro.

      With either a jar of purchased salsa verde or a batch of homemade in the fridge or freezer, getting a tasty and healthy dinner on the table takes no time. This salsa verde chicken recipe is the perfect example. With jars of my tomatillo salsa verde recipe in the freezer, all you need is a package of boneless, skinless chicken breasts and cheese to get a great dinner on the table fast.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love Salsa Verde Chicken

      • Fast and easy - Dinner done in 30 minutes.
      • Simple ingredients -
      • Use homemade salsa verde or store bought.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      • Oil: Use extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil as healthy cooking fats.
      • Chicken: Boneless, skinless chicken breasts.
      • Salsa verde: It's sometimes called tomatillo salsa, tomatillo sauce, or green sauce. It super easy to make and freeze ahead, or buy a store brand (Trader Joe's, Herdez).
      • Cheese: Jack cheese is mild and buttery, or a packaged, grated Mexican cheese blend.
      • Fresh herbs: For garnish, fresh cilantro or Italian parsley (optional).
      • Pumpkin seeds: Called pepitas or green pumpkin seeds. Use them raw or toasted. Toasting takes just minutes and adds nice crunch and flavor (optional).

      For measurements please see the recipe card, salt, and pepper.

      Chef's tip: Toasting pepitas (green pumpkin seeds) is so easy and quick! Make them yourself in minutes. They add great flavor to not just salsa verde chicken, but to salads, soups, and more (like snacking). Plus they are good for you! Here's how to toast pepitas. Bake a batch and keep them around for quick use.

      Substitutions and Variations

      • Use a mild red enchilada sauce in place of the salsa verde. Makes another nice recipe to change things up, and use cheddar cheese.
      • Use boneless, skinless chicken thighs instead of chicken breasts.
      • Cheese options - Mozzarella and Manchego cheese work well too.

      Chef's tip: Optimally, get your chicken breasts out of the refrigerator 45-60 minutes ahead of time to get the chill off and for more even cooking and best results.

      How to Make Chicken Salsa Verde

      Step 1: Season boneless, skinless chicken breasts with salt and ground black pepper and cook on one side until golden in a little oil. When the chicken breasts are golden (about 3-4 minutes), flip them over, pour on the sauce, and cover with a lid.

      Chicken breasts in a cast iron pan browning.

      Step 2: Turn the heat down and simmer for 10-12 minutes or until chicken breasts are 160°F internally when measured with a digital thermometer. Timing might be a minute or two longer depending on the size of your chicken breasts and how cold they are out of the fridge.

      Chef's tip: Homemade salsa verde takes about 25 minutes to make. Make it ahead and freeze some. It's a simple recipe. Just simmer and puree briefly in a blender. Have it ready for a quick dinner or to serve with eggs, omelets, grilled shrimp, or baked or grilled fish.

      What to Serve with Salsa Verde Chicken

      To serve salsa verde, sprinkle with grated Jack cheese and chopped fresh cilantro. Add a side green salad and some brown rice on the side. Another good side dish is pinto beans, or try this Mexican-style rice with vegetables.

      Leftovers make a great lunch or shred extra chicken and use for salsa verde enchiladas or tacos. For dairy-free and paleo skip the cheese.

      For another easy boneless, skinless chicken recipe you can make ahead, try these chicken parchment packets with vegetables.

      salsa verde chicken breasts | afoodcentriclife.com

      Recipe FAQs

      Can I use a different protein instead of chicken?

      Instead of chicken, use a thick white fish filet. Cook the fish until it reaches 145°F when measured with a digital thermometer. It's delicious with salsa verde.

      How should I store leftover salsa verde chicken?

      Packed in an airtight container, leftover salsa verde chicken lasts up to 4 days in the refrigerator. It's a great make-ahead dinner to save for during a busy week and freezes well.

      To re-heat, get it out of the refrigerator about an hour ahead of time, then heat in a 350°F oven covered wtih aluminum foil until the chicken reaches 165°F. How long depends on how cold it was to start. Plan on at least 30 minutes or longer. Once it's hot, it's easy to keep warm until serving.

      Can I Use Salsa Verde Chicken in Tacos or Burritos?

      Yes! Shred leftover chicken and use in tacos or burritos for a terrific second meal or lunch. It's so good you might want to make extra.

      Four chicken breasts on  a gray platter with salsa verde sauce, cheese, and herbs.

      More Chicken Recipes to Try

      • Crispy golden air fryer chicken cutlets on a gray serving platter.
        Air Fryer Chicken Cutlets
      • A platter of sliced glazed teriyaki chicken with broccoli, carrots and zucchini.
        Teriyaki Chicken Thighs Recipe
      • Sliced and whole smoked chicken breasts on a gray serving plate.
        Easy Smoked Chicken Breast
      • Platter of grilled chicken breasts with herbs.
        Easy Blender Lemon Chicken Marinade

      Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this chicken salsa verde, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      A gray platter of sals verde chicken breasts with tomatillo sauce, grated cheese and chopped cilantro.

      Salsa Verde Chicken (green salsa chicken)

      Sally Cameron
      Make dinner in 20 minutes with these easy salsa chicken breasts. Boneless, skinless chicken breasts, tomatillo salsa (salsa verde), grated cheese. Toasted pumpkin seeds are optional. Make the salsa ahead and refrigerate or freeze or use jarred sauce. For dairy-free, skip the cheese. For best results allow your chicken to stand at room temperature, unwrapped, for about 30 minute to get the chill off. This recipe halves easily for two servings and freezes well too.
      5 from 1 vote
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 3 minutes mins
      Cook Time 15 minutes mins
      Total Time 18 minutes mins
      Course Main Course
      Cuisine Mexican, Southwestern
      Servings 4
      Calories 319 kcal

      Equipment

      • Cast iron skillet or similar pan with a lid

      Ingredients
        

      • 1 tablespoon olive oil
      • 1 ½ - 2 pounds boneless, skinless chicken breasts
      • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
      • ¼ teaspoons ground black pepper
      • 1 ½ cups tomatillo salsa verde (jarred or homemade) recipe on this site, or bottled
      • 2-3 ounces grated Jack cheese sub mozzarella, mexican blend, or grated manchego

      Optional Garnishes

      • 2 teaspoons chopped cilantro or Italian parsley
      • 1 tablespoon toasted pumpkin seeds recipe on this site

      Instructions
       

      • Heat the oil in a 10" cast iron skillet or other heavy pan over medium heat. Lay the chicken breasts smooth side up and sprinkle evenly with the salt, pepper and garlic. When pan is hot, add the chicken smooth side down and cook until this side is golden, about 3 minutes. 
      • Turn the chicken over, pour the sauce over the top, put a lid on the pan and turn heat to medium low. Simmer chicken for 10-12 minutes or until a digital thermometer reads 160° when inserted in the thickest part. Sprinkle with cheese, pumpkin seeds and cilantro and serve. The cooking time could vary depending on how cold your chicken is when you start.

      Notes

      If you don't have time to make the sauce, use a jarred sauce like Traders Joes Salsa Verde. Click here for my easy recipe, which freezes well. 
       

      Nutrition

      Calories: 319kcalCarbohydrates: 6gProtein: 40gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 121mgSodium: 1037mgPotassium: 837mgFiber: 1gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 694IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 116mgIron: 1mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

      Chicken Vegetable Soup Recipe

      01/12/2024 by Sally Cameron 10 Comments

      A finished pot of chicken vegetable soup ready to eat on a table.

      This chicken vegetable soup recipe is richly flavored, satisfying, and truly nourishing-healthy comfort food that warms you from head to toe on chilly days. Tender chicken, fresh vegetables, herbs, and savory chicken broth come together for a pot of soup that's not just good, it's great. I'll show you exactly how to make it, plus how to freeze it for later. This recipe is naturally gluten-free friendly and dairy-free.

      A big pot of homemade chicken vegetable soup ready to serve.

      I've been making some version of this chicken vegetable soup recipe most of my life. Over the years it's become a true healthy kitchen staple-classic flavors, tender chicken, and flexibility. Stir in pasta or rice if you want something more substantial, or keep it light and naturally gluten-free.

      [feast_advanced_jump_to]

      Why You'll Love Chicken Vegetable Soup

      • Healthy and hearty - A cozy, brothy soup loaded with vegetables and tender chicken, without feeling heavy.
      • Flexible chicken options - Make it with a raw bone-in chicken breast for maximum flavor, or use leftover or rotisserie chicken when you're short on time.
      • Great for leftovers - The soup reheats beautifully for easy lunches and it freezes well for future "I don't feel like cooking" nights.
      • Gluten-free friendly - Use gluten-free pasta (or skip the pasta for lower carb).
      • Stovetop or slow cooker - Cook it on the stovetop in about 35 minutes or let the slow cooker do the work on busy days.

      For more terrific soups using leftover chicken, try my Mexican chicken tortilla soup recipe or this hearty chicken minestrone soup.

      Ingredients You'll Need

      Ingredients for chicken vegetable soup ready for cooking.
      • Chicken: use raw chicken. For best results, use bone-in chicken as the bone adds flavor to the soup. You can also use leftover shredded chicken from baked chicken breasts or rotisserie chicken.
      • Olive oil: My go-to cooking oil but you can use avocado oil or a healthy neutral cooking oil like this. Don't use standard vegetable oil (it's not healthy).
      • Celery: one of the must have vegetables for cooking soup, plus it's an overlooked nutritional powerhouse.
      • Carrot: adds vegetable sweetness, part of the flavorful vegetable base for soups and many other dishes.
      • Aromatics: Onion and leek for great flavor. The combination of both is nice.
      • Garlic: for flavor and it's good for you! Use fresh garlic.
      • Fresh herbs: thyme, bay leaf (dried is fine), and fresh parsley add wonderful garden flavor and color. Tarragon is nice too.
      • Broth: homemade chicken broth is best. If you prefer, use frozen, canned or boxed broth. Be sure to read the labels for unhealthy ingredients and sodium levels.

      Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and black pepper.

      Need another option? Try this easy Instant Pot Chicken Soup Recipe. Done in 30 minutes.

      Chef's tip: For chicken broth (or chicken stock), homemade is healthiest and most flavorful broth. If you have an Instant Pot or pressure cooker, try my fast chicken broth recipe. Or make a batch of long cooking chicken bone broth. Both have great flavor. Make batches and freeze in portions. Need to buy it? Look in the freezer section for good store-bought chicken broth options and be sure to read labels for sodium levels and ingredients. Go with low-sodium chicken broth brands.

      Substitutions and Variations

      Try these options for making chicken vegetable soup for your family.

      • Chicken thighs - Use boneless, skinless thighs if you prefer dark meat. Trim extra fat, cook in the soup, then shred. They add rich, savory flavor.
      • Boneless chicken breasts or tenders - Use about ¾-1 pound. Simmer gently, then shred or cube.
      • No fresh thyme? - Use dried thyme or dried Italian seasoning, one of my go-to dried herb blends. Start with about ⅓ as much as fresh and adjust to taste.
      • Pasta (optional) - For best results, cook pasta separately and add it to bowls when serving. Keeps the broth clear and prevents over-soft noodles, especially with gluten-free pasta.
      • Rice - Brown or white rice both work. Add cooked rice (or frozen rice) at the end and warm through.
      • More veggies - Stir in chopped cooked green beans or other favorite vegetables.
      • Umami boost - Add a small Parmesan rind while the soup simmers, then remove before serving.

      For another terrific hearty soup, try this turkey and wild mushroom soup. Make it with leftover turkey or use leftover chicken.

      Chef's Tip: What not to use. For a healthier soup skip the jars or cubes of bullion like a famous "better than" processed paste, unless you are ok with eating stuff like sugar, corn syrup solids, hydrolyzed soy protein, dried whey (dairy), "flavoring" (whatever that is), food starch, disodium inosinate and guanylate. Read the ingredients, then toss it. You and your soup don't need it.

      How to Make Chicken Vegetable Soup

      A pot of vegetables starting to cook for chicken soup.
      Step 1: Over medium heat, add oil to a heavy pot pot and saute the chopped vegetables.
      Sautéing vegetables for chicken vegetable soup in a dutch oven.
      Step 2: Cook until the vegetables are softened, then add garlic, and herbs.
      Raw chicken breast in a pot of broth and vegetables cooking soup.
      Step 3: Add the broth and split chicken breast to the pot.
      Chicken breast finished cooking in a soup pot for chicken soup.
      Step 4: Use tongs to remove cooked chicken breast from the top.
      Adding elbow macaroni pasta to a soup pot.
      Step 5: If using pasta add now.
      Shredding chicken breast with forks in a glass pie plate.
      Step 6: Shred the chicken.
      Adding shredded chicken to a soup pot.
      Step 7: After pasta is done, add the chicken back to the pot and stir. Soup is ready.

      Slow Cooker Option

      For busy days, this soup cooks beautifully in a slow cooker. The flavors stay bright and the chicken turns tender and easy to shred.

      1. Sauté the aromatics first - In a skillet (or with the saute function of your slow cooker), warm the olive oil and cook the onion, celery, carrots, and leek over medium heat until softened, about 8-10 minutes. Add the garlic and cook 30-60 seconds. Transfer everything to the slow cooker.
      2. Add remaining ingredients - Stir in the thyme, bay leaf, salt, pepper, chicken broth, and the whole bone-in chicken breast (skin removed).
      3. Cook - Cover and cook on Low for 5-6 hours or High for 2½-3 hours, until the chicken is fully cooked (165°F).
      4. Shred and finish - Remove the chicken, shred the meat, and return it to the slow cooker. Add parsley. Taste and adjust seasoning.
      5. If adding pasta - Cook pasta separately on the stovetop and stir it into the soup at the end. Slow cookers don't reliably cook pasta evenly and can turn it mushy. You can also swap the past for cooked rice.

      Serving Chicken Vegetable Soup

      Serve chicken vegetable soup hot all by itself or with a crusty roll or garlic toast. If you need more, add a side leafy green salad with a tasty homemade Italian dressing. For a lift of flavor, serve with lemon wedges for a squeeze of fresh lemon juice.

      Storage and Freezing

      Leftover soup keeps in the refrigerator for 3-4 days. To freeze soup for later use, freeze in portions (12-16 ounces is good) in airtight containers for 2-3 months (labeled and dated). For storage, I use these silicone freezer containers or other airtight containers. They work great.

      An individual bowl of chicken vegetable soup with a pot behind it.

      Recipe FAQs

      Can I make a gluten-free or dairy-free version of chicken vegetable soup?

      If you are using store purchased broth, be sure it's labeled gluten-free chicken broth or there will be gluten. Sometimes it is hard to tell by the labels without research so don't risk it if you need to be gluten-free. The best option is make homemade broth where you control the ingredients. If adding pasta, use gluten-free pasta. If you're making a creamy version of the soup, skip the dairy or try a plant-based milk or cream, although the level of creaminess may be different.

      What vegetables are best for chicken vegetable soup?

      The best vegetables for chicken vegetable soup is the classic combination of onion, carrot, and celery to start. Other vegetables to add are chopped leeks for more flavor. Parsnips, which look like white carrots, are good too. If you like to add more green to the soup, add chopped green beans, baby spinach leaves or finely chopped kale towards the end of cooking. Another delicious option is chopped fennel, one of my favorites.

      Can I add pasta or rice to make it more filling?

      To make chicken soup more filling, add cooked rice or a small cooked pasta such as elbow macaroni. Another option is adding cubed potatoes, cooking until tender. I like gold potatoes as they don't fall apart like the drier russet potatoes. Save those for mashed potatoes.

      Can I use rotisserie chicken?

      Yes. Add shredded cooked chicken in the last 10-15 minutes so it doesn't dry out.

      More Chicken Soup Recipes

      For more soup recipes, checkout the soups and stews page. Homemade soups are welcome almost anytime of year.

      • Close up of Mexican chicken soup in a white bowl.
        Mexican Chicken Tortilla Soup Recipe
      • A bowl of chicken rice soup with herbs in a white bowl.
        Easy Instant Pot Chicken Rice Soup Recipe
      • chicken tomatillo soup
        Tomatillo Soup (with Chicken or Turkey)
      • Instant pot chicken broth
        Easy Instant Pot Chicken Broth

      ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

      If you make this chicken vegetable soup, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

      📖 Recipe

      A finished pot of chicken vegetable soup ready to eat on a table.

      Homemade Chicken Vegetable Soup Recipe

      Sally Cameron
      Classic and comforting, nothing is better than homemade chicken vegetable soup. Make it in a about an hour, even less if you use leftover over roast shredded chicken and pre-cooked pasta. To make this gluten-free, use brown rice pasta.
      5 from 3 votes
      Prevent your screen from going dark
      Print Recipe Pin Recipe
      Prep Time 15 minutes mins
      Cook Time 35 minutes mins
      Total Time 50 minutes mins
      Course Entree, Main Course, Soup
      Cuisine American
      Servings 4 servings
      Calories 228 kcal

      Equipment

      • Large soup pot like a Dutch oven

      Ingredients
        

      • 2 tablespoons olive oil
      • 1 ¼ cups chopped onion half a large
      • 1 ¼ cups chopped celery 2-3 ribs
      • 1 ¼ cups chopped carrots 2-3 carrots
      • 1 cup chopped leek pale green parts only, 1 medium
      • 2-3 cloves garlic chopped fine
      • 2 teaspoons minced fresh thyme or ¾ teaspoon dried thyme
      • 1 bay leaf
      • ¼ teaspoon Kosher or sea salt or more for your taste preference
      • ¼ teaspoon Black pepper
      • 6 cups chicken broth, low sodium or homemade 48 ounces
      • 1 large bone-in chicken breast 1 pound
      • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley finely chopped

      Optional

      • ¾ cup elbow macaroni pasta: GF or wheat optional

      Instructions
       

      • Add oil to a large pot over medium heat. When hot, add the onion, celery, carrots, and leek. Cook until the vegetables are softened, about 12 minutes. Watch your heat so the vegetables don't burn or cook too quickly. If needed, turn the heat down. Stir in the garlic, and cook another 30−60 seconds. Add thyme, bay leaf, salt, and pepper.
      • Remove skin and extra fat from chicken breast. Cut chicken breast crosswise through the bone into two pieces with a chef's knife. Add the broth and the chicken breast to the pot. Bring to almost a boil, turn down to low, add a lid to the pot and simmer until chicken is cooked through, about 15 minutes (to 165°F).
      • Remove the chicken from the pot. Add the pasta (if using), turn the heat up a little and simmer until pasta is tender. Time depends on your pasta (about 10 minutes).
        When the chicken is cool enough to handle, shred the meat and add back to the pot when the pasta is done. Remove the bay leaf. Add parsley. Ladle into warm bowls to serve.

      Notes

      Optional adds:
      • Add pasta, GF or wheat, elbow macaroni is a great size.
      • Add cooked rice, white or brown.
      • Add small cubed gold potatoes where I add the pasta option and cook until tender. 
      • Add a can of rinsed and drained white beans, such as small white beans, cannellini beans, or great northern beans. 
      • Or skip it all together for a simple chicken vegetable soup.
      For low sodium, use  homemade broth, as you do not add salt to homemade broth, and skip or limit salt in the recipe. Add a little lemon juice for a lift of flavor in place of salt. Even low sodium chicken broth has a lot of sodium. 
       

      Nutrition

      Calories: 228kcalCarbohydrates: 18gProtein: 18gFat: 11gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 29mgSodium: 364mgPotassium: 814mgFiber: 3gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 7344IUVitamin C: 14mgCalcium: 76mgIron: 2mg
      Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!
      • 1
      • 2
      • 3
      • …
      • 10
      • Next Page »
      Chef Sally Cameron of aFoodcentricLife.com in her kitchen.

      Welcome! I'm Sally, a professionally trained chef, former personal chef and caterer, lover of fresh healthy food, and sharing it with others.

      More about me →

      St. Patrick's Day

      • A gray bowl of chunky leek mushroom soup with a spoon beside bowl.
        Creamy Leek and Mushroom Soup Recipe
      • roasted carrots with thyme
        Maple Roasted Carrots (Easy Glazed Carrots Recipe)
      • Baby dutch yellow potatoes wtih herbs and Parmesan cheese.
        Buttery Baby Dutch Yellow Potatoes
      • Close up of a platter of salmon filets with lemon and herbs on a table.
        How to Make Steamed Salmon
      • Golden baked loaf of Irish soda bread, sliced on a white plate.
        Easy Gluten-Free Irish Soda Bread
      • braised cabbage in a bowl
        Sauteed Cabbage Recipe

      Early Spring Salads

      • Deep red and golden roasted beets tossed with vinaigrette, herbs, feta, and nuts in a salad bowl.
        Beet Salad with Feta
      • kale salad tahini dressing
        Kale and Chickpea Salad With Tahini Dressing
      • spinach salad with pomegranate
        Pomegranate and Spinach Salad
      • kale salad with colorful veggies | afoodcentriclife.com
        Roasted Vegetable Salad with Kale

      Footer

      as seen on

      Logos of Featured Publications

      About

      • Privacy Policy
      • Disclaimer
      • Terms & Conditions
      • Accessibility policy

      Newsletter

      • Sign Up! for emails and recipes.

      Menu

      • Home
      • About
      • Contact
      • Facebook
      • Instagram
      • Pinterest

      As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

      Copyright © 2025 aFoodcentricLife.com

      Rate This Recipe

      Your vote:




      A rating is required
      A name is required
      An email is required